Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
PT
In
te rn
al
T3902-390-02
Fo r
U se
nl y
Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Copyright for PTC software products is with Parametric Technology Corporation, its subsidiary companies (collectively PTC), and their respective licensors. This software is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. User and training guides and related documentation from PTC is subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. For Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent and Licensing Information see backside of this guide.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
PTC University additionally offers Precision Learning Programs. These are corporate learning programs designed to your organizations specific goals, current skills, desired competencies, and training preferences. Whatever your learning needs are, PTC University can help you get the most out of your PTC products.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Technical Support, License Management, Training & Consulting Tel: +800-PTC-4-HELP (00-800-78-24-43-57)
Asia
Fo r
PT
In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web site contains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to training facilities, and course descriptions. You can also reach technical support, and register for online service options such as knowledge base searches, reference libraries, and documentation. You can also find general information about PTC, PTC Products, Consulting Services, Customer Support, and PTC Partners.
In
te rn
al
U se
Europe
nl y
Precision Learning
Precision Learning in the Classroom
PTC University uses the Precision Learning methodology to develop effective, comprehensive class material that will improve the productivity of both individuals and organizations. PTC then teaches using the proven instructional design principal of Tell Me, Show Me, Let Me Do: Topics are introduced through a short presentation, highlighting the key concepts. These key concepts are then reinforced by seeing them applied in the software application. You then apply the concepts through structured exercises. After the course, a Pro/FICIENCY assessment is provided to enable you to assess your understanding of the materials. The assessment results will also identify the class topics that require further review. At the end of the class, you will either take a Pro/FICIENCY assessment via your PTC University eLearning account, or your instructor will provide training on how to do this after the class.
Each student that enrolls in a PTC class has a PTC University eLearning account. This account will be automatically created if you do not already have one. As part of the class, you receive additional content in your account: A Pro/FICIENCY assessment from the course content that generates a Recommended Learning Report based on your results. A Web-based training version of the course, based on the same instructional approach of lecture, demonstration, and exercise. The Recommended Learning Report will link directly to sections of this training that you may want to review. Please note that Web-based training may not be available in all languages. The Web-based training is available in your account for one year after the live class.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Please note that a localized map may not be available in every language and that the map above is partial and for illustration purposes only. Before the end of the class, your instructor will review the map corresponding to the course you are taking. This review, along with instructor recommendations, should give you some ideas for additional training that corresponds to your role and job functions.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Training Agenda
Day 1
Module 01 Module 02 Module 03 Module 04 Module 05 Module 06 Introduction to the Creo Parametric Basic Modeling Process Understanding Creo Parametric Concepts Using the Creo Parametric Interface Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models Editing Geometry, Features, and Models Creating Sketcher Geometry
Day 2
Module 07 Module 08 Module 09 Module 10 Module 11 Module 12
Using Sketcher Tools Creating Sketches for Features Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums Creating Sweeps and Blends
Day 4
Module Module Module Module Module Module
Fo r
Day 5
Module 25 Module 26 Module 27 Module 28 Investigating Parent/Child Relationships Capturing and Managing Design Intent Resolving Failures and Seeking Help Project II
PT
19 20 21 22 23 24
13 14 15 16 17 18
Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft Creating Rounds and Chamfers Project I Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools Creating Patterns Measuring and Inspecting Models
Assembling with Constraints Assembling with Connections Exploding Assemblies Drawing Layout and Views Creating Drawing Annotations Using Layers
In
te rn
Day 3
al
U se
nl y
Fo r C In te rn al U se O nl y
PT
Fo r
Using the Creo Parametric Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Understanding the Main Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Understanding the Folder Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Understanding the Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files . . . . . . 3-9 Understanding the Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Customizing the Ribbon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Working with Multiple Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Managing Files in Creo Parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Understanding Datum Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Understanding Display Style Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Analyzing Basic 3-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Understanding the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Creating and Managing View Orientations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Creating Style States Using the View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Managing and Editing Appearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Setting Up New Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57 Selecting Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Understanding Creo Parametric Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Using Drag Handles and Dimension Draggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Using Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Understanding the Model Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Understanding Model Tree Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Understanding Basic Model Tree Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Selecting Items using Direct Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Selecting Items using Query Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Using the Search Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Using the Smart Selection Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Understanding Selection Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Selecting Multiple Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Editing Geometry, Features, and Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Renaming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Utilizing Undo and Redo Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Understanding Regeneration and Auto Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Editing Features using Edit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Activating and Editing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Deleting and Suppressing Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Editing Feature and Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Creating Sketcher Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Reviewing Sketcher Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Understanding Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Modifying the Sketcher Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Utilizing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Sketching Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Sketching Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 Sketching Rectangles and Parallelograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Sketching Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Sketching Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 Sketching Circular Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34 Sketching Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Using Sketcher Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Understanding Construction Geometry Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Sketching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Using Geometry Tools within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Manipulating Sketches within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Dimensioning Entities within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Modifying Dimensions within Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Sketcher Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Creating New Sketch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Placing Sections into Sketcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Creating Sketches for Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Creating Sketches ('Sketch' Feature). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Specifying and Manipulating the Sketch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Utilizing Sketch References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Using Entity from Edge within Sketcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Thickening Edges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Creating Datum Features: Planes and Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Creating Datum Features Theory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Creating Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Creating Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Creating Extrudes, Revolves, and Ribs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Creating Solid Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Adding Taper to Extrude Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Common Dashboard Options: Extrude Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Common Dashboard Options: Feature Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Common Dashboard Options: Thicken Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Creating Solid Revolve Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Common Dashboard Options: Revolve Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Automatically Adding and Removing Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Creating Profile Rib Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Creating Holes, Shells, and Draft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Common Dashboard Options: Hole Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Creating Coaxial Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Creating Linear Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Creating Radial and Diameter Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Exploring Hole Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Creating Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Creating Draft Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Creating Basic Split Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 Analyzing Draft Hinges and Pull Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Creating Rounds and Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Creating Rounds Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Creating Rounds by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Creating Rounds by Selecting a Surface and Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Creating Rounds by Selecting Two Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Creating Full Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Creating Round Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15 Creating Chamfers by Selecting Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18
Fo r
PT
In
Creating Sweeps and Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Creating Sweeps with Open Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Creating Sweeps with Closed Trajectories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Analyzing Sweep Feature Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Creating Blends by Selecting Parallel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15 Creating Blends by Sketching Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20 Analyzing Blend Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
te rn
al
U se
Utilizing Internal Sketches and Embedded Datums. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Creating Internal Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Creating Embedded Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
nl y
Analyzing Basic Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21 Creating Chamfer Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 Project I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston Assembly Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller Housing . . . . . . . The Frame and Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-5
Measuring and Inspecting Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 Viewing and Editing Model Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 Investigating Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4 Analyzing Mass Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8 Using the Measure Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-12 Using the Measure Summary Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-20 Creating Planar Part Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-23 Measuring Global Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-28 Assembling with Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1 Understanding Assembly Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2 Creating New Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-4 Understanding Constraint Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9 Understanding Assembly Constraint Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11 Assembling Components using the Default Constraint . . . . . . . . . 19-13 Orienting Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16 Creating Coincident Constraints using Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-21 Creating Coincident Constraints using Datum Features . . . . . . . . 19-26 Creating Distance Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-31
Fo r
PT
In
Creating Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Direction Patterning in the First Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Direction Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6 Axis Patterning in the First Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11 Axis Patterning in the Second Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15 Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19 Creating Reference Patterns of Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22 Creating Reference Patterns of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-26 Deleting Patterns or Pattern Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-29
te rn
al
U se
Group, Copy, and Mirror Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Creating Local Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Copying and Pasting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Moving and Rotating Copied Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10 Mirroring Selected Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15 Mirroring All Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18 Creating Mirrored Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
nl y
Creating Parallel, Normal, and Angle Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-37 Assembling using Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-41 Utilizing the Accessory Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-48 Assembling with Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1 Understanding Connection Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2 Dragging Connected Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3 Assembling Components using the Slider Connection . . . . . . . . . . 20-6 Assembling Components using the Pin Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9 Assembling Components using the Cylinder Connection . . . . . . . 20-12 Analyzing Collision Detection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-14 Exploding Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1 Creating and Managing Explode States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2 Creating Explode Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-8 Animating Explode States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-12 Drawing Layout and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1 Analyzing Drawing Concepts and Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2 Analyzing Basic 2-D Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3 Creating New Drawings and Applying Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5 Creating and Orienting General Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9 Utilizing the Drawing Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-12 Managing Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-15 Adding Drawing Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-19 Creating Projection Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-23 Creating Cross-Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-27 Creating Detailed Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-31 Creating Auxiliary Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-35 Creating New Drawings using Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-36 Modifying Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-40 Creating Assembly and Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-44 Creating Drawing Annotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 Analyzing Annotation Concepts and Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 Creating Tables from File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Creating BOM Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8 Showing, Erasing, and Deleting Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13 Cleaning Up Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18 Manipulating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21 Creating Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-25 Inserting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-29 Analyzing Drawing Associativity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-33 Publishing Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-37 Using Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Understanding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 Creating and Managing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4 Utilizing Layers in Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-6 Creating Layer States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9 Utilizing Layers in Assembly Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12 Investigating Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1 Understanding Parent/Child Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-2 Viewing Part Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5 Viewing Assembly Parent/Child Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-9 Viewing Model, Feature, and Component Information . . . . . . . . . . 25-13 Capturing and Managing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1 Handling Children of Deleted and Suppressed Items . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2 Reordering Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-7 Inserting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10 Redefining Features and Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-14 Capturing Design Intent in Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-18 Capturing Design Intent in Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-20 Capturing Design Intent in Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-22 Capturing Design Intent in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-24 Resolving Failures and Seeking Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1 Understanding and Identifying Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2 Analyzing Geometry Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-5 Analyzing Open Section Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9 Analyzing Missing Part Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12 Analyzing Missing Component Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-16 Analyzing Missing Component Reference Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-20 Analyzing Invalid Assembly Constraint Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-24 Understanding Resolve Mode Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-29 Recovering Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-31 Using Creo Parametric Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-32 Project II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Air Circulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piston Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Block and Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
In this topic, you learn about the course handbook layout and the header used to begin each lab in Creo Parametric.
The following items are indicated in the figure above, where applicable: 1. Procedure/Exercise Name This is the name of the lab. 2. Scenario This briefly describes what will be done in the lab. The Scenario is only found in Exercises. 3. Close Windows/Erase Not Displayed A reminder that you should close any open files and erase them from memory:
Fo r
4.
5.
and then click OK. Click Erase Not Displayed Folder Name This is the working directory for the lab. Lab files are stored in topic folders within specific functional area folders. The path to the lab files is: PTCU\CreoParametric2\functional_area_folder\topic_folder In the example, Round is the functional area folder and Variable is the topic folder, so you would set the Working Directory to PTCU\CreoParametric2\Round\Variable. To set the working directory, right-click the folder in the folder tree or browser, and select Set Working Directory. Model to Open This is the file to be opened from the working directory. In the above example, VARIABLE_RAD.PRT is the model to open. The model could be a part, drawing, assembly, and so on. If you are expected to begin the lab without an open model, and instead create a new model, you will see Create New. To open the indicated model, right-click the file in the browser and select Open.
PT
Click Close
In
te rn
al
To make the exercises and procedures (referred to collectively as labs) as concise as possible, each begins with a header. The header lists the name of the lab, the working directory, and the file you are to open.
U se
The first module for certain courses is known as a process module. Process modules introduce you to the generic high-level processes that will be taught over the span of the entire course.
nl y
Theory This section provides detailed information about content introduced in the Concept, and is discussed in the class lecture but not shown on the overhead slide. The Theory section contains additional paragraphs of text, bullets, tables, and/or figures. Procedure This section provides step-by-step instructions about how to complete the topic within Creo Parametric. Procedures are short, focused, and cover a specific topic. Procedures are found in the Student Handbook only. Not every topic has a Procedure, as there are knowledge topics that contain only Concept and Theory. Exercise Exercises are similar to procedures, except that they are typically longer, more involved, and use more complicated models. Exercises also may cover multiple topics, so not every topic will have an associated exercise. Exercises are found in the separate Exercise Guide and/or the online exercise HTML files.
6. 7.
Task Name Labs are broken into distinct tasks. There may be one or more tasks within a lab. Lab Steps These are the individual steps required to complete a task.
Two other items to note for labs: Saving Saving your work after completing a lab is optional, unless otherwise stated. Exercises Exercises follow the same header format as Procedures.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder Step 1:
Configure Creo Parametric to ensure the system is set up to run the lab exercises properly.
Step 2:
Fo r
1. If you currently have files open, click Close toolbar, until the icon no longer displays.
PT
Close all open windows and erase all objects from memory to avoid any possible conflicts. from the Quick Access
2. Click Erase Not Displayed from the Data group in the ribbon. Click OK if the Erase Not Displayed dialog box appears.
In
3. Start Creo Parametric using the newly configured shortcut. The default working directory is set to the CreoParametric2 folder. You can then navigate easily to the functional area and topic folders.
te rn
2. Locate your existing Creo Parametric shortcut. Copy and paste the shortcut to your desktop. Right-click the newly pasted shortcut and select Properties. Select the Shortcut tab and set the Start In location to be PTCU\CreoParametric2.
al
U se
1. Extract the zipped class files to a root level drive such as C: or D:. The extracted ZIP will create the default folder path automatically, such as C:\PTCU\CreoParametric2.
Perform this task only if you are running the labs on a computer outside of a training center, otherwise proceed to Task 2.
nl y
Step 3:
Browse to and expand the functional area folder for this procedure and set the folder indicated in the header as the Creo Parametric working directory.
1. Notice the SampleFunctionalArea\Topic1_Folder as indicated in the header above. 2. If necessary, select the Folder Browser navigator. tab from the
Fo r
PT
3. Click Working Directory to view the current working directory folder in the browser. Double-click SampleFunctionalArea.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
4. Right-click the Topic1_Folder folder and select Set Working Directory. 5. Click Working Directory from the Common Folders section to display the contents of the new working directory in the browser.
Fo r
2. You are now ready to begin the first task in the lab: Read the first task. Perform the first step, which in most cases will be to set the initial datum display for the procedure or exercise. Perform the remaining steps in the procedure or exercise.
Step 5:
1. The instruction for setting the datum display indicates which Datum Display types to enable and disable. For example, Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. To set the datum display, first click the Datum Display drop-down menu from the In Graphics tool bar.
PT
In
1. Notice the lab model EXTRUDE_1.PRT is specified in the header above. Double-click extrude_1.prt in the browser to open it.
te rn
Step 4:
al
Alternatively you can use the cascading folder path in the browser to navigate to the topic folder, and then right-click and select Set Working Directory from the browser.
U se
nl y
3. Next, enable and disable the check boxes as necessary. For example you could disable the Select All check box, and then enable only the desired datum types.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r C In te rn al U se O nl y
PT
Module
1
U se O nl y
After completing this module, you will be able to: Prepare for a part model design by scoping the design parameters of an adjoining part. Create a new part model by following the required design parameters. Create an assembly by assembling the new part model with existing part models. Create a 2-D drawing of the new part model that includes views, dimensions, and a title block.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Objectives
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 1
Fo r
Before you create a new part model design, it is often necessary to acquire information about the components that surround it in an assembly. Consequently, you may want to open and inspect these parts before beginning the new design. At your company, this preparation stage may occur at the same time as the new part model design, or it may not occur at all. In either case, establishing knowledge of adjoining parts can be helpful in the new part model design.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 4 Creating a Drawing of the New Part Model
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 3
U se
nl y
Preparing for part model design Open and edit the dimensions of an existing part model to watch the geometry update automatically.
from the ribbon Click Open at the top of the interface. In the File Open dialog box, . click Working Directory Double-click the Process folder to view its contents. Right-click the BasicModeling folder and select Set Working Directory. Double-click the Basic-Modeling folder to view its contents. Select KEY_BASE.PRT. Click Open.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear the check boxes for Axis Display , Point Display , and to disable
4. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window and select FRONT.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
3. To edit the hole diameter from 3.5 to 5, do the following: Click the hole in the model to select it. Notice that it highlights in green. Right-click and hold, and then select Edit. Double-click the 3.5 value to edit it. Edit the value from 3.5 to 5 and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the model geometry to the new diameter value.
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Fo r
7. From the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, select the check boxes for Plane and Axis Display Display to enable their display.
Module 1 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
6. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window and select Standard Orientation.
al
2012 PTC
U se
5. To edit the shaft height from 25 to 35, do the following: Click the shaft in the model to select it. Notice that it highlights in green. In the graphics window containing the model, right-click and hold, and then select Edit. Double-click the 25 value to edit it. Edit the value from 25 to 35 and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the model geometry to the longer shaft value.
nl y
8. To save the KEY_BASE.PRT part model and close the window, do the following: Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the Save Object dialog box, click OK. from the Quick Access toolbar to close the window Click Close containing KEY_BASE.PRT. Step 2: Creating a new part model Create a new part model named KEY_HANDLE.PRT and model its geometry.
Fo r
3. To start a new Sketch feature, do the following: Click Sketch from the Datum group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the model tree located on the left side of the interface, click datum plane FRONT to select it. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
2. In the New File Options dialog box, select mmns_part_solid as the template and click OK.
In
Click New from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the New dialog box, select Part as the Type and Solid as the Sub-type. Type key_handle in the Name field. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
Click One-by-One from the Operations group in the ribbon. A diameter dimension appears for the circle. Double-click the diameter dimension, edit its value to 5, and press ENTER.
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. To sketch a circle and edit its diameter to 5, do the following: Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group in the ribbon. In the graphics window, cursor over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal lines. The cursor snaps to the center. Click to place the circle at the intersection, drag your mouse outward to start sketching the circle, and click again to complete the circle.
nl y
6. To create an Extrude feature using the sketch you just created, do the following: Ensure that the Sketch feature is still selected. If it is not highlighted in green, you must click it to select it. from the Click Extrude Shapes group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the dashboard at the top of the interface, edit the depth from Blind to Symmetric . In the dashboard, edit the depth value to 12 and press ENTER. The orange geometry depth increases. Orange geometry is preview geometry and is representative of how the feature should appear when it is completed. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard. 7. To start a second new Sketch feature, do the following: Click Sketch from the Datum group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the graphics window, click the front surface of the cylinder geometry to select it as the sketching plane for the new Sketch feature. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 9
U se
nl y
9. Click OK
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 10
PT
In
Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window. Double-click the diameter dimension, edit its value to 7, and press ENTER.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Click One-by-One from the Operations group in the ribbon. A diameter dimension appears for the circle.
8. To sketch a circle and edit its diameter to 7, do the following: Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group in the ribbon. In the graphics window, cursor over the intersection of the vertical and horizontal lines. The cursor snaps to the center. Click to place the circle at the intersection, drag your mouse outward to start sketching the circle, and click again to complete the circle.
nl y
10. To create a second Extrude feature using the second sketch you just created, do the following: Ensure that the Sketch feature is still selected. If it is not highlighted in green, you must click it to select it. from the Click Extrude Shapes group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the dashboard at the top of the interface, click Change to flip the Depth Direction orange preview geometry into the existing geometry. In the graphics window, click and drag the small white, square drag handle to edit the depth to 5. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.
11. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear the check boxes for Plane Display disable their display.
In
te rn
al
and Axis Display
U se
to
Module 1 | Page 11
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
nl y
12. To round two edges of the geometry, do the following: from the Select Round Round types drop-down menu in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the graphics window, press CTRL and click the two edges to be rounded to select them. In the dashboard, edit the round radius to 0.5 and press ENTER. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard. 13. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select the completed round feature.
14. To mirror the part, do the following: In the model tree located on the left side of the interface, press CTRL and click the Extrude 2 and Round 1 features to select them.
from the Click Mirror Editing group in the ribbon at the top of the interface. In the model tree, click the FRONT datum plane to select it as the datum from which you mirror the geometry. Click Complete Feature from the dashboard.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
1. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, select the check box for Plane Display to enable their display.
Fo r
2012 PTC
In
Step 3:
Creating a new assembly by assembling the part models Create a new assembly CHUCK_KEY.ASM and assemble the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and KEY_BASE.PRT.
te rn
Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the Save Object dialog box, click OK.
al
U se
Module 1 | Page 13
15. To modify geometry dimensions to their proper length and regenerate the model, do the following: In the model tree located on the left side of the interface, right-click the Extrude 1 feature and hold, and then select Edit. In the graphics window, double-click the 12 dimension, edit it to 60, and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the geometry. Notice that the model geometry grows long.
nl y
2. To create the CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly model, do the following: Click New from the Quick Access toolbar near the top of the interface. In the New dialog box, select Assembly as the Type and verify that Design is the Sub-type. Edit the Name to chuck_key. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK. Select mmns_asm_design as the template and click OK.
You must resize the new assembly window that appears. 3. To assemble the KEY_BASE.PRT, do the following:
Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group at the top of the interface. In the Open dialog box, select component KEY_BASE.PRT and click Open. In the dashboard, edit the constraint in the drop-down list
Fo r
4. In the In Graphics toolbar at the top of the graphics window, clear the check box for Plane Display to disable their display.
Module 1 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. To start assembling KEY_HANDLE.PRT by creating the Coincident constraint, do the following: Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group at the top of the interface. In the Open dialog box, click the component KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it and click Open. In the graphics window, click the inside hole surface on KEY_BASE.PRT to select it as the assembly reference. Click the shaft surface on KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it as the component reference. The KEY_HANDLE.PRT repositions itself through the hole in KEY_BASE.PRT, and the Coincident constraint is created. 6. To continue assembling KEY_HANDLE.PRT by creating the Distance constraint, do the following: In the graphics window, click the flat surface on KEY_HANDLE.PRT to select it as the component reference. Cursor over the upper left of the top surface of KEY_BASE.PRT to pre-highlight it. Right-click to query the back, flat surface of KEY_BASE.PRT and click to select it as the assembly reference. The Distance constraint is created.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 1 | Page 15
U se
nl y
8. To edit the shaft length of KEY_HANDLE.PRT within the assembly, do the following: In the model tree, right-click KEY_HANDLE.PRT and select Activate. In the graphics window, select the rounded shaft of the KEY_HANDLE.PRT, right-click and hold, and then select Edit. In the graphics window, double-click the 60 dimension to edit it. Edit the 60 dimension value to 45 and press ENTER.
Fo r
from the Click Regenerate Operations group in the ribbon to update the geometry to the new length. In the model tree, right-click CHUCK_KEY.ASM and select Activate.
Module 1 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. To edit the Distance constraint value and complete the assembly of KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do the following: In the graphics window, click and drag the small white, square drag handle to edit the offset value of the Distance constraint to 6. Click Complete Component from the dashboard.
9. To verify the geometry length change in the KEY_HANDLE.PRT, do the following: Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select KEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch windows from the CHUCK_KEY.ASM assembly to the KEY_HANDLE.PRT part model. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 1 and select Edit. Notice that the shaft length is now 45, even though it was edited in the assembly. Click in the background of the graphics window to clear the dimensions. Step 4:
Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type. Edit the Name to key_handle. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK. In the New Drawing dialog box, verify that the Default Model is KEY_HANDLE.PRT. Select the Use template option and click Browse to browse for the drawing template. In the Open dialog box, select the student_template.drw template and click Open. Click OK in the New Drawing dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Creating a drawing of the new part model Create a new drawing KEY_HANDLE.DRW for the part model KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
al
U se
Module 1 | Page 17
nl y
2. The input window prompts you for the drawn_by parameter. Type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. Your name is entered into the title block as the drawing displays in the graphics window. 3. To edit the drawing scale, do the following: In the bottom-left corner of the graphics window, double-click the Scale value to edit it. The input window prompts you to enter the new value for Scale. Type 5 as the new Scale value and press ENTER. The drawing views automatically rescale to the new value of 5. 4. To move the 7 diameter dimension to the other drawing view, do the following: Click the 7 diameter dimension in the right drawing view to select it. It highlights in green. Right-click in the graphics window and select Move Item to View. Select the left drawing view. The dimension is moved to this new drawing view.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
7. To edit the KEY_HANDLE.PRT shaft length and save it, do the following: Right-click Extrude 1 in the model tree and select Edit. In the graphics window, double-click the 45 dimension to edit it. Edit the 45 dimension value to 60 and press ENTER. Click twice in the graphics window to update the geometry.
8. To save the KEY_HANDLE.PRT and close the window, do the following: from the Quick Access toolbar. Click Save Click OK in the Save Object dialog box. In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close KEY_HANDLE.PRT window. to close the
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
6. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select KEY_HANDLE.PRT to switch to the window containing KEY_HANDLE.PRT.
U se
5. To move the 5 diameter dimension to another location in the drawing view, do the following: In the graphics window, click the 5 dimension in the right drawing view to select it. It highlights in green. Cursor over the highlighted dimension. The cursor appears as four arrows. This is an indication that you can now click and drag this dimension to move it to another location on the drawing. Click and drag to move the 5 diameter dimension to the center of the drawing view.
O
Module 1 | Page 19
nl y
9. To activate the CHUCK_KEY. ASM assembly, save it, and close the window, do the following: Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select CHUCK_KEY.ASM to switch to the assembly and activate it. Click Regenerate Operations group. from the
10. To save the KEY_HANDLE.DRW drawing, close the window, and erase all files from session memory, do the following: Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK in the Save Object dialog box. to close the In the Quick Access toolbar, click Close KEY_HANDLE.DRW window. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Fo r
Module 1 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
Note that the geometry and dimension in the drawing have both updated.
U se
Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK in the Save Object dialog box. In the Quick Access toolbar, to close the click Close CHUCK_KEY.ASM window.
nl y
Module
2
U se O te rn al
Module 2 | Page 1
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand solid modeling concepts. Understand feature-based concepts. Understand parametric concepts. Understand associative concepts. Understand model-centric concepts. Recognize basic Creo Parametric file extensions.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Objectives
In
Finally, you learn how to recognize some of the basic file extensions used to identify different types of Creo Parametric objects.
nl y
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 2
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Mass Properties
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
Individually, each feature is typically simple; however, as they are added together, they form complex parts and assemblies. In this example, we have a connecting rod in seven stages of its creation: First, an extrusion is created, which forms the overall shape and size of the model. An additional extrusion is created at the top of the model. A third extrusion is created at the bottom of the model. A hole is created at the bottom of the model. Another hole is created at the top of the model. A round is created on the four inside edges. A small radial hole is created at the top of the model.
2012 PTC
PT
The geometric definition of a model is defined by the type of features used and the order in which each feature is placed. Each feature builds upon the previous feature and can reference any of the preceding features, therefore enabling design intent to be built into the model.
In
Creo Parametric is a feature-based product development tool. The models are constructed using a series of easy to understand features rather than confusing mathematical shapes and entities.
te rn
al
U se
Module 2 | Page 3
nl y
Fo r
Parent/Child Relationships
Relationships between features in Creo Parametric provide a powerful tool for capturing design intent. During the modeling process, design intent is added as one feature is created with reference to another. When creating a new feature, any feature referenced during its creation becomes a parent of the new feature. The new feature referencing the parent is referred to as a child of the parent. If the parent feature is updated, any children of the parent update accordingly. These relationships are referred to as parent/child relationships. This example shows a piston model intersected with a hole feature. In the middle figure, the piston height is modified from 18.5 to 25. Notice that the hole moves upward as the piston height increases. The design intent of the piston is to have the hole located at a specified distance from the top of the piston. The hole maintains that distance regardless of how tall the
Module 2 | Page 4 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Features referenced during creation become parents. If parent features change, child features predictably change accordingly.
nl y
Parent/child relationships:
piston becomes. This intent was added by dimensioning the hole to the top surface of the piston. Alternatively, if the intent of the design is to have the hole located at a specified distance from the bottom of the piston, the hole would be dimensioned from the bottom surface of the piston, yielding a different result when the height of the piston is modified. The right most image in the figure shows modifications made to the location and diameter of the hole.
Best Practices
When creating features in your model, try to reference features and geometry that are robust, unlikely to be deleted, and provide the desired design intent. While this is not always possible, striving to do so helps you build robust, easy-to-modify models.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 2 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Figure 1 Associativity
Bi-directional associativity means that all changes made to an object in any mode of Creo Parametric are automatically reflected in every related mode. For example, a change made in a drawing is reflected in the part being documented in the drawing. That same change is also reflected in every assembly using that part model. It is important to understand that the associativity between different modes is possible because the part shown in a drawing is not copied into the drawing, but rather associatively linked to the drawing. Likewise, an assembly is not a large file containing copies of every part in the assembly, but rather a file containing associative links to every model used in the assembly.
Fo r
Best Practices
Because drawing and assembly files have associative links to the models contained in them, these objects cannot be opened without the presence of the models they contain. Essentially, you cannot send your colleague only a drawing file to open. He or she must have the drawing file along with any model referenced in the drawing. For an assembly, he or she must have the assembly file and all models used in the assembly.
Module 2 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
In a model-centric product development tool, the design model is the common source for all deliverables utilizing that specific design model. This means that all downstream deliverables point directly to a common design model. The model is referenced as components in assemblies, views in a drawing, the cavity of a mold, geometry meshed in an FEM model, and so on. The benefit of using a model-centric development tool is that a change made to the design model automatically updates all related downstream deliverables.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Figure 1 Model-Centric
al
Module 2 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 2 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Assembly File
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
3
U se O te rn al
Module 3 | Page 1
Creo Parametric's user interface is an intuitive, user-friendly experience. The system is designed to make the most of its available space by displaying certain information at the right time, and then using that space to display different information at a different time. This module introduces you to the main user interface and defines each area and how you can use it. You will gain an understanding of basic skills, including file manipulation and management, as well as setting the working directory and saving and opening files. You learn basic Creo Parametric display options for datum display that will aid you throughout this course. You also learn about 3-D view orientations and style states, and understand how to manage and apply appearances.
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand Creo Parametric's main interface, folder browser, Web browser, and ribbon system. Set the working directory and manage files in Creo Parametric, including how to open and save files. Understand basic Creo Parametric display options, including model display style and datum display. Create and manage basic 3-D orientations. Create style states using the view manager. Manage and apply Creo Parametric appearances. Set up new part models.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Objectives
In
nl y
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 2
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In Graphics toolbar Located at the top of the graphics window, the In Graphics toolbar contains commonly used tools and filters for the graphics window display. You can customize the tools and filters displayed in the In Graphics toolbar.
Fo r
Dialog boxes Content-sensitive windows which display and prompt you for additional information.
2012 PTC
PT
Dashboard Locked at the top of the user interface, the dashboard appears when you create or edit the definition of a feature. The dashboard provides you with controls, inputs, status, and guidance for performing a task, such as creating or editing a feature. Changes are immediately visible on the screen. Various dashboard tabs are available with additional feature options. Dashboard icons on the left include feature controls while the Pause, Preview, Create Feature, and Cancel Feature options are located on the right.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 3
U se
Ribbon A context-sensitive menu across the top of the interface that contains the majority of the commands you use in Creo Parametric. The ribbon arranges commands into logical tasks through tabs and groups.
nl y
Quick Access toolbar By default, the Quick Access toolbar is located at the top of the interface. It contains a commonly used set of commands that are independent of the tab currently displayed in the ribbon. These commands are available regardless of the specific mode or ribbon tab in which you are working. You can customize the Quick Access toolbar to add additional commands.
Status bar Located at the bottom of the interface, the status bar contains icons for toggling the model tree and Web browser panes on and off. It also contains the message log, regeneration manager, 3D box selector, and selection filter.
Message Log The message log provides you with prompts, feedback, and messages from Creo Parametric. Menu manager A cascading menu that appears on the far right of the interface when you use certain functions and modes in Creo Parametric. You typically work from top to bottom in this menu; however, clicking Done is performed bottom to top. Bold menu options are automatically selected when you middle-click.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
In
te rn
Figure 1 The Folder Browser Pane
Fo r
al
U se
nl y
computer. The contents of a folder selected in the Folder Tree are displayed in the Web browser.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
File list Displays the contents of a folder selected in the Folder Browser. You can set either List, Thumbnails, or Details display, filter the list based on file type, or display instances and/or all versions of a file. Double-click a folder to view its contents or double-click a file to open it in Creo Parametric. Select a file to preview it in the preview window or drag and drop it into the graphics window to open it. You can also cut, copy, paste, and delete folders and objects in the file list.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
The Web browser is an integrated content viewer within Creo Parametric. It works in conjunction with the Folder Browser so you can find files on your computer as well as browse Web pages. The Web browser is embedded in the Creo Parametric interface, and slides over the graphics window. The Web browser is divided into three sections: file list, preview window, and browser controls.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Preview window When a model is selected from the file list, you can dynamically preview it by expanding the preview window. You can Spin, Pan, and Zoom in the preview window to observe model geometry. You can also edit the model display. By default, the preview window is collapsed at the bottom of the Web browser. Browser controls The Web browser supports tabbed browsing and contains the following standard control buttons: Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Home, and Print. Select a sub-folder to view its contents in the Web browser, or type a Web address in the Address field. The Address field uses breadcrumbs for folder navigation. You can begin typing the name of the desired file or folder in the Search field to dynamically filter the folder's contents in the Web browser. You can switch between tabs by clicking on the desired one, and you can add and close tabs.
You can drag the right vertical edge of the Web browser to adjust its width in the same way you can adjust the size of most other windows. You can
In
te rn
al
also toggle the Web browser on or off by clicking Web Browser status bar. in the
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 8
PT
The Web browser also displays other context-sensitive information, including model and feature information.
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
The working directory is the designated location for opening and saving files. Typically, the default working directory is the directory from which Creo Parametric is started. However, there are three methods to define a new working directory:
Fo r
From the Folder Tree or Web browser Right-click the folder that is to be the new working directory and select Set Working Directory. From the File menu Click File > Manage Session > Select Working Directory. Browse to and select the directory that is to be the new working directory. Click OK. From the File Open dialog box Right-click the folder that is to be the new working directory and select Set Working Directory. You can navigate directly to the working directory at any time by selecting the Working Directory common folder from the Navigator. The new working directory setting is not saved upon exiting Creo Parametric.
Opening Files
You can use any of the following methods to open a file:
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 9
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Browse to the desired folder using the Navigator (either with Common Folders or through the Folder Tree) to display its contents in the Web browser. Then, you can either double-click the file in the file list, or right-click the file in the file list and select Open. You can also drag the file from the file list into the graphics window. from the Quick Access toolbar and Click File > Open or click Open the File Open dialog box appears. Browse to the file, select it, and either double-click it or click Open. The File Open dialog box is the equivalent of the Navigator and Browser combination in the main interface.
Saving Files
You can use any of the following methods to save a file: Click File > Save.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 10
PT
In
You can also save a copy of an existing file by clicking File > Save As > Save a Copy. Saving a copy enables you to create an exact copy of a file, but with a different name. When saving a copy of an assembly, you must also decide how to manage its dependent components. You can save a copy of the dependent components by renaming them with a suffix or specifying new names for all of them, or you can decide not to save them at all.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar. By default, a file is saved to the current working directory. However, if a file is retrieved from a directory other than the working directory and then saved, the file saves to the directory from which it was retrieved.
nl y
PROCEDURE - Setting the Working Directory and Opening and Saving Files
Task 1: Set the working directory, open a file, and then save it.
Fo r
2. In the Web browser, double-click Sample_Topic to view its contents. Select NUT.PRT. Click Preview at the bottom of the Web browser to expand it. Click the Preview window edge and drag to expand it. In the Preview window, right-click and select Refit. Double-click NUT.PRT to open it. 3. Click Save Click OK. 4. Click Close
PT
2012 PTC
In
from the Quick Access toolbar. from the Quick Access toolbar.
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 11
For each procedure in this course, the working directory to be set is specified in the top header.
U se
1. In the Folder Browser , click . Working Directory Click Folder Tree to expand it. If necessary, expand the CreoParametric2 folder and click File to view its contents in the Web browser. Right-click the Sample_Topic folder and select Set Working Directory.
nl y
Task 2:
Set a new working directory, open a new model, and then save it.
1. In the Folder Tree, expand the Sample_Topic folder. 2. Right-click Sample_Subfolder and select Set Working Directory.
6. In the Folder Tree, right-click the Sample_Topic folder and select Set Working Directory.
Fo r
. 7. Click Save Notice that even though the working directory is set to Sample_Topic, the file is saved to Sample_Subfolder. Click OK. from the Quick 8. Click Close Access toolbar. 9. Close the Folder Tree in the Folder Browser .
Module 3 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Figure 2 Portion of Active Part Ribbon, Model Tab, and Datum Group
Fo r
The File menu, which contains commonly used system commands. Tasks, which are organized into a series of tabs. Tabs, which contain groups of icon commands. Current features being created, which stack up in subsequent ribbon tabs. For example, Extrude > Sketch > Rotate Resize.
Command Search
You can activate the command search by clicking Command Search next to the Creo Parametric Help icon. This activates the Command Search field, which enables you to type commands. As you begin typing a command, a list appears and dynamically filters results as you type. When you cursor over any of the lists results, the system locates and highlights the command in the ribbon. If you select any of the lists results, the command starts.
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 13
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
At the bottom of the list, you can click Setup to access the Command Search Settings dialog box. The following options are available: Search in Help Text Match Case Match Criteria The following options are available: Begins with Contains Ends with
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Enhancements\Ribbon-Interface Task 1:
1. Start Creo Parametric, if necessary. 2. Notice the standby ribbon that displays by default. 4. In the ribbon, select the Home tab if necessary, and notice the available commands. 5. Click New and click OK in the New dialog box.
Fo r
9. From the Datum group, expand the Point types drop-down menu.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 15
U se
O
.
nl y
10. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab. 11. Locate the Measure group. 12. Expand the Measure types drop-down menu.
Fo r
17. Select the Model tab. 18. Click in the graphics window background.
Module 3 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
19. Press and release ALT. 20. Notice that the Analysis tab has a shortcut of A. 21. Press A on your keyboard. 22. Notice that the Measure types drop-down menu has a shortcut of ME. 23. Press ME on your keyboard. 24. Notice that Angle shortcut of A. has a
25. Press A on your keyboard again. 26. Notice that the Measure dialog box displays. 27. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT and TOP. 28. Close the Measure dialog box. 29. Click Command Search enable it. to
30. In the field, type gr, and notice the commands that display.
PT
Fo r
35. In the Command Search field, type fam and notice the commands that display. 36. Cursor over each entry, and notice that Family Table is available in two different locations.
2012 PTC
In
31. Cursor over Graph, and notice its location in the Datum group.
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 17
U se
nl y
37. In the Command Search field, type map and notice that this command is not in the ribbon by default, but can be activated. 38. Click Setup to view the different options. 39. Click Cancel. 40. Click Command Search This completes the procedure. to disable it.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
You can customize the ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and In Graphics toolbar in numerous ways to personalize it for your work style. You can drag almost any icon onto the Quick Access toolbar so that it is available. You can also customize commands in the In Graphics toolbar. The different ribbons that display when switching between modes such as Part, Assembly, and Sketcher are independently customizable. Furthermore, the Quick Access and In Graphics toolbars that display with each ribbon are independent as well, enabling you to maintain separate toolbar customizations for each mode. You can perform the following high level ribbon customizations: Collapse or display the ribbon using Minimize the Ribbon . You can also use the CTRL+F1 shortcut to minimize or restore the ribbon. You can even double-click the tabs to minimize or restore it. Create new ribbon tabs. Within the ribbon, you can perform the following customizations to the tabs: Reorder the tabs. Select up to three groups to be included in a tab.
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 19
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Collapse Priorities
al
U se
nl y
Create custom tabs. Within the tabs, you can perform the following customizations on the groups: Customize group contents. Create custom groups. Collapse groups. The first icon in the group is shown as a large icon with a drop-down menu. Customize the collapse priority. As the Creo window is made narrower, groups begin to collapse, and they collapse based on the priority set. For example, priority 7 is collapsed first, and priority 1 is collapsed last. Within the groups, you can perform the following customizations on the icons: Specify small icons or large icons. Specify whether the icon image is displayed. Specify whether the command label is displayed.
Your new ribbon, Quick Access toolbar, and In Graphics toolbar settings can be exported to a *.ui file. These *.ui files are read by Creo Parametric in the following order: 1. <loadpoint>\text\admin_creo_parametric_customization.ui Note the admin_ prefix. 2. <user_profile>\AppData\..\creo_parametric_customization.ui This is the system default location. 3. <working_dir>\creo_parametric_customization.ui This file is read only if the config.pro option load_ui_customization_ run_dir is set to yes.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Enhancements\Ribbon-Interface Task 1:
1. To ensure the ribbon and toolbars are set to their default state, right-click the ribbon and select Customize the Ribbon.
7. Click Close
PT
8. Click File > Manage Session, and cursor over Erase Not Displayed. Right-click and select Add to Quick Access Toolbar. , and double-click to
Fo r
10. In the top right of the interface, click Minimize the Ribbon minimize the ribbon. 11. Click Minimize the Ribbon again to restore the ribbon.
12. Right-click over the ribbon and notice the Minimize the Ribbon option. Notice the CTRL+F1 shortcut for this option. 13. In the ribbon, right-click over the Datum group name. Notice the options.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
al
6. Right-click the Part mode In Graphics toolbar and clear the Datum Display Filters check box. Select the Plane Display, Axis Display, Point Display, and Csys Display check boxes.
U se
O
.
Module 3 | Page 21
nl y
2. Click Restore Defaults and select Restore all Ribbon tabs and Quick Access Toolbar customizations.
from the
in the 15. Right-click Datum far-right side of the dashboard. Clear the Minimize the Group check box. 16. Click Cancel Feature .
20. Right-click Sketch again and select Hide Command Label. 21. Click the Datum group drop-down menu, and drag the Graph up.
23. In the ribbon, click the View tab and drag it to just after the Model tab.
Fo r
26. Notice the options in the dialog box. 27. Notice the New Tab, New Group, and New Cascade options as well as the others. 28. Click Import/Export and select Export all Ribbon and Quick Access Toolbar customizations. 29. Notice that this would export a *.ui file. 30. Click Cancel. 31. Click OK in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
Module 3 | Page 22
PT
24. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select Commands Not in the Ribbon from the Choose commands drop-down list.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
and
nl y
from the Quick Access toolbar. from the Quick Access toolbar and
34. Right-click the ribbon and select Customize the Ribbon. 35. Click Restore Defaults and select Restore all Ribbon tabs and Quick Access Toolbar customizations. 36. Click Yes > OK.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 23
U se
nl y
Fo r
You can use the Window group in the View ribbon tab to access commands for working with multiple windows.
in the Window group of the View ribbon tab to select Click Windows the desired model. If you switch windows using the Windows taskbar, the newly selected window is not made active. In the Window group in the View ribbon tab you can click Activate selected window.
Module 3 | Page 24
PT
Creo Parametric enables you to have multiple windows open at the same time, each containing a different model. This is a common occurrence during the design process. However, at any given moment, all applicable functionality is available only on one active window.
In
te rn
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
al
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Resize a window You can resize the Creo Parametric window by clicking the Window group drop-down menu and selecting Maximize , Restore and Default Size. You can also click the maximize or minimize buttons in the window's title bar.
te rn
U se
nl y
Module 3 | Page 25
In
Fo r
Creo Parametric is a memory-based system, which means that files you create and edit are stored within system memory (RAM) while you are working on them. It is important to remember that until you save your files, you risk losing them if there is a power outage or system crash. When a model is in system memory, it is referred to as being In Session. Models are stored In Session (in system memory, or RAM) until you either erase them or exit Creo Parametric. When you close the window that contains a model, the model is still In Session. This is especially important if you are working on files that have the same name but are in various stages of completion, such as in this course. Both the Folder Browser and File Open dialog boxes provide icons which enable you to display only In Session models. There are two different methods to erase models from session: Current Only the model in the current window is erased from system memory (and the window closed). You can click File > Manage Session > Erase Current to erase the current window's contents from system memory. Not Displayed Only erases from system memory those models that are not found in any Creo Parametric windows. You can click File > Manage
Module 3 | Page 26 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Model Versions
al
U se
Figure 1 In Session in the Folder Browser and File Open Dialog Box
nl y
Session > Erase Not Displayed or you can add the Erase Not Displayed icon to the Quick Access toolbar. Erasing models does not delete them from the hard drive or network storage area; it only removes them from that session.
Deleting Models
Old Versions The system deletes all but the latest version of the given file. All Versions The system deletes all versions of the given file.
Renaming Models
If you need to edit the name of any model, you can rename it directly from within Creo Parametric. There are two different methods to rename models: On Disk and In Session The system renames the file both in system memory and on the hard drive. In Session The system renames the file only in system memory.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Problems can result if you rename a file on disk and then retrieve a model (not already in session) that depends on the previous file name; for example, a part cannot be found for an assembly.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 27
U se
Deleting files permanently removes them from the working directory on your hard drive or network storage area. Be careful when deleting files; you cannot undo the deletion of files.
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar.
3. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed and click OK from the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
Fo r
9. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to close the window containing DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT. This leaves DRILL_BIT_BLACK.PRT still open.
10. Click Web Browser to toggle the Web browser window off. 11. Click Folder Browser from the top of the model tree.
12. In the Folder Browser, click In Session to view in session contents in the Web browser. Right-click DRILL_BIT_GRAY. PRT and select Open.
Module 3 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
from the Folder Browser to view the 4. Click Working Directory working directory contents in the Web browser.
nl y
13. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar. 14. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. 15. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box to erase DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT from system memory. 16. Click Folder Browser from the top of the model tree. 17. Click In Session from the Folder Browser. Notice that DRILL_BIT_GRAY.PRT is no longer in session memory. 18. Click Web Browser to toggle the Web browser window off. Task 2:
1. Click File > Manage File > Rename. 2. In the Rename dialog box, edit the New Name to DRILL_BIT_NEW.
Fo r
5. Click Close
6. Click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed. 7. Click OK in the Erase Not Displayed dialog box.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
Datum entities are 2-D reference geometry that you use for building feature geometry, orienting models, dimensioning, measuring, and assembling. There are four main datum types: Datum planes Datum axes Datum points Coordinate systems The display of each of these datum types is controlled independently by clicking the following icons from either the Show group in the View ribbon tab or the In Graphics toolbar: Plane Display Enable/disable datum plane display. Enable/disable datum axis display. Enable/disable datum point display.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Datum Tag Display
al
U se
nl y
Csys Display
The initial datum display for a given exercise is included in step 1 for that exercise. For example, consider the following: Enable only the following Datum Display types: . This indicates that you should display datum planes only, and that you should not display datum axes, datum points, or datum coordinate systems.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 3 | Page 31
3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Enable Plane Tag Display from the Show group.
In
Fo r
PT
, and Point
Module 3 | Page 32
te rn
. . . . . ,
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
There are six different 3-D model display options in the graphics window: The model is shaded according to view Shading With Edges orientation and its edges are highlighted. Shading With Reflections The model is shaded according to view orientation. Shadows and a reflection are placed on an imaginary floor directly below the model. Shading The model is shaded according to the view orientation. Hidden lines are not visible in shaded view display.
Fo r
No Hidden
Hidden Line By default, hidden lines in the model are displayed in a slightly lighter color than visible lines. Wireframe Hidden lines are displayed as regular lines (all lines are the same color). In Figure 1, the same model is displayed in six different ways. Clockwise from the top left, the display is Shading With Reflections, Shading With Edges, Shading, Wireframe, Hidden Line, and No Hidden.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 33
U se
nl y
View\Display_Style Task 1:
3. Select Shading With Reflections from the Display Style types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.
Fo r
5. Select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.
Module 3 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
4. Select Shading With Edges from the Display Style types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. In the In Graphics toolbar, select from the Display No Hidden Style types drop-down menu.
8. In the In Graphics toolbar, select Wireframe from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
9. In the In Graphics toolbar, select Shading from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 35
U se
7. In the In Graphics toolbar, select Hidden Line from the Display Style types drop-down menu.
nl y
In
Fo r
Pan
Module 3 | Page 36
PT
te rn
Figure 2 The Spin Center
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Orientation Zoom
Turn
Fine Zoom
Refit
Fo r
Named Views Displays a list of saved view orientations available for a given model. Select the name of the desired saved view, and the model reorients to the selected view. The default Creo Parametric template includes the following views: Standard Orientation The initial 3-D orientation which cannot be altered. Default Orientation Similar to the Standard Orientation, but its orientation can be redefined to a different orientation. BACK, BOTTOM, FRONT, LEFT, RIGHT, and TOP.
Enables and disables the spin center. When enabled, Spin Center the model spins about the location of the spin center. When disabled, the model spins about the cursor location. Disabling the spin center can be useful when orienting a long model, such as a shaft.
2012 PTC
PT
Previous
In addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the following additional model orientation options are available: Reverts the model to the previously displayed orientation.
In
te rn
Coarse Zoom
al
Module 3 | Page 37
U se
nl y
Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function uses the cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using the scroll wheel, as shown in the following table:
4. Click Named Views and select Default Orientation. Task 2: Use the spin center.
2. Spin the assembly again in a different direction. 3. Spin the assembly in a third direction. The assembly is spinning about the spin center.
PT
Fo r
6. Cursor over the lower portion of the assembly, near the CHUCK_2.PRT, and spin the assembly. 7. In the ribbon, select the View tab. from the 8. Click Previous Orientation group. 9. Cursor over the upper portion of the assembly and spin the assembly. Notice that the center of rotation is the cursor location.
10. Click Spin Center from the In Graphics toolbar to enable it.
Module 3 | Page 38 2012 PTC
In
te rn
and select Standard Orientation. from the In Graphics toolbar to disable it.
al
U se
and
nl y
2. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select TOP.
Task 3:
1. Press and hold SHIFT, and then middle-click and drag to pan the assembly. 2. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation.
Task 4:
2. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag to the right to turn the assembly clockwise. 3. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation.
1. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag upward to zoom out.
Fo r
2. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag downward to zoom in. 3. If your mouse is equipped with a wheel: Roll the mouse wheel away from you to zoom out. Roll the mouse wheel towards you to zoom in. Press and hold CTRL, and then roll the mouse wheel away from you to coarsely zoom out. Press and hold SHIFT, and then roll the mouse wheel towards you to finely zoom in.
2012 PTC
PT
Task 5:
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 39
U se
1. Press and hold CTRL, and then middle-click and drag to the left to turn the assembly counterclockwise.
nl y
4. Click Named Views and select Standard Orientation. 5. Cursor over the hole next to the teeth. Press and hold CTRL, then middle-click and drag downward to zoom in to the hole. 6. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar to refit the model.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Simplified representations View orientations Style states Cross-sections Explode states Layer states
Fo r
Some important facts about the view manager include: The active item is indicated by a red arrow next to its name. In Figure 1, the active view orientation is the Front. A plus sign after the name of the active item indicates that it has changed. You can either save the modified item to capture what has changed, or double-click it or another item to dismiss the changes. In Figure 1, view orientation Front has been modified from how it was saved.
2012 PTC
PT
The view manager is a content-sensitive dialog box that enables you to edit how a model displays in the graphics window. The view manager contains numerous tabs that enable you to create and manage the following:
In
te rn
al
Figure 1 The View Manager
Module 3 | Page 41
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Typical FRONT View Orientation
al
U se
nl y
You can edit the view orientation by redefining it. The Orientation dialog box enables you to specifically define your model orientation, compared to using keyboard and mouse functions, which are more approximate. The view orientations that display in the Orient tab of the view manager are the same as those that are displayed in the Named Views and Orientation dialog box.
Orient by Reference
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
You can click Reorient from the bottom of the Named Views drop-down list in the In Graphics toolbar or from the Orientation group in the View tab to open the Orientation dialog box directly. This method displays the saved views directly inside of the dialog box. Therefore, you can Orient by reference and save a new view orientation directly within the dialog box, which is an alternative to using the view manager.
al
U se
You can click Undo from the Orientation dialog box to undo any changes you made. The model returns to its most current view state.
nl y
One method of changing the model orientation in the Orientation dialog box is to Orient by reference. The Orient by reference option enables you to select references by which to orient the model. Two directions and two references are required to orient a model.
Module 3 | Page 43
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient the model as shown. 3. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar. Select the Orient tab and click New. Edit the name to 3D-1 and press ENTER.
Fo r
PT
Task 2:
6. In the view manager, click New. Edit the Orientation name to Conn_Rod and press ENTER. Click Close.
3. Select the surface in the upper figure as Reference 1. 4. Select the surface in the lower figure as Reference 2. 5. Edit the Reference 2 direction from Top to Left. 6. Spin the assembly as necessary and select the surface in the lower figure again as Reference 2.
Module 3 | Page 44 2012 PTC
In
te rn
and select Default Orientation. and
al
4. In the view manager, double-click Default Orientation, and then double-click 3D-1.
U se
nl y
7. In the Orientation dialog box, expand the Saved Views area if necessary. In the Name field, type the name of the saved view as CYL_HOLE. Click Save > OK. Task 3: Redefine view orientations with the view manager.
2. Orient the model as shown. 3. In the view manager, right-click 3D-1(+) and select Save. 4. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box.
6. Orient the assembly as shown 7. Select the surface shown in the upper figure as the new Reference 1. In the graphics window, select the surface shown in the lower figure as the new Reference 2. Click OK in the Orientation dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
5. In the view manager, double-click Cyl_Hole. Right-click Cyl_Hole and select Redefine.
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 45
U se
nl y
A style state is a captured state of component visibility in an assembly. You can vary component visibility independently of other components. For example, you can set one component to be displayed as shaded, set another to be displayed as wireframe, and set still another to be displayed as no hidden. In Figure 1, the component display of the cylinder head has been edited, while the remainder of the assembly remains shaded. If you redefine a style state you can also edit its component display to blank, or turn off, the display of any component in the assembly.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
As you define component visibilities and displays, the model tree displays which settings have been specified for the components. When you finish creating the style state, the graphics window displays the name of the style state in the bottom left corner. You can also create style states by first editing component displays, and then capturing the displays in a style state. There are two default style states in every assembly: Default Style and Master Style. The Master Style cannot be modified, but the Default Style can be modified.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 47
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the graphics window, select the CYLINDER_4.PRT. 3. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 4. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > No Hidden.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 48
PT
7. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Style name to Cyl_No_Hidden and click OK.
6. In the view manager, select the Style tab. Right-click Master Style(+) and select Save.
In
te rn
from
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
1. In the graphics window, press and hold CTRL and select the ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_4.PRT and ENG_BLOCK_REAR_4. PRT. 2. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent. 3. In the view manager, right-click Cyl_No_Hidden(+) and select Save. 4. In the Save Display Elements dialog box, edit the Style name to Castings_Transparent and click OK. 5. In the view manager, double-click Master Style. 6. Click Close.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 49
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
My Appearances Displays a list of available user-defined appearances. Model Displays the appearances that are applied to a component, part, or surface display. Library Displays a predefined library of appearances from which to use. These libraries accurately simulate real world materials including metals and plastics. You can switch the library that is displayed by expanding the drop-down list next to it.
An appearance consists of both Color and Highlight Color. You can modify the properties of both within the appearance editor to create your desired appearance. You can even apply textures and decals to your appearance. To edit an appearance within the appearances manager, you must first copy it into the My Appearances palette. You can copy the appearance from the Library palette or Model palette by right-clicking and selecting Copy to My Appearances. You can also select an appearance in the My Appearances palette and click New Appearance , which copies the appearance to a new name. You can also edit an appearance by right-clicking it in the appearance gallery and selecting Edit. This launches the Appearance Editor.
Fo r
Applying Appearances
Once an appearance has been created, you can apply it to entire part models, part surfaces, or components in an assembly. You can use the selection filter, if necessary, to filter the item that you wish to apply the appearance. If an appearance is assigned to a part at the assembly level, the appearance is saved in the context of the assembly and does not change the appearance of the part at the part level. You can select the appearance first and then apply it to the reference, or you can select the reference first and then apply the appearance. To apply an appearance, you first select it from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu in the Model Display group. This selected appearance is now the active appearance, and is the appearance that is applied to the selected references. You can also search for the appearance using the Search field at the top of the appearance gallery and appearances manager. Clicking the upper half of the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu enables you to apply the last active appearance.
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 51
PT
Use preexisting appearances as a starting point to quickly and easily create new appearances.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
access the appearances manager by selecting Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. The Appearances Manager dialog box contains both the contents of the appearance gallery on the left and the appearance editor on the right.
Clearing Appearances
Appearance or Clear All Appearances from the appearance gallery. When clearing an appearance, you are prompted to select the references from which you want the appearance removed. However, the Model appearance from is still retained. You can also click Clear Assembly Appearances the appearance gallery to clear only assembly appearances. For a part, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances and reverts the part to its default assigned appearance. For an assembly, clearing all appearances removes all Model appearances and returns the components to the appearances they were assigned at the part level.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 52
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
To clear appearances applied to a part or surface, you can either click Clear
2012 PTC
6. Click Close.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Press and hold CTRL and select GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT and GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT. 2. Select the ptc-std-aluminumpolished appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu.
2012 PTC
PT
5. Locate and select this new appearance from the My Appearances section.
In
te rn
3. In the Appearances Manager dialog box, select the drop-down in the Library palette and select std-metals.dmt, if necessary. Click File > Open. Select APPEARANCE.DMT and click Open. Click Override all, if necessary.
al
Module 3 | Page 53
U se
nl y
from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu in the Model Display group.
Task 3:
1. Select Appearances Manager types drop-down menu. 2. Select the ptc-std-aluminumpolished appearance sphere from the Model section.
5. Drag the Transparency slider to 70 and click Close. 6. Select the aluminum-polishedtransparent appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu.
7. Press and hold CTRL and select GEARBOX_REAR_5.PRT and GEARBOX_FRONT_5.PRT and then click OK.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 54
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
4. In the My Appearances section of the dialog box, select the new <ptc-std-aluminum-polished> appearance, edit the name to aluminum-polishedtransparent and press ENTER.
nl y
Task 4:
1. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 2. Click Appearances Manager from the Utilities group. 3. In the My Appearances section of the dialog box, select the upper-left appearance sphere, ref_color1 . Click New Appearance to copy the ref_color1 appearance. Edit the new appearance Name to MyColor1 and press ENTER. 4. In the Basic tab, click the Color rectangle to edit the color. Expand the RGB/HSV Slider section. Edit the RGB colors to 127, 137, and 145, and click OK > Close.
Task 5:
Fo r
1. In the graphics window, select CHUCK_5.PRT . 2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Select the View tab and select the MyColor1 appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. 4. Select CHUCK_5.PRT from the model tree and click OK.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 55
U se
nl y
Task 6:
2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Select the View tab and select the black appearance from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down menu. 4. Press and hold CTRL, and select the five surfaces shown. 5. Click OK.
Fo r
6. Click Close to view the new part surface appearance in the assembly.
Module 3 | Page 56
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
Using Templates
New models should be created using a template. Your company has most likely created customized templates for you to use. Using a template to create a new model is beneficial because it means that, regardless of who created it, the model contains the same consistent set of information, including:
2012 PTC Module 3 | Page 57
te rn
Figure 3 Layers Created from Part Template
al
U se
nl y
Datums Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and default coordinate system, all named appropriately. Layers When every model contains the same layers, management of both the layers and items on the layer is easier. Units Most companies have a company standard for units in their models. Creating every model with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are not made. Parameters Every model can have the same standard metadata information. View Orientations Ensuring that every model contains the same standard view orientations aids the modeling process.
You can view a models parameters and create new ones by clicking Parameters from the Model Intent group in the ribbon. You can create parameters that accept the following types of values: Real Number Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3, and PI. Integer Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257. String Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters or numbers). Yes/No Accepts either the YES or NO value.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 58
PT
In
te rn
Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven by relations. Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the parameter Cost might have a different value for each instance. Parameter values can be reported in drawings, or viewed with data management tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions. User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or component) or to a feature or pattern.
al
U se
Parameters are metadata information that can be included in a model template or created by a user in his own part or assembly. Parameters are important because they enable you to add additional information into part and assembly models. Parameters have several uses:
nl y
2012 PTC
1. Without an open model, notice only the Home tab displays in the ribbon.
4. Enable only the following Datum 5. Explore the default datum features created in the graphics window and model tree.
In
3. In the New File Options dialog box, select the mmns_part_solid template. Click OK.
Fo r
6. Notice that the ribbon has populated with tabs specific to the type of open file.
7. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree. Notice the default layers.
2012 PTC
PT
Display types:
te rn
.
al
Module 3 | Page 59
2. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Select Part as the Type and Solid as the Sub-type. Edit the Name to new_part. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK.
U se
nl y
8. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. Notice the units that are set. Click Close. 9. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Parameters . 10. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter Value field. Edit the value to NEW PART and press ENTER.
1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Edit the Name to select_template. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK. 2. In the New File Options dialog box, select the inlbs_part_solid template and click OK. 3. Again, notice the datum features.
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 60
PT
Task 2:
In
te rn
again
al
2012 PTC
U se
and edit the Name to PART_NUMBER. Click New Parameter Edit the Type to Integer. Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289. Click OK.
Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED. Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default value of NO.
nl y
4. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to access the Model Properties dialog box. 5. Notice the units that are set. 6. Click Close. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 3 | Page 61
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 3 | Page 62
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
4
U se O te rn al
Module 4 | Page 1
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the basic Creo Parametric mouse controls, keyboard shortcuts, and color feedback. Use drag handles and dimension draggers. Understand the purpose of the model tree, its basic columns, and available display filters. Select items using Direct Selection, Query Selection, and the Search Tool. Select multiple components Filter the selection of items using Selection Filters.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Purple: Preview Component Assembly While you are assembling a new component in an assembly, the new component displays in purple. Once the component is fully constrained, it displays in orange. Preview colors are very beneficial because they provide feedback as you create valid geometry.
Preselection Highlighting (Transparent green color) Query to Next Item (Feature or Component Beneath) Select Highlighted Geometry (Opaque green color) or Select Features (Wireframe green color) Add or Remove Items from Selection
U se al
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Clear Selection
In
te rn
On Background
nl y
Over Geometry Until Highlighted
Module 4 | Page 3
PT
In
Fo r
Drag handles are small, white squares that display in the graphics window. These graphical objects are used to manipulate geometry during creation, editing, or redefinition in real time. Using your mouse, drag the handles to resize or reorient geometry, move feature geometry in a model, or reference geometry. In an assembly, drag the handle to adjust component offset. Your changes display dynamically in the graphics window. Right-click a drag handle to access context-sensitive menu options. You can specify various keyboard and mouse combinations to modify how the drag handle is used. The following table displays dragging options comprised of various keyboard and mouse combinations performed on a drag handle.
Module 4 | Page 4
te rn
Figure 3 Dragging the Cut Height
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Dragging Option
Adjust Drag Handle Resize, reorient, move, and reference geometry; adjust component offset. Snap Drag Handle Reference geometry, such as a datum plane, edge, point, vertex, or surface. Access context-sensitive menu options.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
When editing or redefining features or sketching entities, the arrow heads of certain dimensions become filled white dimension draggers, as shown in Figure 3. Dimension draggers are graphical arrow heads used to manipulate dimensions while sketching, editing or redefining geometry. Using your mouse, drag a dimension dragger to dynamically adjust its corresponding dimension value. The resulting dependent geometry also updates in real time.
U se
O
Module 4 | Page 5
nl y
Fo r
Except for the Delete operation, all keyboard shortcuts use the CTRL key on your keyboard in conjunction with another letter key. There are keyboard shortcuts for various areas of Creo Parametric usage, including file operations, edit operations, and view operations. The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various file operations. Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+N CTRL+O CTRL+S File Operation New Create a new object. Open Open an existing object. Save Save the active object.
The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various edit operations.
Module 4 | Page 6
PT
You can use various keyboard shortcuts to quickly perform commonly used functions. Keyboard shortcuts facilitate a more efficient experience in the user interface by eliminating the need to move the mouse to make icon or menu selections.
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Keyboard and Mouse
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Edit Operation Regenerate Regenerate model. Find, or Search Search for, filter, and select items in the model by rule. Delete Delete selected features. Copy Copy selected features. Paste Paste selected features.
CTRL+F
The following table contains keyboard shortcuts for various view operations. Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+R CTRL+D View Operation
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 4 | Page 7
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 3 Show Menu Options
al
U se
nl y
Similarly, an assembly's components are displayed in the order in which they were assembled, from top to bottom. Selection Selecting a feature or component in the model tree results in the selection of that feature or component in the graphics window. Editing The model tree can be used to edit features or components, including their display and name. The model tree is part of the Navigator. It can be toggled on or off by clicking in the status bar. You can also resize the model tree by Model Tree dragging the right edge of the pane to make it larger or smaller.
The Show menu is located at the top of the model tree and is accessed by
Fo r
Layer/Model Tree Shown in Figure 2, this option toggles the model tree to the layer tree so that all layers associated with a model, assembly, or drawing are displayed. If the layer tree is displayed and the Show menu is selected, the Layer Tree menu selection is replaced by the Model Tree menu selection. Locate in Model Tree Locates the object selected in the graphics window in the model tree. This option is especially useful when locating an embedded object such as a pattern instance or component in a sub-assembly. Expand All Fully expands every branch within the model tree and mechanism tree. Collapse All Fully collapses every branch within the model tree and mechanism tree. Preselection Highlighting Toggles preselection highlighting on or off. When you cursor over an item in the model tree when preselection highlighting is turned on, the item is preselected in the graphics window. By default, this option is turned off. Highlight Geometry Toggles Highlight Geometry on or off. When you select an item from the model tree when Highlight Geometry is turned on, the item is also selected (in green) in the graphics window.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 4 | Page 9
Fo r
The model tree contains a hierarchical list of features or components in the order created. You can filter what is displayed in the model tree both in terms of item display and feature types. The filtering of item display and feature types is controlled by the Model Tree Items dialog box, shown in Figure 1. from the top
Open the Model Tree Items dialog box by clicking Settings of the model tree, and then selecting Tree Filters.
The filters applied to the model tree are unique to each window except in the case of assemblies, where applied filters only propagate to sub-assemblies of assemblies.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 4 Model Tree Used Sketches Before and After
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Datum Planes Datum Axes Curves Datum Points Coordinate Systems Rounds Auto Round Members Cosmetics Sketches Used Sketches Used sketch features are those external sketches that are used in another feature, such as an Extrude or Revolve feature. When a sketch is used, it is automatically changed to a hidden status, as shown in Figure 4.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
The display of feature types is a more granular method of determining which level of feature display you wish to use. In the Feature Types section of the Model Tree Items dialog box, you can specifically control which features to display in the model tree:
al
U se
assembled, but nothing more granular. By default, features are turned on for parts and turned off for assemblies. Placement folder Toggles the display of component placement constraints within assembly components. Annotations Toggles the display of annotations. Sections Toggles the display of cross-sections. Suppressed Objects Toggles the display of suppressed features and components. Suppressed objects in the model tree are preceded with a black square. In Figure 3, the EDGE_ROUNDS and LUBE_HOLE features are suppressed. If the display of suppressed objects was turned off, these two features would not be visible in the model tree. Incomplete Objects Toggles the display of incomplete features. Excluded Objects Toggles the display of excluded components. Blanked Objects Toggles the display of blanked mold/cast components. Envelope Components Toggles the display of envelope components. Copied References Toggles the display of copied references.
nl y
Module 4 | Page 11
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 2 Viewing Added Columns in the Model Tree
al
U se
nl y
feature parameters, simplified representations, layer information, and mass property information. You access the Model Tree Columns dialog box by clicking Settings from the top of the model tree and selecting Tree Columns. You can edit the order of column display and the width of a displayed column in the Model Tree Columns dialog box. The columns displayed in the model tree are unique to each window, except in the case of assemblies where displayed model tree columns propagate to sub-assemblies of assemblies.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 13
U se
nl y
The model tree display can be saved to a file and loaded at any time. Once
In
Fo r
After selecting features, geometry, or components in a model, assembly, or drawing, you are able to make modifications to the selected items. Direct selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Direct selection occurs when you cursor over a feature or component and click to select it. Some key factors regarding direct selection include: You can perform direct selection on components in an assembly, and features or surfaces in a model. You can perform direct selection in both the graphics window on a model or assembly, and in the model tree. When you initially cursor over a model in the Creo Parametric graphics window, the component or feature preselects in the transparent light green color. When you select the component or feature, it highlights in green wireframe. The selected item is dependent on whether you have a part or assembly open. If you have a part open, a selected feature highlights in green wireframe. If you have an assembly open, the selected component highlights in green wireframe.
Module 4 | Page 14 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Press ALT and Select Surfaces Directly
al
U se
nl y
In a part or assembly, you can select a surface directly by pressing ALT. With ALT selected, surfaces preselect in transparent light green. When the surface is selected it highlights in dark green. You can select multiple items by pressing CTRL. You can select a range of items from the model tree by pressing SHIFT. If you select an item and then press SHIFT and select a second item, the entire range of items between them is also selected. You can de-select components or features two different ways: Press CTRL and click the selected item again. Click in the graphics window background.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 15
U se
nl y
Fo r
8. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRT from the model tree to de-select it.
9. Press CTRL and select the two BOLT_5-18_6.PRT and the three BOLT_5-28_6.PRT from the model tree. 10. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all components.
Module 4 | Page 16
PT
7. Press CTRL and select ENG_BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRT from the graphics window to de-select it.
In
6. Press CTRL and select ENG_ BLOCK_FRONT_6.PRT and ENG_BLOCK_REAR_6.PRT from the graphics window.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
1. Select CYLINDER_6.PRT from the graphics window, right-click, and select Open. 2. Select the hole from the graphics window. Notice that the feature highlights in the graphics window and model tree, and that the feature name is SPARK_PLUG_HOLE. 3. De-select the feature. 4. Press CTRL and select SPARK_PLUG_HOLE and BASE_ROUND from the graphics window. 5. Press CTRL and select SPARK_PLUG_HOLE from the graphics window to de-select it. 6. Press CTRL and select BASE_ROUND from the model tree to de-select it.
Fo r
Task 3:
1. Press ALT and select the surface shown. 2. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all surfaces. from the Quick 3. Click Close Access toolbar to return to the assembly.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all features. Select surfaces using direct selection.
7. Press CTRL and select the four mount hole features from the model tree.
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 17
U se
nl y
4. Press ALT and select the surface shown. 5. Click in the background of the graphics window to de-select all surfaces.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
Query selection is one of the three basic methods of selection. Query selection enables you to select features, geometry, or components that are hidden beneath another feature or model. For example, in Figure 2, you may want to select the piston so you can change the overall height of the part. However, the cylinder part obstructs your attempts to click and select the piston. In this situation, you can easily query and select the piston. There are two methods of query selection: Select by querying the model When you cursor over a model directly in the Creo Parametric graphics window, the transparent green color designates a preselected item. By right-clicking the preselected model or feature, you can query directly through the initial model or feature to the next model or feature. You can continue to right-click to query the next model or feature. When you have queried to the desired model or feature, you then click to make your selection. Select using the Pick From List The Pick From List method is similar to querying the model, except that all of the query possibilities are listed
2012 PTC Module 4 | Page 19
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
in the dialog box for the cursor location. To activate the Pick From List menu, cursor over the location you want to query, and then right-click and select Pick From List. Items highlighted in the Pick From List menu also preselected in the graphics window. Remember: Cursor over to highlight, right-click to query, and click to select.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
5. Press CTRL, then right-click and select Pick From List. It is necessary for you to right-click and hold to display pop-up menus.
6. Still pressing CTRL, select CONNECTING_ROD_9.PRT from the Pick From List dialog box. Click OK.
2012 PTC
PT
4. Move the cursor down slightly until the CYLINDER_9.PRT model preselects.
In
te rn
3. Right-click to query until the PISTON_9.PRT highlights, and then click to select it.
al
Module 4 | Page 21
U se
nl y
7. Press CTRL and cursor over PISTON_9.PRT. Right-click to query until the PISTON_9.PRT highlights, and then select it. This de-selects the component.
Task 2:
2. Cursor over the bottom, center area of the CYLINDER_9.PRT. 3. Right-click and select Pick From List.
Fo r
7. Cursor over the area where the CYLINDER_CUT feature is located, right-click to query until the CYLINDER_CUT feature highlights, and then select it. 8. Orient the model to observe the CYLINDER_CUT feature. This completes the procedure.
Module 4 | Page 22 2012 PTC
PT
4. In the Pick From List dialog box, click the down arrow until the CYLINDER_CUT feature is preselected.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 3 Axes Selected using Search Tool
al
U se
nl y
dialog box, or you can click Select Model and select the model from the graphics window. Name Enables you to refine the search by typing in part or all of the name of the item you want to search for. You can also type wildcards, both at the beginning and end of the name search string. In Figure 1, wildcards are used to search for all features containing pin in their name. The items that fulfill the criteria specified display in the Found list on the left side of the Search Tool. If you select items in the Found list, they preselect in the graphics window. You can select multiple items by pressing CTRL or SHIFT, or you can select all items by pressing CTRL+A. Move items to the Selected list on the right to select them in the graphics window and therefore perform operations. The Search Tool becomes invaluable as the complexity of your model increases.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 3. Click Find from the Investigate group.
PT
6. In the Search Tool dialog box, select Feature from the Look for drop-down list. Select Datum Plane from the Look by drop-down list. Type front as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now.
Fo r
2012 PTC
4. In the Search Tool dialog box, select Component from the Look for drop-down list. Type *gear_shaft_11 as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. In the Found list, select the first component, press CTRL, and select the second and third components. Select REDUCTION_GEAR_ SHAFT_11 and click Add Item . Click Close. De-select the component.
In
to start the
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 25
U se
nl y
7. In the Search Tool dialog box, select DRILL_CHUCK_11.ASM from the Look in drop-down list. 8. Click Find Now. 9. Edit Look in to CHUCK_11.PRT. 10. Click Find Now. 11. In the Found list, click Add Item and click Close.
3. In the Search Tool dialog box, edit Look for to Feature if necessary. Edit Look by to Feature. Type reduction* as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. Select REDUCTION_GEAR_ HOLE and click Add Item . Click Close. 4. De-select the feature.
Fo r
5. Select the Tools tab and click to start the Search Find Tool.
6. In the Search Tool dialog box, edit Look for to Datum Plane. Type rib* as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. Select RIB_PLANE_3 and click Add Item . Click Close. 7. De-select the datum plane. 8. Click Repaint .
Module 4 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 27
U se
nl y
10. In the Search Tool dialog box, edit Look for to Axis. Type *pin* as the Criteria Value. Click Find Now. Select ALIGNMENT_PIN_ TOP and click Add Item . Click Close.
Fo r
Creo Parametric automatically selects the Smart selection filter, if it is available. When using the Smart selection filter, the selection of features, geometry, or components is a nested process. This means you can select specific items of interest after the initial selection. There are two levels of selection when using the Smart Filter: Feature/Component Level Geometry Level When selecting on a part in the graphics window, your initial selection highlights a feature in green wireframe. The Smart selection filter then automatically narrows the selection scope, enabling you to select specific items on that feature that you wish to either modify or use to create another feature. For example, you can select an edge where you wish to add a chamfer. The three specific items that you may wish to select highlight differently, as shown in Figure 1. Selected surfaces highlight as dark green items; selected edges highlight in bold green; and selected vertices highlight with a green plus. The entire selection process occurs automatically. The process is usually easier if you zoom in on the specific area of the model first.
Module 4 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Assemblies have a similar selection scheme. Components are selected initially, followed by geometry, such as surfaces, edges, and vertices. The Smart selection filter is not available if you disable preselection highlighting.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 29
U se
nl y
Selection\Smart_Filter Task 1:
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. Select the vertex on the edge of the hole. 8. De-select the vertex.
Task 2:
Fo r
6. Select the top protrusion feature. 7. Select the front cylindrical surface of the top protrusion feature.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 31
U se
2. In the graphics window, select the BOLT_5-18_8.PRT model, right-click, and select Open.
nl y
Fo r
Each filter in the selection filter narrows the item types that you can select, enabling you to easily select the desired item. All filters are context-sensitive, so that only those filters that are valid for the geometrical context are available. For example, the Parts filter would not be available while working in a part; rather it would be available while working in an assembly. Creo Parametric automatically selects the best filter according to the context; however, you can always change the filter by simply selecting it from the selection filter. The following filters are available in Part mode and Assembly mode: Parts Available in Assembly mode only, this filter enables you to only select components in the assembly. Features Enables you to only select features in a part or component in the assembly. Geometry Enables you to only select geometry, such as edges, surfaces, and vertices. Datums Enables you to only select datum features, including datum planes, datum axes, datum points, and coordinate systems. Quilts Enables you to only select surface quilts. Annotation Enables you to only select annotation features.
Module 4 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the selection filter to Parts.
4. Select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT from the graphics window. 5. Notice that BOLT_5-18_7.PRT is automatically de-selected.
Fo r
7. Press CTRL and select CRANKSHAFT_7.PRT from the graphics window. Notice that it de-selects. 8. De-select FLYWHEEL_7.PRT. 9. Edit the selection filter to Features.
10. Press CTRL and select the two round features. 11. De-select the rounds.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 33
U se
nl y
12. Press CTRL and select the two hole features. 13. De-select the holes.
14. Edit the selection filter to Geometry. 15. Zoom in on ENG_BLOCK_ FRONT_7.PRT and select the front surface.
16. Zoom in on the BOLT_5-18_7.PRT component. 17. Select the inner planar surface on the hex of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shown on the left. 18. Select the top edge on the hex of BOLT_5-18_7.PRT, as shown on the right.
Fo r
22. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 23. Enable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag Display .
24. Edit the selection filter to Datums. 25. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_4 and datum plane TOP. 26. De-select the datum plane. 27. Disable Plane Tag Display and Axis Tag Display This completes the procedure. .
Module 4 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
te rn
Fo r
From an assembly, edit the selection filter to Parts. Draw a rectangle over the model. The direction you follow while drawing the rectangle determines whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossing selection types. Perform the following steps to use 3-D Box Selection: , and select a plane or surface. From an assembly, click 3D Box Select Draw a rectangle in the selected plane. The direction you follow while drawing the rectangle determines whether the system uses Inside Box or Crossing Box selection types. Once the rectangle is created, a 3-D box appears, as shown in Figure 2. Drag arrows display on each surface. You can drag the arrows and watch the components dynamically select.
PT
You can use either 2-D or 3-D Box Selection to select components. Perform the following steps to use 2-D Box Selection:
In
al
Figure 2 3-D Selection
U se
nl y
Crossing Box Selection All components that are either inside or crossing the box are selected. To achieve this type of selection, draw a selection rectangle from the lower-right towards the upper-left.
Fo r
Module 4 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Selection\Multiple_Components Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the selection filter to Parts.
5. Notice the selected components. 6. Click in the background to de-select all components.
Fo r
8. Notice the selected components. 9. Click in the background to de-select all components. 10. Edit the selection filter back to Smart.
2012 PTC
PT
7. Draw a rectangle from the lower-right of the model towards the upper-left of the model, as shown.
In
te rn
al
Module 4 | Page 37
U se
4. Draw a rectangle from the upper-left of the model towards the lower-right of the model, as shown.
nl y
Task 2:
1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. Click 3D Box Select the status bar. 3. Select the front surface. 4. Draw a rectangle from the upper-left of the model towards the lower-right of the model, as shown. 5. Manipulate the 3-D box as necessary to select the components shown. 6. Click in the background to de-select all components. from
Fo r
10. Manipulate the 3-D box as necessary to select the components shown. 11. Click in the background to de-select all components.
Module 4 | Page 38
PT
9. Draw a rectangle from the lower-right of the model towards the upper-left of the model, as shown.
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
5
U se O te rn al
Module 5 | Page 1
Once a selection is made, you can perform a variety of operations, including editing. Editing enables you to modify not only dimensions of existing design models or features, but you can also edit shape, size, location, and visibility. You can also edit models by renaming them.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Rename objects. Utilize undo and redo operations. Understand regeneration and auto regeneration. Edit features. Edit the definition of features. Activate and edit models. Delete and suppress items. Edit feature and component visibility.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Renaming Objects
You can rename objects with more descriptive names so that they are easily recognized in the model tree.
Objects that can be renamed include: Features Components
Renaming Features
When you create a feature in a part model, it is automatically assigned a generic name based on its type. For example, the feature may be called Sketch 1 or Extrude 2, or Revolve 3. While these names describe the type of feature, they do not describe what the feature is in the context of the design. Consequently, it can be helpful to rename the feature to something more descriptive. Figure 1 shows the model tree before and after feature renaming has occurred. You can see that the model tree is more intuitive once the features have been renamed with more descriptive names. As a result, it is much easier to find a feature when it needs to be edited. You can rename model features by using any of the following methods: Select the feature in the model tree or graphics window, then right-click and select Rename from either the graphics window or model tree. Select the feature to be renamed in the model tree. Once selected, select it again from the model tree. Names can contain up to 31 characters and may not include spaces.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 2
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Connecting Rod
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Renaming Components
To avoid assembly failures, you must rename components within the context of the assembly instead of using Windows Explorer to rename components on the hard drive. You can rename components by using either of the following methods: Rename on disk and in session The system renames the component both in system memory and on the hard drive. Rename in session The system renames the component only in system memory.
, and then select the component to can click Commands and Settings be renamed from either the model tree or graphics window. You can also rename the assembly in the Rename dialog box. Notice that the assembly is the default item to be renamed when this dialog box appears.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 3
U se
nl y
Click File > Manage File > Rename from the File menu to rename components. Within the Rename dialog box, as shown in Figure 2, you
te rn
Operations valid for undo or redo include creating, deleting, editing, redefining, suppressing, resuming, patterning, and reordering. The Undo and Redo operations have the following capabilities: Pop-Up Text A preview of the operation that is to be undone or redone. Undo List You can select one or many sequential actions to undo. Redo List You can select one or many sequential actions to redo.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 4
PT
You can undo and redo most of the operations performed on a model. The operations are sequentially stacked in memory as they are performed. You have access to the undo/redo stack when you click the Undo or Redo icons.
In
al
Figure 3 Redo List
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
When you edit features in Creo Parametric, you are editing dimension values which control the geometry. After you edit a features dimensions, the function recalculates the model geometry, incorporating any Regenerate changes made since the last time the model was saved or regenerated. It is necessary to regenerate a model after you have edited it. Auto Regenerate eliminates the need to regenerate the model after making changes. Rather, the model is automatically regenerated dynamically while models are edited. By default, Auto Regenerate is enabled. However, if you wish to make multiple changes to a feature or features before regenerating the model, you can toggle Auto Regenerate off temporarily. When Auto Regenerate is toggled off, you can only edit dimensions directly, and all draggers are toggled off. You also cannot drag section entities. When you are ready for the model to regenerate, toggle Auto Regenerate back on.
2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 5
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Auto Regenerate Toggled Back On
al
U se
nl y
Editing Features
Edit enables you to alter dimensions of a selected feature or component.
Edit: Edit a dimension directly. Select the Most Recently Used option. Use draggers. Drag section entities. Features are regenerated in real time. Child features regenerate in real time.
Editing Features
Fo r
Edit is a menu selection available from the model tree or pop-up menu. After selecting Edit, the dimensions of the selected features or components display in the graphics window. You can also double-click a feature to open Edit mode. Using Edit, you can quickly change the dimensions of a selected feature using one of the following methods: Edit the dimension directly To edit a dimension directly, simply double-click it and edit its value. Edit using the Most Recently Used option When you edit a models dimensions, you can also utilize the Most Recently Used option. When you double-click a dimension, a drop-down list displays the most recent values of the model. You can select a suitable value from this list. The Most Recently Used option only displays recent values from the current session. It does not display values used in previous Creo Parametric sessions.
Module 5 | Page 6 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Dynamically Editing a Section
U se
nl y
Use draggers Drag the handles that display for rounds and chamfers, pattern dimensions, or a features depth or angle. You can also use the dimension draggers that display over the arrow heads of certain dimensions to dynamically edit that specific dimension. Drag section entities You can drag a sections entities to dynamically update the geometry. By default, features are regenerated in real time when they are edited. Additionally, child features also regenerate in real time. Real-time regeneration may be slow if dragging a parent feature in a large model. If you edit a feature in such a way that it cannot successfully regenerate, a caution icon displays next to your cursor and the geometry displays red. You can simply undo the edit or edit the feature back to a successful status. Other affected downstream features that do not successfully regenerate display in blue.
While in Edit mode, the following options are available in the pop-up menu that appears when you right-click: Display Draggers Enables you to toggle the display of drag handles on and off. Display Dimensions Enables you to toggle the display of dimensions on and off. When dimensions are toggled off, you can still drag the features section entities. Display Sketch Dimensions Enables you to toggle the display of the section dimensions on and off. When section dimensions are toggled off, you can still drag the sections entities Auto Regenerate Enables you to toggle the auto regenerate function on and off. When auto regenerate is toggled off, all draggers are toggled off, and you can only update dimensions directly or drag section entities. The geometry is not dynamically updated, and you must manually regenerate the model.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
O
Module 5 | Page 7
nl y
5. Double-click the 12 dimension, edit it to 10, and press ENTER. 6. Click once in the background. 7. Double-click the 10 dimension and select 12 from the drop-down list. 8. Click once in the background.
Fo r
11. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select 3D. 12. In the model tree, select Extrude 1, right-click, and select Edit. 13. Click the circular section and drag it to a diameter of approximately 12.5. 14. Click twice in the background to exit Edit mode.
Module 5 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
15. In the model tree, select Extrude 4, right-click, and select Edit. 16. Right-click and select Display Sketch Dimensions to toggle their display off. 17. Drag the depth handle to approximately 21. 18. Right-click and select Display Sketch Dimensions to toggle their display on. 19. Click twice in the background to exit Edit mode. 20. Edit Extrude 5. 21. Drag the depth handle to approximately 10. 22. Right-click and select Auto Regenerate to toggle it off. 23. Notice that the orange preview geometry disappears. 24. Double-click this approximate dimension and edit it to 6.
Fo r
26. Select Extrude 4 from the model tree. 27. Double-click the 3 dimension and edit it to 3.5. from the Regenerate types drop-down menu in the Operations group.
29. Notice that the geometry updated for both edits. 30. Click in the background to exit Edit mode. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC Module 5 | Page 9
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Type Change a protrusion into a cut, for example. Size Make a feature larger or smaller. Shape Change a round cut into a square cut, for example. Location Move a cut from one reference to a different reference. References Change the location of the feature or change the dimensional references. Options Change the additional details of the feature, such as its depth. When you finish editing the definition of a feature, the system automatically regenerates the model for you to incorporate the changes you have just made. In Edit Definition, you can modify the model by: 1. 2. Editing with the dashboard This is the graphical area in which you can change a feature's type, size, shape, and location. Editing with drag handles You can directly change features on a model by manipulating the drag handle. Your changes display dynamically in the graphics window.
2012 PTC
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 10
PT
Using Edit Definition, you can significantly change the model by redefining the following aspects of a feature:
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Modifying a Features Shape
U se
nl y
3.
Using the various context-sensitive options Accessed by right-clicking the dynamic preview or drag handles.
The set of icons along the right side of the dashboard perform the following operations: Preview Feature Provides a preview of how the completed feature or component will look in the graphics window. Pause Feature Pauses the current feature's edit definition operation, enabling you to perform other functions such as inserting datum features. Resume Feature Resumes a paused feature's edit definition operation.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 11
U se
nl y
3. Drag the drag handle to 12. 4. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from
Fo r
6. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Edit the Side 1 depth to To Selected . Select the lower front surface. Edit the Side 2 depth to To . Selected Query select the lower rear surface. 7. Click Complete Feature
PT
Module 5 | Page 12
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
8. In the model tree, right-click BASE and select Edit Definition. 9. In the graphics window, select the square sketch.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 13
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Editing the Number of Fins in the Activated Flywheel
al
U se
nl y
Text in the graphics window states which component is active. All other non-active components become unavailable and display in gray in the graphics window.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 15
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
4. Double-click the 16 FIN_ROUNDS value, edit it to 10, and press ENTER. from the
Module 5 | Page 16
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, expand the CRANK_10.ASM sub-assembly. Right-click FLYWHEEL_10. PRT and select Activate.
6. Click Windows from the Quick Access toolbar and select ACTIVATE_EDIT.ASM to activate the top-level assembly.
8. Zoom in to the end of the CRANKSHAFT_10.PRT. 9. Select the chamfer, right-click, and select Edit Definition.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
al
Module 5 | Page 17
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Both Parents and Children Suppressed
al
U se
nl y
You can select an object and delete from that object to the end of the model from the Delete types drop-down by selecting Delete to End of Model menu in the Operations group. You can select an object and suppress from that object to the end of the model by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Suppress > Suppress to End of Model. You can select an object and delete all objects other than the selected one from the Delete and its parents by selecting Delete Unrelated Items types drop-down menu in the Operations group. You can select an object and suppress from that object to the end of the model by clicking the Operations group drop-down menu and selecting Suppress > Suppress Unrelated Items.
If you suppress an item that is a parent to another item, the child item highlights in red and the system warns you that the child item would suppress, too. In Figure 2, the gear is a parent to the drill chuck sub-assembly in how it was assembled. Therefore, when the gear is suppressed, the chuck assembly is also suppressed, as shown in Figure 3. The same parent/child relationships hold true if you try to delete an item that is a parent to another item. Again, the child item highlights in red and the system warns you that the child item would need to be deleted, too.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long-term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.
In
It is recommended that you use Suppress and Resume to temporarily remove features or components in the graphics window to test design variations. It is a best practice to remove (delete) all suppressed features or components before saving your final design.
te rn
Best Practices
al
Module 5 | Page 19
U se
nl y
Edit\Delete-Suppress Task 1:
5. Click Undo
Settings Filters.
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 20
PT
7. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box. Click OK.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
from the Delete 3. Select Delete types drop-down menu in the Operations group.
nl y
12. Query select the FINAL_GEAR_SHAFT_12.PRT. 13. Right-click and select Delete. 14. Read the contents of the Delete dialog box and click Cancel. 15. With the component still selected, right-click and select Suppress. 16. Click OK in the Suppress dialog box. 17. Press CTRL and select both suppressed components from the model tree.
1. Open CHUCK_12.PRT. 2. Select FRONT_ROUND and press DELETE. 3. Click OK. 4. Click Undo .
8. Select the radial hole. 9. Right-click and select Delete. 10. Read the contents of the Delete dialog box and click OK. 11. Click Undo . 12. Select the radial hole again. 13. Right-click and select Suppress. 14. Click OK. 15. Click Undo .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 21
U se
Task 2:
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
al
U se
nl y
You can unhide all hidden objects at once by selecting Unhide All from the Unhide types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. Unhide All does not unhide items that were automatically hidden by Creo Parametric, such as layer items and datums created on-the-fly or used sketches.
Best Practices
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 23
U se
It is recommended that you use Hide/Unhide to temporarily remove non-solid features or components in the graphics window. If you want to remove non-solid features or components in the graphics window for the long-term, it is a best practice to use layers or simplified representations.
nl y
5. Press CTRL and select all four BOLT_5-18_13.PRT components. 6. Right-click and select Hide.
7. Click Named Views from the In Graphics toolbar and select LEFT. 8. Click Save Click OK.
10. Notice the warning message stating that the layer display was not saved.
Fo r
PT
Module 5 | Page 24
In
te rn
from the Status types drop-down menu in
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
3. Press CTRL and select datum planes RIGHT, TOP, and FRONT from the graphics window.
6. Press CTRL and select the other two Hole features. 7. Right-click and select Hide.
Fo r
8. In the ribbon, select the View tab. from the Status types drop-down menu.
PT
2012 PTC
In
te rn
al
Module 5 | Page 25
U se
5. Expand the first Pattern (Hole) feature in the model tree. Select each Hole feature to highlight it. Select the first Hole id 156, right-click, and select Hide.
nl y
Fo r
Module 5 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
6
U se O te rn al
Module 6 | Page 1
Most 3-D geometry created in Creo Parametric begins with a 2-D sketched section. Consequently, sketching is one of the most fundamental, consistently performed operations. In this module, you review sketcher theory and learn how to create a robust, predictable sketch. You also learn the tools available for creating sketch geometry.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Review sketcher theory and understand design intent. Modify the sketcher display. Learn and use constraints. Learn how to sketch lines, centerlines, rectangles, circles, arcs, fillets, and chamfers.
In
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 2
te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Placed on a 3-D Model
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 Freehand Sketch and Desired Sketch Figure 3 Design Intent Captured with Dimensions
nl y
achieved. Sketcher helps you apply design intent to your sketch so it appears as the bottom image, not the top image. Start by sketching the rough shape of your desired sketch. Sketcher begins to dynamically apply constraints to help you lock in your sketch. For example, if you sketch a line approximately vertical, Sketcher dynamically applies a vertical constraint to that line, helping you lock in design intent. When you stop sketching, a series of light blue dimensions appears in addition to your constraints. Sketcher must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times. The dimensions and constraints maintain the size, shape, and location of all sketched items, which helps you capture design intent. If needed, you can modify the default dimension scheme by editing or adding dimensions to properly capture your intended design intent. Sketcher contains both Weak and Strong items. Weak items are light blue, whereas Strong items are dark blue. Dimensions and constraints can be Weak or Strong. Sketcher adds or removes Weak items as necessary to maintain the fully constrained sketch. You cannot delete Weak items. Strong items are Weak items that were made strong either directly or by modifying them.
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
PT
When you enter Sketcher mode, there are four different Sketcher Display types that can be controlled to aid visualization while completing tasks:
Fo r
Display Grid
Toggles the display of section vertices on or off. Display Vertices These Sketcher Display types can be found in both the In Graphics toolbar and the Setup group in the Sketch ribbon tab. The Sketcher Display for a given exercise is included within the procedure and exercise steps where applicable. When you see the sketcher display icons in exercises, you should set your sketcher display to match. Consider the following example: Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: This step indicates that you should enable the display of dimensions, constraints, and vertices.
2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 5
In
te rn
Toggles the display of dimensions on or off. Toggles the display of constraints on or off.
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
from the In Graphics toolbar default. However, you can click Sketch View to reorient the sketch parallel to the screen at any time. This orientation can be beneficial when creating more complicated sketches.
nl y
Utilizing Constraints
Constraints are rules enforced by Creo Parametric on your sketched entities.
Constraint types include: Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular Tangent Mid-point Coincident Symmetric Equal Parallel
Utilizing Constraints
Fo r
Constraining the sketch is an important means to capture design intent. As you add constraints, you add logic to your sketches. You also minimize the number of dimensions required to document your design intent. This is why it is important to constrain your sketched entities before dimensioning your sketch. The following table lists the available constraints, which can be activated from the Constrain group in the Sketch tab of the ribbon, or by selecting multiple entities and right-clicking: Constraint Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Before and After Constraints Applied Description Makes lines vertical or aligns points vertically. Makes lines horizontal or aligns points horizontally. Makes lines perpendicular to one another.
al
Module 6 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Description Makes lines tangent to arcs and circles. Places a point on the middle of a line or arc. Aligns two entities or vertices to the same point. Also creates Collinear and Point on Entity constraints. Makes two points or vertices symmetric about a centerline. Makes lines equal length, gives arcs/circles equal radii, makes dimensions equal, or creates equal curvature.
Symmetric Equal
Parallel
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
At any time, you can select a constraint from the sketch, click the Constrain drop-down menu, and select Explain. The Message Log provides an explanation of the constraint.
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
Sketcher\Constraints Task 1:
Apply the Equal, Horizontal, and Coincident constraints to the Sketch 1 feature.
4. Click Equal from the Constrain group in the ribbon. Select the small circle, then the larger circle. When using the Equal constraint, you can select two or more entities or dimensions to set them equal.
Fo r
6. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu in the Operations group. 7. Drag the circle centers to test the Horizontal constraint. 8. Drag the circle radii to test the Equal Radii constraint. 9. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar twice.
2012 PTC
PT
5. Click Horizontal from the Constrain group and select the center of each circle.
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 9
U se
nl y
10. Click Coincident from the Constrain group and select one circle center and the horizontal reference. 11. Click OK from the Sketch tab in the ribbon.
Task 2:
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Click Midpoint Constrain group. from the
3. Select the circle center, then select the vertical line on which it resides. 4. Click Coincident . Select the circle radius, then select the upper-right rectangle vertex. 5. Click OK .
Task 3:
Fo r
2. Click Perpendicular from the Constrain group and select the upper and right lines. 3. Click Parallel from the Constrain group and select the upper and lower lines. 4. Middle-click twice to enable selection. 5. Press CTRL and select the upper and lower lines, then right-click and select Equal. 6. Select the left line, then right-click and select Vertical.
Module 6 | Page 10
PT
Apply the Perpendicular, Equal, Vertical, and Coincident constraints to the Sketch 3 feature.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. Select the right line, press CTRL, select the vertical reference, then right-click and select Coincident. Select the lower line, press CTRL, select the horizontal reference, then right-click and select Coincident. 8. Click OK . For most constraint types, you can select entities first, and then right-click to apply the desired constraint. Task 4:
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 4. 2. Notice the red highlighted open ends.
Fo r
4. Click Tangent from the Constrain group and select the right arc and the upper line. 5. Click Symmetric from the Constrain group and select the upper vertex of the right arc, the upper vertex of the left arc, and the vertical centerline. Click One-by-One .
2012 PTC
PT
3. Press CTRL and select the endpoints on either side of the gap. Right-click and select Coincident.
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 11
U se
Apply the Coincident, Tangent, and Symmetric constraints to the Sketch 4 feature.
nl y
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
te rn
Sketching with On-the-Fly Constraints
As you sketch geometry entities, constraints appear dynamically on-the-fly to quickly capture design intent. The constraints actually cause the geometry to snap as you sketch it, based on the constraint that appears. For example, as you sketch a line close to horizontal, a Horizontal constraint dynamically displays and snaps the line horizontal, enabling you to quickly capture your horizontal line design intent. Taking advantage of these constraints ensures that you do not have to manually constrain entities after they are sketched. When a constraint appears, you can perform the following manipulations to further aid you while sketching: Lock constraint Enables you to lock the constraint so the geometry remains snapped. Locked constraints are denoted by circles, as shown in Figure 1. Disable constraint Enables you to disable the constraint so it does not influence the geometry. Of course, you can always re-enable the disabled constraint. Disabled constraints are denoted by slashes, as shown in Figure 2.
2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 13
Fo r
PT
al
Figure 3 Toggling the Active Constraint
U se
nl y
Disable constraints from appearing on-the-fly Enables you to sketch an entity without any on-the-fly constraints appearing. Toggle active constraint When a constraint appears on-the-fly while sketching, it displays in green and is considered active. When more than one constraint appears at the same time, only one can be the active constraint. The active constraint has the previously defined manipulations applied to it. The toggle manipulation is only available if more than one on-the-fly constraint appears at the same time. In Figure 3, the Equal Length constraint is active in the left image and the Horizontal constraint is active in the right image. The following table lists the manipulations available and the corresponding mouse and keyboard operations: Constraint Manipulation Lock/Disable/Enable the Constraint Disable constraints from appearing on-the-fly Toggle the Active Constraint Mouse/Keyboard Operation
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
Manipulating the constraints on-the-fly does not cancel the Sketcher entity tool that you are using. For example, if you are sketching a line and manipulate a constraint that dynamically appears, the Line tool remains active.
al
Press TAB.
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
Sketching Lines
Sketched entities are the basis for a solid face or surface of a 3-D model.
There are two types of lines: Line Chain Tangent Line
PT
Fo r
Sketching Lines
There are two main types of lines available in Sketcher: from the Line types drop-down menu Line Chain Select Line Chain or right-click and select Line Chain to create a line between two selected points. Each time you click the mouse, you start a line point or endpoint. You can continue clicking the mouse to create lines that are chained together. The endpoint of one line is the starting point of the next line. You can either middle-click or select another function from the Sketch tab in the ribbon to terminate line creation. from the Line types drop-down Tangent Line Select Line Tangent menu to create a line that is tangent to two circles, two arcs, or a circle and arc. You can only select arcs or circles when creating a Tangent Line.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
Figure 2 Tangent Line
al
Module 6 | Page 15
U se
nl y
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . from the 4. Select Line Chain Line types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Click the existing line endpoint. Move the cursor down, and click again at the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. Notice the Vertical constraint. 6. Move the cursor to the right, and notice the Horizontal constraint. 7. Continue to move the cursor to the right until you see the Equal Length constraint.
Fo r
8. Continue to move the cursor to the right until you see the Vertical Alignment constraint. 9. Click again to complete the horizontal line.
10. Move your cursor up and to the right to create a diagonal line. Continue to move the cursor upward until you see the Parallel constraint.
Module 6 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. Continue to move the cursor to increase the line length until the Equal Length constraint appears.
15. Keeping the line parallel, continue to move the cursor to increase the line length. 16. Press TAB to activate the Parallel constraint. 17. Right-click to lock the Parallel constraint.
18. Move the cursor to further extend the line length and click to finish the line creation.
Fo r
21. Move the cursor to the left and notice the Horizontal constraint. Drag the line horizontally to the left until the Vertical Alignment constraint appears. 22. Click to finish the horizontal line creation.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 17
U se
13. Press TAB again to toggle the active constraint back to the Equal Length constraint.
nl y
12. Press TAB to toggle the active constraint to the Parallel constraint.
23. Move the cursor down and drag the line vertically until it snaps to the arc endpoint. Click to finish the vertical line creation. 24. Middle-click twice to stop sketching and exit the line creation tool. 25. Click OK from the Sketch tab in the ribbon. Task 2: Sketch tangent lines in Sketcher.
3. Click the bottom of the smaller circle to begin sketching a line. 4. Move the cursor around the circle, and notice that the line stays tangent to the circle.
6. Select One-by-One
PT
Fo r
7. Select the tangent line and press DELETE. 8. Click Line Tangent .
In
5. Click the top of the larger circle to complete the line. Notice the Tangent constraints.
te rn
from the Select types drop-down menu.
al
U se
nl y
Sketching Centerlines
A centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be used to enforce symmetry and control sketch geometry.
There are two types of construction Centerlines: Centerline Tangent Centerline
Sketching Centerlines
A centerline is a type of construction geometry that can be used to define a line of symmetry with a sketch. They are also used to control sketch geometry. In Figure 2, the circle is dimensioned to the vertical and horizontal references. In Figure 3, the circle is dimensioned radially by using a centerline. Centerlines must be fully constrained by using dimensions or constraints like any other sketched entity. They have infinite length and do not create feature geometry. There are two types of construction Centerlines: from the Centerline types drop-down Centerline Select Centerline menu or right-click and select Centerline to create a Centerline through two points. from the Centerline Tangent Centerline Select Centerline Tangent types drop-down menu to create a centerline that is tangent to two circles, two arcs, or a circle and arc. You can only select arcs or circles when creating a Tangent Centerline.
2012 PTC Module 6 | Page 19
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Dimensioning a Circle using a Centerline
al
U se
nl y
Sketcher\Centerline Task 1:
. 4. Notice that the horizontal line is asymmetric about the vertical reference. Also notice the dimensioning scheme for the angled line.
6. Press DELETE.
9. Move the cursor upwards and click the vertical reference to create a vertical centerline on top of the vertical reference.
Fo r
10. Click the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to start sketching a second centerline. 11. Drag the centerline until it measures approximately 70 from vertical, and click to place it.
Module 6 | Page 20
PT
8. Click the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to start sketching a centerline.
In
7. Select Centerline from the Centerline types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, select CENTERLINE, right-click, and select Edit Definition.
12. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu. 13. Click in the top left quadrant of the graphics window to start sketching a line. 14. Move the cursor horizontally to the right side of the vertical centerline until it snaps symmetric about the vertical centerline and click to place it. 15. Middle-click to stop line creation.
Fo r
21. Click the angled centerline and drag it to approximately 60. Notice that the angled line always stays perpendicular about the angled centerline. 22. Click OK from the ribbon.
2012 PTC
PT
In
18. Move the cursor down to the angled centerline, move the cursor up and down on the centerline until the Perpendicular constraint appears, and click to complete the line.
te rn
and
al
Module 6 | Page 21
17. Click Line Chain and select the right endpoint of the horizontal line.
U se
16. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu, and click and drag one of the line endpoints to resize it to a length of approximately 13. Notice that the line stays symmetrical about the vertical centerline as it is resized.
nl y
In
Fo r
To create a corner rectangle, select Corner Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu, or right-click and select Corner Rectangle. When you sketch a rectangle, you click to define locations for two opposite corners. from the To create a slanted rectangle, select Slanted Rectangle Rectangle types drop-down menu. When you sketch a slanted rectangle, you click two locations to define a line that becomes the first side, and then specify a third location to define the width.
To create a center rectangle, select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu. When you sketch a center rectangle, you click to define locations for the rectangle center and one corner. The rectangle is created symmetrically in both directions using two diagonal construction lines that connect opposite corners through the rectangle center. from the Rectangle types To create a parallelogram, select Parallelogram drop-down menu. When you sketch a parallelogram, you click two locations to define a line that becomes the first side, and then specify a third location to define the width and side angle. Remember the following when sketching rectangles and parallelograms:
Module 6 | Page 22 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 4 Parallelogram
al
U se
nl y
The four lines are independent once created. You can delete, trim, and align each line individually. You should create symmetric rectangles using the Center Rectangle type.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 23
U se
nl y
Sketcher\Rectangle_Parallelogram RECTANGLE_PARALLELOGRAM.PRT Task 1: Create a corner rectangle and a center rectangle in Sketcher.
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select the upper line of the rectangle and press DELETE. 5. Press CTRL and select the three remaining lines. 6. Right-click and select Delete. .
8. Click the intersection of the vertical and horizontal references to start the rectangle. Move the cursor to the lower-right quadrant, and notice that the rectangle retains symmetry about its vertical and horizontal without requiring centerlines. 9. Click to complete the rectangle. Middle-click to complete sketching and view the constraints.
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 24
PT
7. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from the
11. Right-click and select Corner Rectangle. Click the midpoint of the right side of the rectangle. 12. Move the cursor to the right until the second rectangle snaps to equal length. Move the cursor down until the second rectangle snaps to the bottom of the first rectangle, and click to complete the rectangle. Task 2:
Fo r
5. Click the upper-left vertex of the parallelogram to begin sketching. 6. Move the cursor to the vertical reference and upwards until the line snaps parallel, and then click. 7. Move the cursor up and to the right until it snaps to equal length, then click to complete the slant rectangle.
2012 PTC
PT
4. Select Slanted Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
3. Move the cursor up vertically until the height snaps to equal length, then click to complete the parallelogram.
In
te rn
2. Click the upper-right vertex of the second rectangle and then click the upper-right vertex of the first rectangle.
al
Module 6 | Page 25
1. Select Parallelogram from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Sketching Circles
You can quickly sketch various types of circles.
There are four types of Circles: Center and Point Concentric 3 Point 3 Tangent
In
te rn
Sketching Circles
Fo r
There are four types of circles available in Sketcher: from the Circle types Center and Point Select Center and Point drop-down menu and select the location for the center and a location that determines the diameter. You can also right-click and select Circle. from the Circle types drop-down menu Concentric Select Concentric to create a circle that is concentric about an existing circle or arc.
from the Circle types drop-down menu and 3 Point Select 3 Point select three locations that the circle must pass through. from the Circle types drop-down menu 3 Tangent Select 3 Tangent and select three arcs, circles, or lines which must be tangent to the circle.
2012 PTC
PT
al
Figure 3 Circle Created by Picking 3 Points
Module 6 | Page 27
U se
nl y
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. 6. Move the cursor out until the circle diameter snaps to equal diameter with the arc. Click to complete the circle.
9. Select Concentric from the Circle types drop-down menu and select the largest circle. Move the cursor up until the circle diameter snaps to the right arc endpoint. Click to complete the circle. Middle-click to cancel further circle creation.
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
.
10. Select the arc and create another concentric circle. 11. Middle-click to cancel further circle creation. 12. Click OK from the ribbon.
Task 2:
1. Edit the definition of 3-PNT_CIRCLE. 2. Select 3 Point from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 3. Select the line endpoint and a rectangle corner. 4. Select the opposite rectangle corner. 5. Click OK Task 3: .
Fo r
2. Select 3 Tangent from the Circle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 3. Select the upper circle. 4. Select the left arc. 5. Select the right circle. 6. Click OK .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 29
U se
nl y
Sketching Arcs
You can create numerous types of arcs within Sketcher.
There are five types of Arcs: 3-Point Tangent End Concentric Center and Ends 3 Tangent Figure 1 3-Point Versus Tangent Arc Creation
te rn
3-Point Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc types drop-down menu and select the locations for the two arc endpoints and the arc diameter. When you select an existing line endpoint, a green quadrant symbol appears around that endpoint. Move the cursor through the quadrants perpendicular to the line to create a 3-Point arc. You can also right-click in Sketcher and select 3-Point / Tangent End.
Fo r
from the Arc types Tangent End Select 3-Point / Tangent End drop-down menu, select an existing line endpoint, and move the cursor through the green quadrants parallel to the line to create a Tangent End arc. You can also right-click and select 3-Point / Tangent End. Concentric Select Concentric from the Arc types drop-down menu to create an arc that is concentric about an existing arc or circle. from the Arc types Center and Ends Select Center and Ends drop-down menu to create an arc with center and ends that you can select. from the Arc types drop-down menu and 3 Tangent Select 3 Tangent select three arcs, circles, or lines which must be tangent to the arc.
Module 6 | Page 30 2012 PTC
PT
Sketching Arcs
In
al
Figure 3 Center and Endpoints Arc
U se
nl y
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select 3-Point / Tangent End from the Arc types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. Select the upper line endpoint, move the cursor horizontal to the left, and select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. Move the cursor above the horizontal reference and click to create the arc.
Fo r
6. In the graphics window, right-click and select 3-Point / Tangent End. Select the upper line endpoint, move the cursor up, and select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection to create the tangent arc. 7. Select the endpoint of the previous arc and create a new tangent arc of equal radius. 8. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar. from the
9. Select the endpoint of the previous arc and create a new tangent arc. 10. Click OK from the ribbon.
2012 PTC
PT
In
5. Click Undo
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 31
U se
nl y
.
Task 2:
1. Edit the definition of CONCENTRIC_ARC. 2. Select Concentric from the Arc types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. Select the upper arc and select the horizontal reference to the left of the center. Move the cursor clockwise and select the horizontal reference again to create the arc. Middle-click to stop concentric arc creation. 3. Select the lower arc and select the left arc endpoint. 4. Select the right arc endpoint to create the concentric arc. 5. Middle-click to stop concentric arc creation. 6. Click OK .
Task 3:
Fo r
PT
In
2. Disable Display Constraints 3. Select Center and Ends from the Arc types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. Select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. Select the left and upper endpoints of the lines to create the arc.
Module 6 | Page 32
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
4. Select the vertical and horizontal reference intersection again. 5. Select the right and bottom endpoints of the lines to create the arc. 6. Middle-click to stop arc creation. 7. Click OK .
2. Enable Display Constraints 3. Select 3 Tangent from the Arc types drop-down menu.
4. Select the left circle, right circle, and line. 5. Click Undo .
6. Click 3 Tangent
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
al
Module 6 | Page 33
U se
Task 4:
nl y
Fo r
The Circular option creates a rounded intersection between any two non-parallel entities. When you create a Circular Fillet between two lines, the lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet. If you create a Circular Fillet between any other entities, you must delete the remaining segments manually. When you create a Circular Fillet, construction lines are created leading from the fillet endpoints to the intersection of the original entities. Circular Fillets can be applied to either concave or convex corners. The corners do not have to be at 90. The radius size is based on pick location, as shown in Figure 3. In addition to clicking the icon, you can right-click in Sketcher and select Fillet to create Circular Fillets.
Module 6 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 - Radius Size Based on Pick Location
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Sketcher\Fillet_Circular Task 1:
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select Circular from the Fillet types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Select the two points to create the fillet. 6. The construction lines are automatically created.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 35
U se
nl y
.
9. Select two points to create the next fillet. 10. Select One-by-One from the Select types drop-down menu.
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Sketching Chamfers
You can create chamfer geometry in a sketch.
Chamfers in Sketcher: Can be applied to concave or convex corners. Corners do not have to be 90. Entities do not have to intersect. Size and angle is based on pick locations. Default Chamfer creates construction lines. Chamfer Trim removes geometry.
PT
Fo r
Sketching Chamfers
The Chamfer option creates a straight line between selected locations on any two non-parallel entities. When you create a chamfer, construction lines are created leading from the chamfer endpoints to the intersection of the original entities. to create a Chamfer and automatically trim
Remember the following points when sketching chamfers: Chamfers can be applied to either concave or convex corners. The corners do not have to be at 90. Entities do not have to intersect. The size and angle of the chamfer line is based on pick locations.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 37
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click CHAMFERS and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Select Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 5. Select two points to create the chamfer. The construction lines are automatically created.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Select Chamfer Trim from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Sketching group. 2. Select two points to create the chamfer. The geometry is trimmed away.
Module 6 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 6 | Page 39
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 6 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
7
U se O te rn al
Module 7 | Page 1
Once you sketch geometry, it typically needs to be modified or further manipulated. In this module, you learn the tools available for modifying and manipulating your sketch, as well as how to handle any conflicts that may arise while sketching.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand construction geometry theory. Learn how to sketch points. Use geometry tools to edit geometry in a sketch. Create new sketch files, as well as place and manipulate sketches. Create and modify dimensions, as well as handle any sketcher conflicts that arise.
In
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Construction Geometry Simplifies Sketches
U se
nl y
the construction circle, several more dimensions and constraints would be required to properly constrain the sketch. Construction geometry can simplify sketches. In Figure 3, the sketch has been simplified by constraining line vertices that must snap to an imaginary arc to a construction geometry arc. Construction geometry may be created automatically as part of the geometry created from a sketch tool. In Figure 4, a Center Rectangle uses construction geometry to automatically maintain symmetry. The two construction geometry lines are created as part of the rectangle. Sketched circular fillets and sketched chamfers also generate construction geometry.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Almost any solid sketched geometry entity can be converted into construction geometry. Simply select the geometry entity you wish to convert, right-click, and select Construction. To change construction geometry back to solid geometry, select it, right-click and select Geometry.
al
U se
To create new construction geometry in Sketcher, you can toggle Construction in the Sketching Geometry mode on by clicking Construction Mode group in the ribbon. When this mode is toggled on, you can use any sketch tool available to sketch new geometry, but the resulting geometry is created as construction geometry rather than solid geometry. You can then toggle off Construction Geometry mode and resume sketching solid geometry using the same sketch tools.
nl y
Module 7 | Page 3
Sketching Points
Sketcher points are a type of construction geometry which do not contribute to the resulting sketch geometry.
Sketcher Point uses the following: Dimension to theoretical sharps. Dimension slanted on arcs. Provide an anchor or pivot point in a sketch.
Sketching Points
Fo r
Sketcher Points are created by using the Point icon from the Sketching group in the ribbon. Sketcher points do not contribute to the resulting sketch geometry in a feature. Sketcher points are actually a type of construction geometry. Sketcher points have the following uses: Dimension to theoretical sharps In Figure 1, a Sketcher Point has been placed at the theoretical corner sharp. As a result, this theoretical sharp can be used for controlling design intent through a dimension. Dimension slanted on arcs In Figure 2, a Sketcher Point has been placed on each arc. As such, a slanted dimension can be created to measure the distance between arc tangencies. Provide an anchor or pivot point In Figure 3, a Sketcher Point has been placed at the intersection of the arc and the vertical and horizontal references. As such, the angular dimension can be modified, and the entire sketch pivots about the Sketcher Point.
Module 7 | Page 4 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Providing a Pivot Point
al
U se
nl y
te rn
Fo r
You can dynamically trim the parts of sketched entities you no longer need. When dynamically trimming, any entity that you touch while dragging is deleted. In Figure 1, the extra arcs are deleted.
Using Divide
You can divide a sketched entity into two or more new entities. The system divides the entity at the point(s) you select. In Figure 3, the circle is divided to become two separate arcs. Some sketched features require portions of a sketch to maintain an equal number of entities.
2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 5
PT
You can use various Geometry Tools within Sketcher to modify existing geometry. You can dynamically trim entities, trim entities to other entities, divide entities, and mirror entities. You can undo any operation you have performed using Geometry Tools.
In
al
Figure 4 Using Mirror
U se
nl y
Using Mirror
You can mirror selected sketched entities about a centerline. Mirrored entity geometry combines with the original entity to become one entity, given the following two criteria: The entity is normal to the centerline from which it is being mirrored. One endpoint lies on the centerline. In Figure 4, the top horizontal line and bottom are both perpendicular to the mirroring centerline and have an endpoint that lies on the centerline. When the geometry is mirrored, the result is one horizontal entity on the top and one arc on the bottom. You cannot mirror dimensions, text entities, or centerlines.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click DYNAMIC_TRIM and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
6. Dynamically trim the three extra arcs. 7. Perform the same trims to the lower sketch portion. 8. Click OK Task 2:
Fo r
3. Click Corner from the Editing group in the ribbon, and select the two entities to trim. 4. Click Undo .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 7
U se
4. Click Delete Segment from the Editing group in the ribbon, and click and drag to dynamically trim the entities.
nl y
Task 3:
Fo r
from the Editing 2. Click Divide group in the ribbon, and select the two circle locations to divide.
3. Middle-click to stop dividing entities. 4. Select the left half of the divided circle.
Module 7 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. Click Divide and divide the arcs four more times. 6. Click OK .
1. Edit the definition of MIRROR. 2. Enable Display Dimensions . Notice the top 7.25 dimension.
Fo r
7. Select the upper horizontal line and lower arc. 8. Notice that both are single entities. 9. Click OK .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Task 4:
Fo r
You can also scale and rotate selected sketch entities. The first available operations when you paste sketched entities into a sketch are scaling and rotating the pasted entities. You can scale and rotate existing sketch entities by selecting them and clicking Rotate Resize from the Editing group in the ribbon, or by right-clicking and selecting Rotate Resize. You can scale and rotate entities either by editing the fields in the dashboard or using the drag handles that appear on the entities. Click and drag the Location handle to move the entities about Sketcher. To help properly place the entities, you can right-click and drag to relocate the Location handle. Click and drag the Scaling handle to dynamically scale the entities or type a value in the Scaling factor field in the dashboard. to dynamically rotate the entities Click and drag the Rotate handle about the Location handle, or type a value in the Rotating angle field in the dashboard.
Module 7 | Page 10 2012 PTC
PT
You can cut, copy, and paste sketched entities. To do this, you can use either the context-sensitive right-mouse pop-up menu or icons in the ribbon. You can perform cut, copy, and paste operations from within a sketch or from one sketch to another.
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Rotating a Sketch
U se
nl y
You can also move the Location handle to a specified location in the sketch by activating the Reference collector in the dashboard. When you select a reference, the Location handle snaps onto the reference.
Translating Sketches
Another available operation you can perform on pasted sketches is translating entities. To translate a sketch, you can either click and drag the Location handle or type a distance value into the fields in the dashboard. The Translate Reference is the location by which the translation distances are measured. The sketch can be translated parallel (horizontal) and perpendicular (vertical) to the Translate Reference. You can retain the default translate reference or you can specify a different one.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 11
U se
nl y
Sketcher\Manipulating Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Drag a window around all sketched entities. 5. Right-click and select Cut. 6. Right-click and select Paste. 7. Click in the upper-right quadrant to place the sketch. 8. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the upper arc endpoint.
10. Click the X Location handle and drag it to reposition the sketch.
Fo r
11. In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 1 and the Rotating angle to 90, if necessary. Click Accept Changes .
12. Click Paste from the Operations group in the ribbon. 13. Click in the lower left Sketcher quadrant. 14. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the lower arc endpoint.
Module 7 | Page 12
PT
9. Click the Rotation handle and drag it to rotate the sketch 90 counterclockwise.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
.
15. Click the Rotation handle and drag it to rotate the sketch 90 clockwise. 16. Click the X Location handle and drag it to reposition the sketch. 17. In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 0.5 and press ENTER. . Click Accept Changes 18. Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch the tangent line.
19. Click Delete Segment trim the hanging arcs. 20. Click OK .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
and
al
Module 7 | Page 13
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Distance, Radius, and Diameter Dimensions
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Because Sketcher must maintain a fully defined sketch at all times, a sketch initially is dimensioned using weak dimensions. As you dimension your sketch (these are strong dimensions) using your desired design intent, the weak dimensions automatically disappear. You can convert weak dimensions to strong dimensions by selecting the weak dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Strong. Similar to creating a new dimension, you can either accept the current dimension values conversion to strong, or type a new one. When you edit a weak dimension, it is automatically converted to strong.
2012 PTC
PT
Weak Dimensions
measured (acute versus obtuse). You can also create an arc angle by selecting an arc endpoint, the arc center, and the other endpoint, and then placing the dimension. Distance Select two entities to measure the distance between them and place the dimension. Again, where you place the dimension determines whether it is vertical, horizontal, or slanted. Radius Select an arc or circle once, then place the dimension. You can toggle a radius dimension to a diameter or linear dimension by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Diameter and Convert to Linear, respectively. Diameter Double-click an arc or circle, then place the dimension. You can toggle a diameter dimension to a radius or linear dimension by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Radius and Convert to Linear, respectively. Revolved Diameter Select the entity, a centerline, and the entity again and place the dimension. Alternatively, you can select the centerline, the entity, and the centerline again. You can toggle a revolved diameter dimension to a revolved radius dimension and vice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Radial and Convert to Diameter, respectively. Arc length You can create an arc length dimension by selecting the arc segment, its two endpoints, and placing the dimension. The arc length dimension displays an arch symbol over the dimension value. You can toggle the arc length measurement to an arc angle dimension and vice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert to Length, respectively. Total included angle Similar to a revolved diameter dimension, you can create a total included angle dimension by selecting an angled line, a centerline, and the angled line again before placing the dimension. You can toggle the total included angle to an angle dimension and vice-versa by right-clicking and selecting Convert to Angle and Convert to Total included angle, respectively.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 7 | Page 15
Sketcher\Dimensions Task 1:
. 4. Click Normal from the Dimension group in the ribbon. 5. Select the top horizontal line and middle-click above it to place the dimension. 6. Type 190 and press ENTER. 7. Select the angled line and middle-click to place the dimension.
Fo r
10. Select the weak 247.12 dimension, right-click, and select Strong. 11. Type 250 and press ENTER. . 12. Click OK
Module 7 | Page 16
PT
8. Type 340 as the value and press ENTER. Notice the weak dimensions are disappearing.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
1. Edit the definition of ANGLE. 2. Click Normal . 3. Select the angled line and the horizontal reference, and then middle-click to place the angle dimension. 4. Type 35 and press ENTER. 5. Select the top arc endpoint, the arc center, and the bottom arc endpoint, and then middle-click to place the dimension, as shown. 6. Type 120 and press ENTER. 7. Click OK Task 3: .
2. Click Normal
3. Select the arc centers, middle-click to the left of the vertical reference, and press ENTER. 4. Click Undo
5. Click Normal
PT
Fo r
6. Select the arc centers, middle-click below the horizontal reference, and press ENTER. 7. Click Undo .
8. Click Normal
9. Select the arcs, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 10. Click Undo .
2012 PTC
In
te rn
. . .
al
Module 7 | Page 17
U se
nl y
12. Select the arcs, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 13. Click Undo .
15. Select the arc centers, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 16. Click OK .
Task 4:
3. Select the left circle, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER.
5. Click OK
Fo r
Task 5:
1. Edit the definition of ARC_CIRCLE_DIA. 2. Click Normal . 3. Double-click the arc, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER.
Module 7 | Page 18
PT
4. Select the arc, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. .
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
4. Double-click the circle, middle-click to place the dimension, and press ENTER. 5. Middle-click to stop dimension creation.
7. Click OK
Task 6:
1. Edit the definition of REV_DIA. 2. Click Normal . 3. Click the long vertical line, centerline, and long vertical line again.
7. Click Normal
PT
Fo r
8. Click the short vertical line, centerline, and short vertical line again. 9. Middle-click to place the dimension.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
and drag
al
Module 7 | Page 19
U se
nl y
Task 7:
1. Edit the definition of ARC_LENGTH. 2. Click Normal . 3. Select the arc, select each endpoint, and middle-click to place the dimension, as shown. 4. Type 380 and press ENTER.
Task 8:
Fo r
4. Middle-click to place the dimension, as shown. 5. Type 115 and press ENTER. 6. Click OK .
Module 7 | Page 20
PT
3. Select the angled line, the horizontal centerline, and angled line again.
2. Click Normal
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
and select
nl y
Fo r
Edit the dimension manually by double-clicking it. The geometry placement updates to the new dimension. You can also edit the dimension value when you create it without having to double-click it. Click the entity that the dimension is attached to and drag it. The dimension value updates automatically. Click the dimension dragger and drag it. The dimension value and geometry value update automatically. Use the Modify Dimensions dialog box. When you select the dimension, it highlights in the graphics window. You can edit values or scroll the wheel next to the dimension you wish to modify. The dimension value increases or decreases depending on the direction of scrolling. You can modify the sensitivity to adjust how finely or coarsely dimension wheels scroll. If Regenerate is selected, the sketch geometry updates immediately after a dimension is edited. If the check box is cleared, you can adjust
2012 PTC Module 7 | Page 21
PT
In
te rn
Figure 4 Modify Dimensions Dialog Box
al
U se
nl y
any or all dimensions within the Modify Dimensions dialog box, and the geometry does not update until you click Regenerate Section . If Lock Scale is selected, you can modify one dimension and all other dimension values update automatically to new values at the same ratio. Locking the scale to edit dimensions is common when creating the first feature of a model.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
. 4. Click the vertical line and drag it until the diameter is approximately 204. 5. Drag the 204 dimension dragger to approximately 90.
Fo r
7. Edit the 180 dimension to 8. The sketch is distorted due to the relative dimension differences. 8. Click Undo .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 23
U se
nl y
9. Drag a window around all dimensions. from the Editing 10. Click Modify group in the ribbon.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar. 3. Click Modify .
Module 7 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
11. In the Modify Dimensions dialog box, click in the 292 dimension field. Scroll the wheel to approximately 400. Select Lock Scale. Edit the 400 dimension to 16 and press ENTER. Click Regenerate Section .
U se
nl y
5. Scroll the 108 dimension wheel back and forth. 6. Drag the Sensitivity slider to the left. 7. Again, scroll the 108 dimension wheel back and forth. 8. Edit the 96 dimension to 100 and press ENTER. 9. Clear the Regenerate check box. 10. Edit the dimensions, as shown. 11. Click Regenerate Section .
12. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar and zoom in. 13. Click OK .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 25
U se
nl y
Sketcher Conflicts
Sketcher conflicts occur from manually adding too many constraints or dimensions.
Conflicts caused by: Adding too many dimensions. Adding too many constraints. Conflicts handled by: Deleting unwanted constraints or dimensions. Converting dimensions to Reference dimensions.
In
Fo r
Sketcher strives to maintain a fully constrained sketch automatically. Sketcher Conflicts are caused by an over-constrained sketch condition that arises from manually adding too many constraints or too many dimensions.
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Conflicting Dimension Converted to Reference Dimension
al
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Constrain the arc perpendicular to the vertical reference. 5. Select the 6.5 dimension in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. Click Delete.
Fo r
7. Select the 7.3 dimension from the graphics window. 8. In the Resolve Sketch dialog box, click Dim > Ref. .
9. Click OK
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. Add the necessary constraint to make the two highlighted lines equal.
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 27
U se
nl y
.
Task 2:
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Dimension from the vertical reference to the upper-right arc center and place the dimension under the sketch geometry. 3. Select the 16 dimension in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. Click Delete and press ENTER.
8. Click OK
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
from the
al
2012 PTC
5. Select the Parallel constraint in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. Click Delete and press ENTER.
U se
nl y
te rn
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
A sketch can either be created within a model or it can be saved as its own file. If created within a model, it can be saved as a sketch file, which has a file extension of *.sec. You can also create a new sketch file by selecting Sketch in the New dialog box. Any sketch file can be imported into a model and placed in a Sketch feature.
In
al
Figure 2 Creating a New Sketch File
Module 7 | Page 29
U se
nl y
3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click Edit. 4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 5. Click File > Save As > Save a Copy.
7. Click OK
Fo r
2. In the New dialog box, select Sketch. Edit the Name to D_shape. Click OK. 3. Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu and sketch the circle.
Module 7 | Page 30
PT
Task 2:
9. Click Close
In
te rn
6. In the Save a Copy dialog box, type CRANK_LOBE.SEC as the New Name. Click OK. from the dashboard.
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
4. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch a vertical line whose endpoints are on the circle.
7. Select the vertical line and the arc, and then middle-click to place the dimension.
9. Double-click the arc and place the diameter dimension. 10. Type 4 and press ENTER.
Fo r
PT
2012 PTC
In
te rn
al
Module 7 | Page 31
U se
nl y
5. Click Delete Segment from the Editing group and trim the right arc.
Place a section from file This can be a *.sec file that you have created by clicking File > New and selecting Sketch, or it can be a sketch that you have saved from a different model. Either way, you can browse to the location of the existing sketch section file and place it. Use the Sketcher Palette The Sketcher palette enables you to quickly place commonly used basic shapes, such as I-beams and hexagons, into your sketch. The Sketcher Palette contains a tab for the current working directory as well as default tabs for polygons, profiles, shapes, and stars. You can create additional custom tabs simply by creating folders in the Sketcher Palette library location. When you add sketch *.sec files to the folder, they are listed in a tab with the same name in the Sketcher Palette. When you place a sketch, you can translate, rotate, and scale it. You can also modify the dimension scheme or value.
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 32
PT
You can insert preexisting sketches into your sketch. This helps to save time rather than recreating an existing sketch. It also promotes data reuse. There are two different methods that you can use to place sections:
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 The Sketcher Palette
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click Sketch 1 and select Edit Definition. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Click File System from the Get Data group.
6. Click in the graphics window to place the section. 7. Relocate the X Location handle to the arc center, if necessary.
In
Fo r
1. Edit the definition of Sketch 2. 2. Click Palette from the Sketching group in the ribbon. Notice the .sec file in the tab for the working directory. 3. In the Sketcher Palette dialog box, select each of the different tabs and review their contents. Select the Polygons tab. Select the 8-Sided Octagon section to preview it. Double-click the 8-Sided Octagon section.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
al
.
Module 7 | Page 33
U se
nl y
.
4. Click in the graphics window to place the section. 5. Relocate the section to the vertical and horizontal reference intersection. 6. In the dashboard, edit the Scaling factor to 1. Click Accept Changes 7. Click Close in the Sketcher Palette. 8. Edit the 1 length dimension to 1.5 9. Click OK . .
Fo r
Module 7 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
8
U se O te rn al
Module 8 | Page 1
Up to this point, you have learned how to sketch geometry within the Sketcher environment. In this module, you apply that knowledge to the creation of sketch features. Sketch features typically serve as references to other features and can exist separately as their own feature or as the starting point when you create sketch-based features. You learn how to specify the sketch setup for a sketch feature, utilize sketch references, use entity from edge, and thicken edges.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Learn how to create sketch features. Specify the sketch setup. Utilize sketch references. Use entity from edge within Sketcher. Thicken edges within Sketcher.
In
nl y
In
Fo r
You can create a sketch feature by clicking Sketch from the Datum group in the Model ribbon tab. Creating a sketch feature involves the following three steps: Specify the sketch setup. Once the sketch setup has been defined, you can always change it to another plane. Select additional sketch references that you intend to dimension from or snap to with sketch geometry. For example, in Figure 3, some of the existing geometry was specified as sketch references for a new Sketch feature. Sketch the geometry.
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Geometry Snapped to Added References
al
U se
nl y
An open section sketch is required for creating a rib feature. All loops of a multiple loop section must be closed. When creating a revolve feature, you must only sketch geometry on one side of the centerline.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 3
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 3 Sketch Plane Modified from FRONT to RIGHT
al
U se
nl y
Orientation Direction Determines the direction that the orientation reference faces when viewing the sketch in the 2-D sketch orientation. The orientation reference can be assigned to face top, bottom, right, or left. These directions are named to reflect how the reference orients with regard to the Creo Parametric graphics window. Note that datum planes have two sides, brown and gray, and that the brown, or positive side, orients to the selected direction. If you use an object-action workflow and select the sketch plane reference before starting the Sketch tool, Sketcher immediately opens with the Sketch Orientation reference and direction automatically selected. These automatic selections are based on the models orientation in the graphics window when you started the sketch tool. Working in this manner enables you to entirely bypass the Sketch dialog box.
You can edit the sketcher startup to set the sketching plane parallel to the screen in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box. At this point, you have three options available with respect to the sketch setup and orientation: 1. Retain the current default sketch orientation and begin sketching entities. 2. Revert to the default 2-D sketch orientation The system creates this default 2-D sketch orientation based on the specified Orientation to Direction and Orientation Reference. You can click Sketch View reorient the sketch into this 2-D sketch orientation. When this occurs, the sketch plane is oriented parallel to the screen, and the Orientation Reference points in the Orientation Direction. Edit the sketch setup While sketching, you can always reenter sketch from the Setup group. You can setup by clicking Sketch Setup switch the sketch plane or update the sketch orientation, keeping in mind that the sketch orientation references are only used in the 2-D sketch orientation. Different combinations of selected orientation reference and orientation direction yield the same 2-D sketch orientation in the graphics window. You can also reverse the sketch orientation by clicking Flip in the Sketch dialog box. Within the Properties tab of the Sketch dialog box, you can modify the name of the sketch feature as it appears in the model tree.
3.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
When you enter Sketcher, you still remain in the current 3-D orientation by default.
nl y
vertical reference. When you specify an entity for the desired reference direction, the sketch dynamically reorients so that the selected reference is in the specified orientation. To return to the original sketch orientation, you can right-click and select Section Orientation > Restore section orientation. You can also flip either the section orientation or the sketching plane.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Display types:
2. Highlight datum plane FRONT and then select it. 3. Click Sketch from the Datum group. Notice that the current model orientation is now the default sketch orientation. Notice that now you could sketch geometry on datum plane FRONT. 4. Click Cancel dashboard. Click Yes.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Click Sketch . Highlight datum plane FRONT and then select it. Click Sketch. Again, notice that you could now sketch geometry on datum plane FRONT.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 7
U se
nl y
The T, R, and F features have been added for training purposes to help visualize and distinguish datum planes.
from the
3. Right-click in the graphics window and select Placement. 4. Highlight datum plane RIGHT and select it. 5. Click Sketch. 6. Notice that you could now sketch geometry on datum plane RIGHT. 7. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar. from the
Fo r
9. Click Sketch Setup . Notice that datum plane TOP is oriented to the top of the screen, per the Sketch dialog box. In the Sketch dialog box, select Left as the new Orientation. Click Sketch.
Module 8 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 3:
1. Orient the model to the 3D view orientation. 2. Above the model tree, click Settings Filters. and select Tree
4. Resume the three suppressed features in the model tree. 5. Click Sketch . Select the front, flat surface as the Sketch Plane. Click Sketch.
6. Right-click in the graphics window and select Section Orientation > Set vertical reference. 7. Select the chamfer surface.
Fo r
10. Right-click and select Section Orientation > Restore section orientation. 11. Click Cancel Click Yes. .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 9
U se
nl y
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box and click OK.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 The References Dialog Box
al
U se
nl y
1.
You can click References from the Setup group. This opens the References dialog box. 2. Right-click in the graphics window and select References. Again, this opens the References dialog box. 3. While sketching, you can add references on-the-fly by pressing ALT, highlighting the desired entity to add as a reference, and selecting it. Pressing CTRL+ALT enables you to select multiple edges for multiple dynamically added references.
The References dialog box consists of the following items: Select References Select entities in the graphics window. The following types of entities can be selected as sketch references: Existing geometry Select the edges or surfaces of features that have already been created. You can also select silhouette edges when the sketch is in the correct orientation. Silhouette edges are rounded surfaces that display as edges when the model is in the correct orientation. Sketches Select geometry from existing sketches. Datum Features Select datum planes, datum axes, points, and coordinate systems. Select Xsec References Select a surface or datum plane to intersect with the sketching plane. Selection Filters Used for selecting items within the Reference list. Choices from the drop-down list include Use Edge/Offset, All Non-Dim. Refs, Chain Refs, and All References. Replace Select a reference from the list, click Replace, and select a new reference. Delete Delete the selected reference from the list. Reference Status Displays the status of the sketch with respect to references. Status options include Unsolved Sketch, Partially Placed, and Fully Placed. Solve You can solve an unsolved or partially placed sketch after changing references.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 8 | Page 11
Sketcher\References Task 1:
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Sketch from the Datum group. Select the surface. Edit the Orientation direction to Right. Click Sketch. 3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .
Fo r
6. Select the additional top silhouette edge reference shown. You can only select this silhouette edge in the 2-D sketch orientation.
7. In the References dialog box, select the Edge:F8(EXTRUDE_1) reference and click Delete.
Module 8 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
from the
from the 4. Click References Setup group. Query select the vertical edge.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
8. Select the far left vertical edge in the graphics window to add it as a reference. 9. Click Close in the References dialog box.
12. Still holding CTRL+ALT, select the angled edge. 13. Notice that you have added two new references dynamically. 14. Using these new references, sketch the remaining four lines.
Fo r
16. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 17. Edit the definition of Sketch 3. 18. Click References . Notice that the unused reference was removed from the left side of the sketch.
PT
2012 PTC
In
15. Click OK
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 13
U se
11. As you move to the left, press CTRL+ALT and select the datum plane.
10. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch the right-most vertical line from top to bottom, staying in the tool.
nl y
Fo r
The Project and Offset options in Sketcher create sketcher geometry by projecting selected geometry edges onto the sketching plane. The two options are the same except the offset edge enables you to specify an offset value to the edges. A positive offset value causes the geometry to become larger, whereas a negative offset value causes the geometry to become smaller. Each entity created displays the ~ constraint symbol. The resulting dimensions are always positive when shown in a drawing.
When using the entity from edge options, you can select edges three different ways: Single Edges are selected one at a time. Chain Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities. Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain of geometry you wish to create. Figure 2 shows one possible chain selection from the selected entities. Loop Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. When you select a surface or face, the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If more than one loop exists, you must select the desired loop.
Module 8 | Page 14 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Reused Entities Offset from Edge
U se
nl y
Sketcher\Use_Edge Task 1:
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 4. Click Project from the Sketching group.
Fo r
8. Click Next from the menu manager. Click Accept. Click Close. 9. Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch two tangent lines.
10. Click Delete Segment and trim the four overhanging arcs. 11. Click OK Task 2: .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 15
U se
nl y
2. Click Offset from the Sketching group. 3. Select Loop in the Type dialog box. 4. Select the surface.
5. Click Accept from the menu manager. 6. Type 10 and press ENTER.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 16
PT
In
9. Click OK
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Thickening Edges
The Thicken Edge option enables you to offset existing geometry with a width.
Edge Types: Single Chain Loop End Cap Types: Open Flat Circular
In
te rn
Figure 2 Thicken Chain: Flat
al
Thickening Edges
The Thicken option in Sketcher creates Sketcher geometry by projecting and then offsetting and thickening selected geometry edges onto the sketching plane. You are prompted for two values: a thickness and a positive or negative offset. Both values create Sketcher dimensions that you can modify. In addition, a reference dimension is automatically created between the selected edge and the thickened edge. The reference dimension cannot be modified directly, but updates with other changes. Even if negative offset values are entered, the resulting dimensions are always positive when shown in a drawing. When thickening edges, you can select edges using three different methods: Single Edges are selected one at a time. Chain Create sketched entities from a chain of edges or entities. Select two edges from the same surface or face and select which chain of geometry you wish to create. Figure 3 shows one possible chain selection from the selected entities.
2012 PTC Module 8 | Page 17
Fo r
PT
U se
nl y
Loop Create sketched entities from a loop of edges or entities. When you select a surface or face, the edges or entities that form the loop are selected. If more than one loop exists, you must select the appropriate loop. In addition, you can control the end cap type on the thickened edges using the following options: Open No additional geometry is added to thickened edges. Flat Line segments are added to ends of the thickened edges. Circular Arcs are added to ends of the thickened edges.
Fo r
Module 8 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Sketcher\Thicken_Edge Task 1:
Thicken the edges of geometry using the Single and Chain options.
3. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: 4. Click Thicken from the Sketching group. 5. Select Single and Open. 6. Select the arc. .
Fo r
10. Select the edges shown. 11. If necessary, click Next to highlight the appropriate chain. Click Accept.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 8 | Page 19
U se
nl y
12. Type 2 for the thickness and press ENTER. 13. Type 10 for the offset and press ENTER.
14. Select Chain and Circular. 15. Select the edges shown. 16. If necessary, click Next to highlight the appropriate chain. Click Accept.
17. Type 2 for the thickness and press ENTER. 18. Type 10 for the offset and press ENTER. 19. Click OK .
Task 2:
Fo r
3. Select Loop and select the top surface. 4. Click Next to highlight the appropriate chain. Click Accept.
5. Type 2 for the thickness and press ENTER. 6. Type -1 for the offset and press ENTER. 7. Click OK .
Module 8 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
9
U se O te rn al
Module 9 | Page 1
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand the creating datum features theory. Create datum axes. Create datum planes.
nl y
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 2
PT
In
te rn
Datum features are commonly required as references when creating other features. Datum features can be used as dimensioning references, feature placement references, and assembly references. The default color of datum features in the graphics window is brown (datum planes are both brown and gray, depending upon which side is currently being viewed). The following four types of datum features can be created:
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
In
Fo r
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Geometry Axis (Centerline) Created for Revolve Feature
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
You can select datum axes using the following methods: Select the axis line. Select the axis name tag. Select the axis in the model tree. Search for the axis by name in the search tool.
Module 9 | Page 4
PT
Auto Axis Belongs to another feature and is created in the following two circumstances: A circle is extruded. A hole is created. 2. Axis Feature Select almost any combination of geometry that defines a line in 3-D space. You can select single or multiple references which are set as a combination of Through, Normal, Tangent, and Center constraint types. The following types of axis features can be created: Through an edge. Normal to a plane. Through a cylindrical surface. Through the intersection of two planes or planar surfaces. Through two points or vertices. Through the center of an arc. Tangent to an edge. Through a point or vertex, normal to a plane. Through the X, Y, or Z axis of a coordinate system. 3. Geometry Point When created in Sketcher and when the sketch is completed, the axis appears at the location of the geometry point, normal to the sketch plane. A geometry point within a sketch can only create axes when used for internal sketches of extrude features. 4. Geometry Centerline Created only in Sketcher. A geometry centerline is created in the sketching plane, and when the sketch is completed, it displays as a datum axis within the graphics window. A geometry centerline can be used as the axis of revolution for a revolve feature. When a geometry centerline is selected in Sketcher, you can right-click and select Construction to convert it to a sketch entity. Similarly, you can select a centerline and right-click and select Geometry to convert the centerline to a geometry centerline.
1.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Axis group. from the Datum
5. De-select the datum axis. 6. In the ribbon, select the View tab. Display .
Fo r
13. Press CTRL and select datum plane FRONT and the surface.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 5
U se
nl y
14. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the Display tab. Select the Adjust Outline check box. Select Reference from the drop-down list. Select the same surface again. 15. In the Datum Axis dialog box, select the Properties tab. Edit the Name to REF_1. Click OK and de-select the datum axis. 16. Click Axis .
PT
In
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 6
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
Datum planes are individual features that can be redefined, suppressed, hidden, or deleted. A datum plane is a planar reference that has no mass. It is infinite in size, but its display size can be edited to visually fit a part, feature, surface, edge, axis, or radius. You can also drag its drag handle. A datum plane has two sides that display brown and gray, as shown in Figure 1. The front, or brown side, is considered to be positive, while the back, or gray side, is considered to be negative.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Datum Plane Types
al
Module 9 | Page 7
U se
nl y
2.
3. 4.
Fo r
Select the datum frame. Select the datum plane tag. Select the datum plane in the model tree. Search for the datum plane by name in the search tool.
Module 9 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
5. 6. 7.
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Click Plane group. . from the Datum
3. Select the right surface and drag the drag handle to an offset of 12. 4. Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box. 5. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
10. Click OK in the Datum Plane dialog box and de-select the datum plane.
Fo r
PT
12. Select the surface. 13. In the Placement tab of the Datum Plane dialog box, select Through from the drop-down list.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 9
U se
nl y
20. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Parallel from the datum plane reference drop-down list. Click OK.
Fo r
21. With DTM5 still selected, click . Plane 22. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2. 23. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Normal from the datum plane reference drop-down list. Click OK and de-select the datum plane.
Module 9 | Page 10
PT
19. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT.
In
te rn
17. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select Tangent from the surface reference drop-down list. Click OK and de-select the datum plane.
al
2012 PTC
U se
14. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select the Display tab. Select the Adjust Outline check box. Edit the drop-down list to Reference. Select the surface again. Edit the drop-down list back to Size. Edit the Width and Height to 14 and 10, respectively. Click OK and de-select the datum plane.
nl y
25. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and the surface. 26. Edit the offset value to 10 or -10 to attain the proper direction and click OK. 27. Edit the definition of DTM4.
29. De-select the datum plane. 30. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 31. In the View tab, disable Plane . Tag Display This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 9 | Page 11
U se
nl y
28. In the Datum Plane dialog box, select the Display tab and click Flip. Click OK.
Fo r
Module 9 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
10
U se O te rn al
Module 10 | Page 1
Once you have created 2-D sketches, you can use those sketches to create 3-D geometry. In this module, you use 2-D sketches to create 3-D solid geometry features including extrude, revolve, and profile rib features. You also learn about the common dashboard options associated with these types of sketch-based features.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create solid extrude and revolve features. Add taper to extrude features. Create profile rib features. Understand common dashboard options including extrude depth, feature direction, thickening sketches, and revolve angle. Understand how to automatically add and remove material.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 2
te rn
Figure 3 - Extrude Feature Removing Material
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the ribbon, click Extrude from the Shapes group. 3. Select Sketch 1. 4. Drag the drag handle down below datum plane TOP to a depth of 16. 5. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. 6. Click Extrude 7. Select Sketch 2. . from
PT
Fo r
In
13. Edit the depth to Through All . 14. Click Complete Feature . .
te rn
. . from
al
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 4
te rn
Figure 2 Extrude Feature with Taper Added
al
U se
nl y
If the sketching plane is off the surface of the part, the section size increases as the feature is extruded. Positive draft angle direction is determined upon feature creation. The enable_tapered_extrude configuration option controls availability in the dashboard. This option is enabled by default.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Extrude\Add_Taper Task 1:
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
.
4. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Add Taper check box. Edit the value to 10 degrees and press ENTER.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
from the
2. Select sketch HEX. 3. In the dashboard, click Remove Material . Click Change Depth . Direction Edit the depth to Through All . Select the Options tab. Select the Add Taper check box. Edit the value to 5 degrees and press ENTER. 4. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Blind (Variable) This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. Symmetric The section extrudes equally on both sides of the sketch plane. You can edit the total depth at which the feature extrudes, just as you can with the Blind depth option. Therefore, the Symmetric depth is essentially the same as a Blind Symmetric depth. To Next This option causes the extrude to stop at the next surface encountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surface controls the extrude depth. Through All This option causes the section to extrude through the entire model. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controls the extrude depth. Through Until This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the extrude depth. Note that the section must pass through the selected surface. To Selected This option causes the extrude to stop at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the extrude depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the section does not have to pass through the selected surface.
Module 10 | Page 8
Fo r
PT
In
When you create an extrude feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth at which the feature extrudes can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. You can specify the desired depth option using the dashboard or by right-clicking on the drag handle in the graphics window. Extrude depth options include:
te rn
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the depth at which the section extrudes on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the section extrudes on Side 1; however, you can cause the section to extrude on Side 2 as well. Any of the above options can be used for either side, except for Symmetric. The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry present at the time (in the feature order) when the extrude is created. Features created after the extrude feature is created do not cause the extrude feature's depth to change. You can also switch depth options by right-clicking on the drag handle in the graphics window.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 9
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Extrude Shapes group. from the
5. Click Extrude
6. Select sketch SYMMETRIC. 7. In the dashboard, edit the depth to Symmetric and edit the depth to 125.
PT
Fo r
14. Select sketch THRU_ALL. 15. Edit the depth to Through All and click Remove Material . 16. Click Complete Feature .
Module 10 | Page 10
9. Click Extrude
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
18. Select sketch THRU_UNTIL. 19. Edit the depth to Through Until and select the surface. 20. Click Complete Feature .
22. Select sketch TO_SURFACE. 23. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the surface. 24. Click Complete Feature . 25. Notice the contour at the extrude end. 26. Enable Plane Display 27. Click Extrude . .
PT
In
29. Edit the depth to To Selected and select datum plane DTM1. .
Fo r
33. Select the Options tab and edit the Side 2 depth to To Next . 34. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
te rn
Module 10 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 3 - Same Feature, Side 2 Depth Direction Added
al
U se
nl y
both directions from the sketch plane. This second side is Side 2. In Figure 3, the Side 2 depth direction was added to the feature.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
Modify the depth and material directions for various extrude features.
2. Edit the definition of HEX. 3. Click Change Depth Direction from the dashboard. Click Preview Feature from the dashboard. 4. Orient the model and notice the cut is now on the underside of the model.
Fo r
The hex feature is still removing material from the model (the base).
PT
6. In the dashboard, click Change . Material Direction . Click Preview Feature The hex feature is now removing material on the outside of the sketch.
8. In the dashboard, click Change . Material Direction Click Complete Feature . 9. Press CTRL+D to orient to the Standard Orientation.
Module 10 | Page 14
In
te rn
from .
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. Edit the definition of OVAL. Notice the depth direction points upward. 11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Edit the Side 2 depth to Blind and edit the value to 28. Click Complete Feature .
12. Orient the model and view the underside of the model.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
The Thicken Sketch option is available in many types of features, including extrude, revolve, blend, and sweep features. When creating one of these option to assign a thickness to
features, you can use the Thicken Sketch the selected section outline.
You can create features that either add or cut away material. You can edit the material thickness, as shown in Figures 2 and 3. You can also change the side of the sketch where the thickness is added, or add thickness to both sides of the sketch by using Change Thickness to toggle through the options. Side You can use this option on both open and closed sketches. For example, you can use the Thicken sketch option to sketch a circle and extrude it into a pipe shape with a specified wall thickness, or you can use it to sketch a rectangle and extrude it into box-shaped tubing, again with a specified wall thickness.
Module 10 | Page 16
PT
te rn
Figure 3 - Thicken Side Flipped
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the hex cut in the bottom of the model. 3. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
Fo r
PT
In
8. Edit the definition of OVAL. 9. In the dashboard, edit the depth value to 10. Click Change Depth . Direction Click Remove Material .
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 10 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
10. Click Change Thickness Side to thicken on both sides of the sketch.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Removing Material using a Revolve Feature
al
U se
nl y
You can revolve either an open or closed sketch. In Figure 2, a closed sketch is used to create the feature that adds material, while an open section is used to create the cut that removes material in Figure 3. You can also thicken the sketch used to create a revolve feature.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
3. Select the vertical centerline, right-click, and select Geometry. 4. Click OK . from the
In
Fo r
11. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Internal CL. . .
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Module 10 | Page 21
al
U se
nl y
2. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. Notice the vertical and horizontal centerlines.
from the
17. Edit the Revolve angle to 75 and press ENTER. 18. Click Complete Feature .
19. Edit the definition of Revolve 2. 20. Edit the Revolve angle back to 360 and press ENTER. 21. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
When you create a revolve feature from a 2-D sketch, the depth angle at which the feature revolves can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. Revolve angle options include: Variable (Blind) This the default revolve angle option. You can edit this revolve angle value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. The dashboard also contains four predefined angles that you can select: 90, 180, 270, and 360.. Symmetric The section revolves equally on both sides of the sketch plane. You can edit the total angle at which the feature revolves just as you can with the Variable depth angle option. Therefore, the Symmetric angle is essentially the same as the Variable Symmetric depth. To Selected Selecting this option stops the revolve at the selected surface or datum plane. A dimension for angle value is not required, as the selected surface controls the revolve angle. The location where you select the datum plane or surface determines where the revolve stops in relation to the axis of revolution. In Figure 3, the datum plane was selected to the right of the axis of revolution. If the datum plane was selected to
2012 PTC Module 10 | Page 23
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 - Side 1 Revolve Angle To Selected, Side 2 Revolve Angle Variable
U se
nl y
the left of the axis of revolution, the feature would have revolved another 180 before stopping. Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the angle at which the section revolves on each side of the sketching plane. By default, the section revolves on Side 1; however, you can set the section to revolve on Side 2. Any of the above options can be used for either side except for Symmetric. You can also switch revolve angle options by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Revolve Shapes group. from the
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 10 | Page 25
4. Edit the revolve angle depth value to 90 and click Change . Angle Side
al
U se
3. Select the visible sketch and select datum axis REV from the model tree.
nl y
7. Edit the depth to To Selected . 8. Enable Plane Display and select datum plane DTM2 to the right of the axis of revolution.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
.
10. In the dashboard, edit the Side 2 depth to To Selected and select datum plane DTM2 to the left of the axis of revolution.
al
2012 PTC
U se
and type 90 as
9. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Edit the Side 2 depth to
nl y
Fo r
You can automatically add and remove material by changing the direction of an extrude and revolve feature either in or out of a model. When this action is performed, the feature preview automatically updates. Additionally, a pop-up message appears, as shown in Figure 1. Also, the dashboard Remove Material option is toggled accordingly. To use this functionality, you can set the auto_add_remove configuration option to yes. The default option is no. Consider the following when using Auto Add and Remove functionality: This functionality is available for both internal and external sketches. You must place the sketch on a single solid surface, which determines the add or remove status. This functionality is only available upon initial definition of the feature. It is intentionally unavailable when you edit the feature or definition. This protects you from unintentionally flipping feature material.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Adding and Removing Material on a Revolve Feature
Module 10 | Page 27
U se
nl y
Extrude\Auto_Add-Remove Task 1:
Experiment with automatically adding and removing material for an extrude feature.
5. Drag the depth handle down into the model. 6. Notice that material is not removed. 7. Click Cancel Feature 8. Click File > Options. and click Yes.
Fo r
9. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Configuration Editor category. Click Add. Type auto_add_remove in the Option name field. Select yes from the Option value drop-down list. Click OK > OK > No.
PT
11. Drag the depth handle down into the model. 12. Notice the caption, and that the feature is now removing material. 13. Edit the depth to 10.
Module 10 | Page 28
In
and select
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
15. Click the magenta flip depth arrow. Notice that the feature is now adding material. 16. Click the magenta flip depth arrow. Notice that the feature is removing material again. 17. Click Complete Feature 18. Click Extrude sketch HEX. .
and select
19. Drag the depth handle down into the model. 20. Notice that the feature does not switch to a cut because the sketching plane does not lie on the surface. 21. In the dashboard, edit the depth to To Next . 22. Click Complete Feature Task 2: .
Fo r
4. Drag the handle in the opposite direction to approximately 70 degrees. 5. Notice that the feature is now removing material. 6. Notice that Remove Material has been selected in the dashboard.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 10 | Page 29
U se
nl y
7. In the dashboard, click Change . Depth Direction 8. Right-click the depth handle and select To Selected. 9. Select the surface shown. 10. Click Complete Feature . 11. Set the auto_add_remove configuration option back to no. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Flipping Which Side the Rib is Created
Fo r
2012 PTC
al
Module 10 | Page 31
U se
nl y
7. Select RIB_SKETCH-2 .
Fo r
10. Click theChange Thickness . The rib moves to the Option left of the sketch.
Module 10 | Page 32
PT
9. Drag the handle and edit the width to 25. The rib is centered about the sketch.
In
te rn
al
Notice the angled rib surface is not planar; it is contoured to match the curved surface which is adjacent to the sketch.
U se
O
2012 PTC
3. Select RIB_SKETCH-1.
nl y
from the 2. Select Profile Rib Rib types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
11. Click theChange Thickness again. The rib moves Option to the right of the sketch. 12. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
Module 10 | Page 33
16. Click the magenta arrow in the graphics window. The rib is now on the bottom of the sketch.
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 10 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
11
U se O nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create internal sketches. Create embedded datum features.
In
Objectives
te rn
In this module, you learn how to create internal sketches when creating sketch-based features as an additional option to selecting a preexisting sketch. You also learn how to create embedded datum features.
al
Module 11 | Page 1
In
Fo r
When creating sketched features in Creo Parametric, you can use either internal or external sketches. PTC does not recommend one type of sketch over the other; you should use the type that works best for you. In this topic, we discuss how to use internal sketches and some of the benefits they can provide.
), and then Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (ex: Extrude select the sketching plane. This is sometimes known as an action-object workflow. ), and then Start the feature tool for any sketched feature (ex: Extrude right-click and select Define Internal Sketch. You can also click Define from
Module 11 | Page 2 2012 PTC
PT
Internal Sketches
te rn
Figure 3 - External Sketches
al
U se
nl y
the Placement tab. This method is almost a subset of the action-object workflow in that you start the feature tool first (action) and then select the sketch plane (object). The difference is that this is the first method where you can specify an orientation for the sketch. This is because the Sketch Setup dialog box displays when using this method. When you complete a feature with any of these methods, an internal sketch with the name Section X is created and embedded within the feature.
You can always redefine an external sketch to internal. You can select a different sketch for the same feature. This enables you to quickly pursue multiple design options. The same external sketch can be specified for multiple features. You can unlink a specified external sketch. External sketches result in a higher feature count because there is an additional sketch feature for every sketched feature as displayed in the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 11 | Page 3
from the 3. Click Extrude Shapes group in the ribbon. 4. Notice that you entered Sketcher without defining the Sketch Setup. 5. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 6. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
PT
8. Click OK
Fo r
10. Edit the depth to 7 and click Complete Feature . 11. Suppress Extrude 2.
13. Select the top surface. 14. Click Center Rectangle and sketch and dimension the rectangle. 15. Click OK .
Module 11 | Page 4
In
te rn
and
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
and
21. Notice that the Sketch Setup dialog box displays. 22. Select the front surface and click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box.
23. Click Palette and place the 6-Sided Hexagon shape. 24. Delete the length dimension, and edit the resulting radius dimension to 10. 25. Click OK
Fo r
PT
In
and query 27. Click To Selected select the surface at the bottom of Extrude 3. .
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 11 | Page 5
U se
nl y
18. Orient to the Standard Orientation and observe the 12_POINT sketch.
29. Expand Extrude 4 in the model tree, and notice the internal sketch Section 1.
30. Edit the definition of Extrude 4. 31. Select the sketch feature 12_POINT as the new sketch. 32. Click OK in the Section Selection dialog box to replace the existing internal sketch. 33. Click Complete Feature .
34. Expand Extrude 4 again in the model tree. Notice that Extrude 4 now uses the sketch feature 12_POINT and is external.
35. Select hidden sketch 12_POINT and press DELETE. Notice that Extrude 4 is also deleted, as it uses the 12_POINT sketch. Click Cancel in the Delete dialog box. 36. Edit the definition of Extrude 4. 38. Click OK in the Unlink dialog box to break the association. 39. Click Complete Feature 37. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and click Unlink.
PT
Fo r
40. Select hidden sketch 12_POINT and press DELETE. Click OK to delete the sketch feature. 41. In the model tree, expand Extrude 4 and notice that it again contains an internal sketch.
Module 11 | Page 6
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Another benefit of embedded datum features is that they produce a cleaner, more organized model tree. For example, if the sketch plane of an extrude feature you are creating requires you to create three datum planes and an axis, those four datum features are embedded within the node of the extrude feature. Unlike regular features, the embedded datum features do not clutter the model tree. Each embedded datum feature functions as some type of reference to the feature in which it is embedded, otherwise it would not be embedded. This enables you to easily determine the function of each datum and identify the feature that references it. The display of embedded datum features is automatically set to hidden after they are created. This helps ensure that the display of your model remains uncluttered. In the following figure, notice the three different displays of the same model tree. The model on the left was created without using embedded datum features. The model in the middle was created using embedded datum
2012 PTC Module 11 | Page 7
Fo r
PT
Suppose you have begun the creation of an extrude feature, and then realize the sketch plane you need has not yet been created. You could cancel out of the Extrude Tool, create the datum plane, and then start the Extrude Tool again. A better solution would be to simply create the sketch plane as an embedded datum, while the Extrude Tool is still open.
In
There are several uses for embedded datum features, such as sketch planes, orientation planes, dimensioning references, placement references for holes, and references for draft features. Datum features can even be embedded in other datum features.
te rn
al
U se
Figure 3 - Embedded in a Datum
nl y
features and the feature nodes are expanded. The model on the right displays the same model shown in the middle, except in this case the feature nodes are collapsed.
After you have created the required datum features, you can resume the creation of the feature by clicking Resume Feature in the dashboard. By then selecting the newly created datum features as sketch planes, orientation, dimensioning, placement, or depth references, they are embedded in the feature.
Fo r
When you delete a feature containing embedded datum features, Creo Parametric provides the option to keep or delete the embedded datum features. Sketch and orientation datum planes can only be embedded in features using internal sketches. If for some reason the datum features you create are not embedded as expected, you can select them in the model tree and drag them into the feature after creation. This embeds them and sets their display to hidden, just as if they were originally embedded. Datums can be un-embedded in the same way, by dragging them from a feature back to the model tree.
Best Practices
Embedded datum features should be used as the design intent dictates. For example, you cannot reuse an embedded datum feature in a downstream feature. Using embedded datum features promotes the creation of models that are easier to edit and utilize, and thus easier to share with downstream users.
Module 11 | Page 8 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
The quickest way to create embedded datum features is to click Datum to expand the Datum group, located to the far right of the sketched features dashboard, as shown in Figure 2. Of course, you can always select the Model tab while in feature creation and select the desired datum feature type from the Datum group.
al
U se
Embedded datums are created by starting a datum tool during the creation of another feature. Starting the datum tool automatically pauses the creation of the current feature, enabling you to create the required datum feature.
nl y
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Enable Plane Tag Display 4. Select the Model tab. 5. Click Extrude Datum . . and Axis Tag Display
8. Select the Properties tab, edit the Name to OFFSET, and click OK.
PT
Fo r
Datum
Creating each of these datum features after starting a feature tool defines them as embedded.
In
10. Press CTRL and select the top surface. 11. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to PIVOT, and click OK.
2012 PTC
te rn
al
.
Module 11 | Page 9
U se
nl y
.
12. With PIVOT still selected, click Datum . and select Plane
13. Press CTRL and select the top surface. 14. Edit the Rotation to either 25 or -25 to attain the proper direction. 15. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to ORIENT, and click OK. 16. With ORIENT still selected, click Datum . and select Plane
18. Edit the ORIENT reference from Offset to Normal. 19. Select the Display tab and click Flip as necessary to orient the magenta arrow, as shown. 20. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to SKETCH, and click OK. 21. In the Extrude dashboard, click Resume Feature .
Fo r
PT
24. Click Center and Point sketch the circle. 25. Edit the diameter to 32. 26. Click OK .
Module 11 | Page 10
In
te rn
and
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
27. In the dashboard, click Change and edit the Depth Direction depth to To Selected . 28. Click Datum Plane . and select
te rn
al
34. Expand Extrude 4 in the model tree. Notice the embedded datums. 36. Disable Plane Tag Display
PT
35. Right-click Extrude 4 and select Edit. Notice that dimensions from the feature and all embedded datums are displayed. and Axis Tag Display .
Fo r
2012 PTC
In
U se
.
Module 11 | Page 11
30. Click Resume Feature from the Extrude dashboard. Because datum plane DEPTH is still selected, it is automatically selected as the depth reference.
nl y
29. Press CTRL and select the two inner hole surfaces. Select the Properties tab, edit the name to DEPTH, and click OK.
Fo r
Module 11 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
12
U se O te rn al
Module 12 | Page 1
Extruded and revolved features comprise the majority of the features on the models that you create. However, there are occasions when extruded and revolved features cannot easily create the necessary geometry. In these instances, you may need to sketch more advanced geometry features. In this module, you learn how to create two advanced geometry features: the sweep feature and the blend feature.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create sweeps with open and closed trajectories. Analyze sweep feature attributes. Create blends by selecting parallel sections. Create blends by sketching sections. Analyze blend options.
In
nl y
In
Fo r
You can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep feature can also have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A sweep can add or remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. A sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section. If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweep features, the classic menu manager interface displays when redefining them.
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Sweeping an Open Sketch Along an Open Trajectory
al
U se
nl y
When selecting a trajectory, the following selection methods are available: Select a previously created external sketch. Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include additional adjacent edges as the trajectory, you can press SHIFT while selecting them. Select an intent chain. Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select
at the right end; however, this does not make the Sketch sketch internal to the sweep. Once the trajectory has been selected, you may decide that you do not want the trajectory to traverse the entire length of your selected sketch or geometry. You can drag the trajectory endpoint handles to lengthen or shorten the overall trajectory. If you press SHIFT while dragging you can snap the endpoints to entities such as vertices, datum planes, or edge endpoints. You can also directly specify a value. You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the location from which the section begins to sweep, and displays in the graphics window with a magenta arrow. You can click the arrow to toggle the start point to the opposite trajectory endpoint.
Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the section that is swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.
Fo r
A constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occurs: A trajectory crosses itself. You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory. A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small, relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.
2012 PTC
PT
The sketched section may be either open or closed. The swept protrusion in Figure 1 is a closed section, while the swept cut in Figure 2 is an open section.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 12 | Page 3
Sweep\Open-Trajectory_Solid Task 1:
3. Select the trajectory from the graphics window. 4. Click Create Section from the dashboard.
6. Click Palette from the Sketching group. 7. Select the Profiles tab and drag the T-profile in the graphics window to place it. Edit the Scaling factor to 0.5. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the midpoint of the top horizontal line.
Fo r
PT
Module 12 | Page 4
In
te rn
from
al
2012 PTC
U se
O
.
nl y
10. Click OK
. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
4. Select datum planes OFFSET and RIGHT as references, as well as the top surface and two vertices.
In
te rn
from the
al
Module 12 | Page 5
U se
Task 2:
nl y
6. Select Center and Point from the Circle types drop-down menu and sketch two circles that are tangent to the references. 7. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch two vertical lines. The first line should start at the top reference and snap tangent to the top circle. The second line should start at the bottom reference and snap tangent to the bottom circle.
8. Select Line Tangent from the Line types drop-down menu and create the tangent line. 9. Click Delete Segment trim the circle entities. 10. Click OK . 11. Orient to the Standard Orientation. and
Task 3:
Fo r
1. With the sketch still selected, select Sweep from the Sweep types drop-down menu in the Shapes group. 2. Click the magenta arrow to flip the start point to the bottom.
Module 12 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
4. Select Center and Ends from the Arc types drop-down menu and then sketch and dimension the arc. 5. Click OK . .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 12 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Fo r
You can create a sweep feature to create a constant cross-section feature that follows a trajectory curve. A sweep feature can also have a variable section, but this topic discusses the constant section only. A sweep can add or remove material. It can also be created as a thin feature or as a surface. A sweep feature consists of both a trajectory and a section. If your company has legacy data that contains Simple sweep features, the classic menu manager interface displays when redefining them.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 L Section Swept Along a Closed Trajectory and Trajectory Extruded
al
U se
nl y
Select individual curves or edges from existing geometry. To include additional adjacent edges as the trajectory, you can press SHIFT while selecting them. Select an intent chain. Within the Sweep dashboard, you can click Datum and select
at the right end; however, this does not make the Sketch sketch internal to the sweep. You must also select the start point for the section. The start point is the location from which the section begins to sweep, and displays in the graphics window with a magenta arrow. You can drag the start point along the closed loop, or you can press SHIFT to snap the start point to one of the entity endpoints.
Once the trajectory and start point have been defined, you must sketch the section that will be swept along the trajectory. The sketch plane for the section is placed perpendicular to the trajectory at the start point. The crosshairs seen in the sketching plane represent the intersection of the trajectory and sketch plane.
Fo r
A trajectory crosses itself. You align or dimension a section to fixed entities, but the orientation of the section changes when it is swept along the 3-D trajectory. A trajectory arc or spline radius is too small relative to the section, and the feature intersects itself while traversing around the arc.
2012 PTC
PT
A constant section sweep feature may fail if one of the following three situations occurs:
In
te rn
The sketched section may be either open or closed. If you try to sketch a solid open section, the system automatically toggles the feature creation to that of a surface. To create the type of solid feature shown in Figure 2, you can sweep the perimeter shape first and then extrude the trajectory sketch upward to fill in the middle.
al
U se
O
Module 12 | Page 9
nl y
Sweep\Closed-Trajectory_Solid Task 1:
5. Right-click in the graphics window and select Sketch. 6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . from the 7. Click Palette Sketching group.
Fo r
8. Select the Profiles tab and drag the T-profile into the graphics window to place it. Edit the Scaling factor to 0.5 and drag the Rotation handle to 180. Right-click the X Location handle and drag it to the midpoint of the bottom horizontal line.
9. Locate the section on the trajectory. 10. Click Accept Changes the dashboard. from
Module 12 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from the 2. Select Sweep Sweep types drop-down menu in the Shapes group.
11. Click OK
. .
1. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 2. In the graphics window, right-click and select Sketch. 3. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu and sketch the vertical line on the vertical reference. and 4. Click Delete Segment trim the left side of the sketch. 5. Click OK .
Fo r
PT
9. In the graphics window, right-click the depth handle and select To Selected. Select the green surface shown.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
. from the
Module 12 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Fo r
Module 12 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Merge Ends Enabled
Fo r
Merge Ends disabled Do not attach the sweep ends to the adjacent geometry. This is the default option, and is shown in Figure 1. Merge Ends enabled Merge the ends of the sweep into the adjacent solid. To do this, the sweep ends must touch the other solid geometry. The merged sweep ends are shown in Figure 2.
2012 PTC
al
Module 12 | Page 13
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient to the FRONT view. Notice that there is a gap between the ends of the curved tube and the top and bottom flat surfaces.
3. Edit the definition of Sweep 1. 4. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select the Merge ends check box.
Fo r
5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the gap between the curved tube and the top and bottom flat surfaces no longer appears.
Module 12 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
You create blend features when you need to create models that contain different transitional cross-sections. For example, a blend feature enables you to create geometry that starts as a circular cross-section, but then changes to a square cross-section as you transition along the length of the feature. Blend features can add or remove material.
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Blend with Twisting Due to Misaligned Start Points
al
U se
nl y
You can add a number of blend vertex points, each of which counts as an entity. For example, a blend vertex placed on a triangular section enables the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.
Consider the following regarding manipulating selected blend sections: By default, sections are blended together in the order of selection. However, you can always move sections up or down in the blend order. You can remove sections. The offset, or depth, between sections is based on the selected sections depth with respect to the other selected sections. You cannot specify a different depth. When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To set a given section as the active section, you can either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then changes color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section. In Figures 2 and 3, Section 2 is the active section.
Fo r
Module 12 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Blend\Select-Sections_Parallel_Solid Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Notice the three Sketch features in the graphics window.
Fo r
8. In the Sections tab, click Insert. 9. Select Sketch 2 as the third section. 10. Notice the blend is following the order of selection.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 17
3. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend .
al
U se
nl y
11. With Section 3 still selected, click Move Up in the Sections tab. 12. Notice that Section 3 is now reordered as #2 in the blend feature.
15. Select Sketch 2 as the second section. 16. Right-click in the graphics window and select Insert. 17. Select Section 3 as the third section.
Fo r
20. In the graphics window, select the #2 Section 2 leader note to activate the section.
21. Drag the start point to the upper-right vertex. 22. Click Preview Feature .
Module 12 | Page 18
PT
In
18. In the Sections tab, notice the # display for each blend section.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
13. With Section 3 still selected, click Remove in the Sections tab. Right-click Section 2 and select Remove.
nl y
24. Drag the Section 2 start point back to the upper-left vertex.
from
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 12 | Page 19
al
U se
26. In the model tree, select Sketch 1, press CTRL, and select Sketch 2 and Sketch 3.
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Projecting the Sections
al
U se
nl y
the system to blend to a square. The system essentially connects the points of each section to create the blend feature.
Consider the following regarding manipulating sketched blend sections: By default, sections are blended together in the order they are inserted. You cannot switch the order. You can remove sections. When defining a blend feature, only one section is considered the active section at any time. To set a given section as the active section, you can either select it from the Sections tab in the dashboard, or you can select the section leader note in the graphics window. The selected section then changes color, and all right-click options pertain to this active section.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Each section has its own start point. The start points should correspond between sections to avoid a twisting effect in the resulting blend feature. You can manage start points within each sketched section. In Figure 2, the start point in the sketch is at the upper-left corner.
U se
nl y
Module 12 | Page 21
Blend\Sketch-Sections_Solid Task 1:
3. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select Sketched sections, if necessary. Click Define. 4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Sketch. 5. Disable Plane Display 6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . .
Fo r
10. Click One-by-One , edit the horizontal dimension to 18, and edit the vertical dimension to 16. 11. Click OK .
12. Select the Sections tab. 13. Notice that you are now defining Section 2. 14. Notice that the default offset dimension is from Section 1. 15. Click Sketch.
Module 12 | Page 22
PT
9. Extend the rectangle up and to the right, and click again to place the rectangle.
In
7. Select Center Rectangle from the Rectangle types drop-down menu in the Sketching group.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the ribbon, click the Shapes group drop-down menu and select Blend .
17. Select the new section reference origin as the rectangle start point. 18. Extend the rectangle up and to the right, and click again to place the rectangle. 19. Click One-by-One , edit the horizontal dimension to 4, and edit the vertical dimension to 6. 20. Click OK .
22. Click Insert. 23. Notice that you are now creating Section 3. 24. Notice that the default offset dimension is from Section 2. 25. Select Section 1 from the Offset from drop-down list and edit the value to 26. 26. Click Sketch.
Fo r
30. Click One-by-One , edit the horizontal dimension to 12, and edit the vertical dimension to 10. .
31. Click OK
32. Notice the twist between the second and third section. 33. In the graphics window, select the #2 Section 2 leader note. 34. Drag the depth to approximately 16.
2012 PTC
PT
29. Extend the rectangle up and to the left, and click again to place the rectangle.
28. Select the new section reference origin as the rectangle start point.
In
te rn
.
Module 12 | Page 23
al
U se
nl y
35. In the graphics window, select the #3 Section 3 leader note. 36. Right-click and select Sketch. 37. Select the upper-left vertex, right-click, and select Start Point. 38. Click OK .
Task 2:
3. Click in the background to de-select all features. 4. Right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition.
Fo r
5. In the dashboard, select the Sections tab. Select Section 2. Select Reference. Select datum plane DTM2.
Module 12 | Page 24
PT
2. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. In the Sections tab, select Section 3. Select Reference. Select datum plane DTM3. 7. Disable Plane Display 8. Click Complete Feature . .
Task 3:
2. In the model tree, select Blend 2. 3. Notice this blend is inside of the newly resumed blend feature.
4. Right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition. 5. In the dashboard, click Remove Material . 6. Click Complete Feature
PT
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 12 | Page 25
al
U se
1. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
nl y
Fo r
When the sections of a Blend feature are projected, you can connect the sections by two methods: Smooth The blend sections are connected using smooth curves, as shown in Figure 2. This is the default option. Straight The blend sections are connected using straight lines, as shown in Figure 3.
Module 12 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Straight Blend Option Result
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Blend\Options_Solid Task 1:
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
.
Module 12 | Page 27
al
U se
nl y
5. In the model tree, right-click Blend 2 and select Edit Definition. 6. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Select Straight. 7. Click Complete Feature .
8. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume Last Set.
Fo r
Module 12 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
13
U se O te rn al
Module 13 | Page 1
In addition to creating features that begin with 2-D sketches and proceeding to solid features, you can also create features that are applied directly to a model. In this module, you learn how to create various types of holes on a model, how to shell a model, and how to apply basic draft to features.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create coaxial, linear, radial, and diameter holes, as well as understand the different depth options available. Understand the different hole profile options. Create shell features. Create draft features. Create basic split drafts. Analyze draft hinges and pull direction.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Blind (Variable) This is the default depth option. You can edit this depth value by dragging the drag handle, editing the dimension on the model, or using the dashboard. Symmetric The hole bores equally on both sides of the placement plane. You can edit the total depth at which the hole bores, in the same way you can with the Blind depth option. The Symmetric depth is actually a Blind Symmetric depth. To Next This option ensures that the hole depth stops at the next surface encountered. A depth dimension is not required, as the next surface controls the hole depth. Through Until This option ensures that the hole stops at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the hole depth. Note that the hole must pass through the selected surface. To Selected This option ensures that the hole stops at the selected surface. A depth dimension is not required, as the selected surface controls the hole depth. Unlike the Through Until depth option, the hole does not have to pass through the selected surface. Through All This option causes the hole to drill through the entire model. A depth dimension is not required, as the model itself controls the hole depth. Side 1/Side 2 You can independently control the hole depth on each side of the placement plane. By default, the hole drills on Side 1; however, you can opt to drill the hole on Side 2 as well. Any of the previous hole depth options, except Symmetric, can be used for either side.
Module 13 | Page 2
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
When you create a hole, the depth at which the hole drills into a model can be set in a variety of ways depending upon the design intent you wish to capture. You can specify the desired depth option using the Hole dashboard or by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window. Hole depth options include:
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
The To Next and Through All options only consider geometry which is currently present (in the feature order) when the hole is created. Features you create after the hole is created do not impact the depth of the hole. You can also switch depth options by right-clicking the drag handle in the graphics window.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 13 | Page 3
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of BLIND_1. 3. Edit the depth value to 0.5. 4. Click Complete Feature .
5. Edit the definition of BLIND_2. 6. Edit the depth value to 2.25. 7. Click Complete Feature .
PT
Fo r
11. Edit the definition of TO_SELECTED. 12. Edit the depth to To Selected and select the surface. 13. Click Complete Feature .
Module 13 | Page 4
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
14. Edit the definition of THRU_ALL. 15. Edit the depth to Through All . 16. Click Complete Feature .
20. Edit the depth to Through All . 21. In the dashboard, select the Shape tab and edit the Side 2 depth to Through All . 22. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
24. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume All to resume the suppressed feature CUT and view the holes.
In
te rn
.
al
Module 13 | Page 5
U se
18. Edit the definition of SYMMETRIC. Notice the hole placement plane is a floating datum plane.
nl y
Fo r
When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting placement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece of geometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, you either select additional placement references or offset references to further dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as the placement reference determines the type of hole being created.
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Coaxial Holes
U se
nl y
Create two coaxial holes in the model: one Through All and the other of Blind depth.
1. Enable only the following Datum 2. From the Engineering group, . click Hole 3. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_1 and the front surface. 4. Edit the diameter to 1. 5. Edit the depth to Through All . 6. Click Complete Feature 7. Click Hole . .
8. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and the front surface.
10. Edit the diameter to 1.5. 11. Edit the depth value to 0.25.
Fo r
PT
9. From the Hole dashboard, select the Placement tab. Notice that your selected references are added to the collector.
In
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 13 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Display types:
In
Fo r
When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting placement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece of geometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, you either select additional placement references or offset references to further dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as the placement reference determines the type of hole being created.
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Completed Hole
al
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
te rn
.
6. Edit the offset values to 3.5 from the top surface and 3.0 from datum plane DTM1.
al
Module 13 | Page 9
5. Press CTRL and select the top surface and datum plane DTM1.
U se
nl y
9. Click Hole
14. Edit the hole diameter to 1.50 and the depth value to 2.
Fo r
PT
13. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. In the Offset References collector, select Align from the DTM1 drop-down list. Edit the offset value to 3.5 from the top surface.
Module 13 | Page 10
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
12. Press CTRL and select the top surface and datum plane DTM1.
nl y
In
te rn
Hole Creation Theory
Fo r
When creating hole features on a model, you locate holes by selecting placement (primary) and offset (secondary) references. The first piece of geometry selected to place the hole is the placement reference. Next, you either select additional placement references or offset references to further dimensionally constrain the hole feature. The type of geometry selected as the placement reference determines the type of hole being created.
PT
al
U se
Figure 2 Cylindrical Surface Radial Hole Figure 4 Planar Surface Radial Hole
nl y
counterclockwise. To flip the hole to the same angle on the opposite side of the datum plane, you can simply specify a negative value. Two offset references are then selected from which to dimension the hole. You can select references directly from the model or you can drag the green reference handles to the desired reference. The first offset reference is a planar reference from which to offset the hole, and the second is a planar reference to determine the angle. In Figure 2, the offset references are the front surface of the model and the datum plane.
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
Hole\Radial_Diameter Task 1:
4. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 5. Press CTRL and select datum plane TOP and the front surface. 6. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the offset angle to 45 from datum plane TOP. Edit the offset axial value to 0.40 from the front surface. 7. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the . hole depth to To Next
In
9. Click Hole
PT
Fo r
11. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 12. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane TOP.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 13 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
13. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the hole Type from Linear to Radial. Edit the radius to 0.5 from datum axis A_2. Edit the angle to either 65 or -65 to attain the proper direction above datum plane TOP. 14. Edit the diameter to 0.40 and the . hole depth to To Next 15. Click Complete Feature 16. Click Hole . .
18. Right-click and select Offset References Collector. 19. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2 and datum plane RIGHT. 20. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the hole Type from Linear to Diameter. Edit the diameter to 1.5 from datum axis A_2. Edit the angle to either 60 or -60 to attain the proper direction from datum plane RIGHT. 21. Edit the hole diameter to 0.50 and the hole depth to Through . All 22. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
te rn Fo r
Figure 2 Drill Point Dimensioning Schemes
PT
In
al
Figure 1 Hole Profile Options Figure 3 The Shape Tab
U se
nl y
Lightweight hole display Creates a hole that displays as a ring on the placement surface. Toggling a hole feature to lightweight hole display affects the model's mass properties.
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
Edit hole diameter and depth. Edit drill tip angle. Edit counterbore diameter and depth. Edit countersink diameter and angle. Enable an exit countersink on a Through All hole.
al
2012 PTC
U se
At any time during the hole creation process, you can select the Shape tab from the dashboard to view the hole profile you are creating. This hole profile image updates automatically as you modify hole profile options, enabling you to preview the final result. Within the Shape tab, you can perform the following operations:
nl y
8. Edit the definition of HOLE_3. 9. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole . Profile Select the Shape tab to view the profile. Click Counterbore 10. Click Complete Feature . .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole . Profile Select the Shape tab to view the profile. . .
te rn
Module 13 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
11. Edit the definition of HOLE_4. 12. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole . Profile Select the Shape tab to view the profile. . Click Countersink Edit the hole depth to Through . All Select the Exit Countersink check box. 13. Click Complete Feature .
15. Edit the definition of HOLE_2. 16. In the dashboard, click Rectangle Hole Profile Click Lightweight Hole 17. Click Complete Feature .
PT
In
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 18
te rn
. .
al
2012 PTC
U se
14. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume All to resume the EXTRUDE_CUT feature and compare holes.
nl y
In
te rn
Figure 3 Hollowed Out Model
Module 13 | Page 19
Fo r
Select Surfaces for Removal Select the surface(s) you want to remove from the model. You may decide not to remove surfaces from the shell, which results in the creation of a closed shell. A closed shell is an entirely hollowed out part. Thickness Specify the thickness of the model walls that remain. You create shells in the design process to support your design intent. However, be aware that several features could reference a shell created early in the design process.
Shells can be created using the Lead or Follow workflow. You can use drag handles or the dashboard to modify the thickness of the shell feature. in the dashboard is equivalent Clicking Change Thickness Direction to specifying a negative shell value.
2012 PTC
PT
Shell features remove surfaces to hollow out a design model, leaving walls with specified thickness values. There are two parts to the creation of a basic shell feature:
al
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. From the Engineering group, 3. Click Complete Feature create a hollow shell. to
4. Edit the definition of Shell 1. 5. Select the top surface to remove it. 6. Edit the thickness to 20. 7. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 20
PT
9. Press CTRL and select the left and right surfaces to remove them. .
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
click Shell
Fo r
PT
In
Figure 2 Same Model, Same Draft Angle, and Different Draft Hinges
te rn
al
U se
nl y
the draft angle direction, and the draft angle is measured normal to this reference. You can select a datum plane, planar model surface, linear reference such as an edge or two points, or a coordinate system axis. The mold opening, or pull direction, is usually normal to this plane. Draft angle Values range from -30 degrees to +30 degrees. When you specify the draft angle, you can reverse the direction from which material is added or removed by typing a negative value, clicking Reverse Angle in the dashboard, or right-clicking the angle drag handle and selecting Flip Angle. You can also toggle the different collectors for draft surfaces, draft hinges, and pull direction by right-clicking in the graphics window.
Best Practices
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
If possible, create draft features as some of the last features of your model.
nl y
Fo r
8. In the dashboard, click in the Draft hinges collector and select datum plane DTM2. Edit the draft angle to -10. 9. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
. .
Module 13 | Page 23
4. In the dashboard, select the References tab. Click in the Draft hinges collector and select the top cylinder surface. Edit the draft angle to 10.
al
U se
2. In the ribbon, select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
nl y
11. Press CTRL and select the four vertical surfaces to draft. 12. Right-click and select Draft Hinges. 13. Select the top surface of the main protrusion. 14. Edit the draft angle to -10. 15. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
16. Orient to the FRONT view and compare the differences in the results of the rectangular protrusions.
nl y
In
Fo r
You can create draft features with or without split. Splitting a draft enables you to apply different draft angles to different portions of a surface.
Side Options
Once you split the draft, there are four different options available to control how the draft is handled on either side of the split: Draft sides independently Enables you to specify two independent draft angles for each side of the drafted surface. If you use this option, the system adds a second draft angle to the dashboard. In Figure 1, both sides are drafted independently with different draft angles.
2012 PTC Module 13 | Page 25
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Drafting First Side Only
al
U se
nl y
Draft sides dependently Enables you to specify a single draft angle, with the second side drafted in the opposite direction at the same draft angle. In Figure 2, both sides are drafted dependently. Draft first side only Drafts only the first side of the surface, with the second side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position. In Figure 3, only the first side is drafted. Draft second side only Drafts only the second side of the surface, with the first side remaining in the neutral, undrafted position.
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
6. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Edit the Split option to Split by draft hinge. Select Side option Draft sides independently.
9. Edit the definition of Draft 3. 10. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Edit the Split option to Split by draft hinge. Select Side option Draft sides dependently. 11. Click Complete Feature This completes the procedure. .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
.
Module 13 | Page 27
al
U se
3. In the dashboard, select the Split tab. Edit the Split option to Split by draft hinge. Select Side option Draft first side only.
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 3 Pull Direction Reversed
al
U se
nl y
Draft\Hinge-Direction Task 1:
PT
In
7. Select the large, angled surface on which the small rectangle lies.
Fo r
10. In the dashboard, select the References tab. 11. Notice the Draft surface, Draft hinge, and Pull direction. The Draft hinge and Pull direction are the same surface.
2012 PTC
te rn
and
Module 13 | Page 29
al
U se
4. Press SHIFT and select the top edge of the small rectangle.
nl y
2. In the ribbon, select Draft from the Draft types drop-down menu.
12. Enable Plane Display 13. Right-click and select Pull Direction. 14. Select datum plane TOP. 15. Disable Plane Display
PT
Fo r
Module 13 | Page 30
In
te rn
again.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
14
U se O te rn al
Module 14 | Page 1
Once you have created the bulk of your part model, you can further refine it by adding finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In this module, you learn how to create rounds and chamfers.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create rounds by selecting edges, a surface and an edge, and two surfaces. Create full rounds. Create round sets. Create chamfers by selecting edges and understand the different chamfer dimensioning schemes. Create chamfer sets.
In
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 2
te rn
Figure 3 Completed Rounds
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
You can create rounds by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Each edge that you select is rounded. If you select an edge that has adjacent tangent edges, the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges by default. The rounds are constructed tangent to the surfaces adjacent to the selected edges. In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for rounding are highlighted on the left. The resulting rounds are shown on the right. Note that because the edges in Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the round feature is automatically created on the tangent edges.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Rounds Created by Selecting Two Edges
al
Module 14 | Page 3
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Fo r
1. Click Open , select ROUND_EDGE_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
3. Press CTRL and select the two edges. 4. Edit the radius value to .25. 5. Click Complete Feature .
Module 14 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
6. Notice that the left round adds material, while the right round removes material.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
6. Notice that the left round adds material, while the right round removes material. 7. Also notice that although only two edges were selected, all edges tangent to the selected edges were rounded.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 14 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Fo r
You can create rounds by selecting a surface first and then an edge. These round features are constructed tangent to the selected surface and pass through the selected edge. If the selected edge has adjacent tangent edges, the round automatically propagates around those tangent edges by default. In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces and edges selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting rounds are shown on the right.
Module 14 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Round Created by Selecting a Surface and Edge
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Round\Surface-Edge Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge. 4. Edit the radius value to 2. 5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round adds material.
6. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
Fo r
Task 2:
3. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge. 4. Edit the radius value to 0.60. 5. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
9. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round removes material. Create tangent rounds on an oval block.
In
te rn
al
Module 14 | Page 7
U se
nl y
6. Notice that the round adds material. Also notice that although only one edge was selected, the round follows all edges tangent to the selected edge.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
You can create rounds by selecting two surfaces. The rounds are constructed tangent to the selected surfaces. If the selected references have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automatically propagates around that geometry by default. For rounds created by selecting two surfaces, the system creates the round between the selected surfaces; therefore, it has the ability to span gaps or engulf existing geometry. In addition, rounds created by selecting two surfaces can also provide more robust round geometry in cases where rounds created by selecting edges may fail or create undesired geometry. In Figures 1 and 2, the surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting rounds are shown on the right.
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Round That Engulfs Existing Geometry
al
U se
nl y
Round\Surface-Surface Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces. 4. Edit the radius value to 3. 5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round spans the gap. 6. Edit the definition of Round 1.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Click Open , select SURF-SURF_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
3. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces. 4. Edit the radius value to 4. 5. Click Complete Feature .
Module 14 | Page 10
PT
8. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round no longer spans the gap.
In
7. In the dashboard, select the Pieces tab. Edit Piece 2 to be Excluded in the drop-down list.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
Full rounds replace a surface with a round that is tangent to the surface it replaces. You can create full rounds either by selecting a pair of edges or a pair of surfaces. If a pair of edges is selected, the system initially creates individual rounds on each edge, and can be quickly converted to a full round either from the dashboard or by right-clicking. If a pair of surfaces is selected, a third surface must also be selected as the surface to remove with the creation of the round. In either case, the full round is constructed with a rounding surface forming a tangent connection between the selected references. If the selected references have adjacent tangent geometry, the round automatically propagates around that geometry. In Figure 1, the full round was created by selection of two edges. The edges selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is shown on the right. This round is removing material. In Figure 2, the full round was created by selecting three surfaces. The surfaces selected are highlighted on the left, and the resulting round is shown on the right. This round is adding material.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round removes material. 6. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Click Open , select ROUND_FULL_2.PRT, and click Open. 2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
2012 PTC
PT
9. Click Complete Feature . Notice that the round adds material. Create rounds on a block by selecting surfaces.
8. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab and click Full round.
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
4. Press CTRL and select the bottom cut surface. 5. Click Complete Feature .
6. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 7. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
Round sets are important for two reasons: 1. Simplification Round sets enable you to decrease the number of features in the model tree. 2. Transitions Round sets enable you to manually specify the appearance of the transitional surface where the round sets intersect.
2012 PTC
PT
In Figure 1, all three rounds are created within the same round feature. Each round is from a different set. The round in the left image was created by selecting an edge. The round in the middle image was created by selecting a surface and edge. The round on the right is a full round. Notice that the rounds have different radius values.
In
Round features can contain multiple sets of references within a single round feature. When references for a round are selected, they can be selected as part of the same set, or in additional sets. Each round set can have different radius values. Each set may have also been created differently, such as a full round versus a round created by selecting surfaces. You can add new sets to a round using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, or simply by selecting a new reference on the model. When you create a new round set, you can view the rounds from the other sets in the same feature in their previewed state.
te rn
al
U se
O
Module 14 | Page 15
nl y
4. Edit the radius value to 2. 5. Right-click and select Add set. Notice that the first round remains previewed. 6. Press CTRL and select the surface and edge. 7. Edit the radius value to 6.5.
Fo r
8. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Click *New set. Notice that the previous two rounds are still previewed. Press CTRL and select the two edges. 9. Click Full round from the dashboard.
10. In the Sets tab, select Set 2. 11. Edit the Radius value from 6.5 to 5.
Module 14 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
13. Notice the single round feature created in the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Similar to round features, chamfers add or remove material by creating a beveled surface between adjacent surfaces and edges selected as references. You can create chamfers by selecting an edge or a combination of edges. Each edge that you select is chamfered. Similar to rounds, if the selected edge for chamfering has adjacent tangent edges, the chamfer automatically propagates around those tangent edges by default. In Figures 1 and 2, the edges selected for chamfering are highlighted on the left. The resulting chamfers are shown on the right. Note that because the edges in Figure 2 are tangent to other edges, the chamfer feature is automatically created on the tangent edges.
Module 14 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Chamfers Created by Selecting Two Edges
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Fo r
2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Select the edge. 4. Drag the D value to 3. 5. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 19
6. Notice that the left chamfer adds material, while the right chamfer removes material.
al
U se
nl y
2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
6. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu. 7. Select the edge. 8. Edit the D value to 1. 9. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
11. Also notice that although only two edges were selected, all edges tangent to the selected edges were chamfered.
10. Notice that the inner chamfer adds material, while the outer chamfer removes material.
nl y
There are several different dimensioning schemes available when creating chamfers: D x D Size of chamfer is defined by one dimension, as shown by the upper-right chamfer in Figure 1. D1 x D2 Size of chamfer is defined by two dimensions, as shown by the upper-left chamfer in Figure 1. Angle x D Size of chamfer is defined by a linear and angular dimension, as shown by the lower-left chamfer in Figure 1. 45 x D Size of chamfer is defined by a linear dimension at a 45 degree angle, as shown by the lower-right chamfer in Figure 1. This type is only valid for perpendicular surfaces. You can edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme either by using the dashboard or by right-clicking in the graphics window and then selecting the new scheme.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Figure 1 Four Different Chamfer Dimensioning Schemes with the Same Geometry
al
Module 14 | Page 21
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group. 3. Select the edge. 4. Drag the D value to 7. 5. Click Complete Feature .
PT
Fo r
12. Select the edge. 13. In the dashboard, edit the dimensioning scheme to Angle x D. 14. Edit the Angle value to 45 and the D value to 7.
Module 14 | Page 22
In
te rn
. . . .
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
18. In the dashboard, edit the dimensioning scheme to 45 x D. 19. Edit the D value to 7. 20. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 23
al
22. Press CTRL, select all four Chamfer features, right-click, and select Edit. Notice that all four chamfers are the same geometry, but contain different dimensioning schemes.
U se
nl y
Fo r
In Figure 1, all three chamfers are created within the same chamfer feature but with different dimensioning schemes. Each chamfer is from a different set. The D x D chamfer in the left image was created by selecting an edge. In the middle image, the Angle x D chamfer was created by selecting an edge. The D1 x D2 chamfer on the right was created by selecting a different edge. Notice that the chamfers are different D values. Chamfer sets are important for two reasons: 1. 2. Simplification Chamfer sets enable you to decrease the number of features in the model tree. Transitions Chamfer sets enable you to manually specify the appearance of the transitional surface where the chamfer sets intersect.
PT
Chamfer features can contain multiple sets of references within a single chamfer feature. When references for a chamfer are selected, they can be selected as part of the same set, or in additional sets. Each chamfer set can have different D values. Sets can also be created with different dimensioning schemes, for example, a D x D chamfer versus an Angle x D chamfer. You can add new sets to a chamfer using the dashboard, by right-clicking in the graphics window, or simply by selecting a new reference on the model. When you create a new chamfer set, you can view the chamfers from the other sets in the same feature in their previewed state.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
8. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab. Click *New set. Notice that the previous two chamfers are still previewed. Select the edge. Edit the chamfer dimensioning scheme to D1 x D2. Edit the D1 value to 3 and the D2 value to 1.75.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 14 | Page 25
al
5. Select the next edge. Notice that the first chamfer remains previewed.
U se
nl y
2. Select Edge Chamfer from the Chamfer types drop-down menu in the Engineering group.
Fo r
Module 14 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
15
U se O te rn al
Module 15 | Page 1
Project I
Module Overview
Using Creo Parametric and the skills learned thus far in this course, complete the following project design tasks.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create the PISTON_PIN.PRT, PISTON.PRT, CONNECTING_ROD.PRT, CRANKSHAFT.PRT, ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT, IMPELLER.PRT, FRAME.PRT, and BOLT.PRT models.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Project Scenario
Fo r
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned thus far in the course, instructions for each project step are minimal. Detailed picks and clicks are not provided. This enables you to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed through the project.
Be sure to save all project models within the Intro-1_working sub-folder of the Projects lab files folder structure. The Projects folder also contains a sub-folder named Intro-1_completed. Here you can find a completed version of each model in the project. These completed models can be used as references, if required.
Module 15 | Page 2
PT
Minimal Instructions
In
Upon returning from Creo Parametric training, you are assigned to create the AC-40 Air Circulator.
te rn
ACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, and defense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number of products, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. You work for the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has recently started using Creo Parametric for its product designs.
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Figure 1 PISTON_PIN.PRT
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
These figures illustrate the piston pin, piston, and connecting rod components you create in the beginning of this project.
In
te rn
al
Module 15 | Page 3
U se
Figure 2 PISTON.PRT
nl y
Figure 1 CRANKSHAFT.PRT
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 IMPELLER.PRT Figure 4 IMPELLER_ HOUSING.PRT
Creating the Crankshaft, Engine Block, Impeller, and Impeller Housing Components
These figures illustrate the crankshaft, engine block, impeller, and impeller housing components you create in this project. These models are slightly more complicated than the previously created piston assembly components. You complete the crankshaft model in this project, but the engine block, impeller, and impeller housing are completed in a subsequent project.
Module 15 | Page 4
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Figure 1 FRAME.PRT
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
These figures illustrate the frame and bolt components you create in this project. The frame is completed in a subsequent project.
al
U se
Figure 2 BOLT.PRT
O
Module 15 | Page 5
nl y
Fo r
Module 15 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
16
U se O te rn al
Module 16 | Page 1
Creo Parametric offers many tools to duplicate features and parts to increase efficiency. In this module, you learn how to create local groups of features. You also learn how to use the Copy tool to create a single instance of multiple features or groups. Finally, you learn how to use the Mirror tool to mirror features and parts to create symmetrical models.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create local groups. Copy and paste features, as well as move and rotate those copied features. Mirror selected features, all features, and parts.
In
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Selecting All Grouped Entities as One
al
U se
nl y
You can select all features within the local group as one. When editing, you can view the dimensions of all features in the local group at one time. You can use local groups to organize or collapse the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 16 | Page 3
U se
nl y
Feature_Operations\Local_Groups Task 1:
3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Expand Group LOCAL_GROUP in the model tree. Notice both features in the group.
5. Right-click Group LOCAL_GROUP and select Ungroup. 6. Press CTRL and select Extrude 2, Hole 1, Hole 2, and Round 1. 7. Right-click and select Group. 8. Right-click and select Edit. Notice that the dimensions from all features in the group display.
Fo r
11. Right-click and select Select Group. Notice all features in the group are selected.
Module 16 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
12. In the model tree, expand Group LOCAL_GROUP and expand feature Hole 2. Notice the embedded datum axis A_2. 13. Right-click Hole 2 and select Delete. In the Delete dialog box, ensure that the Keep embedded datum features check box is selected. Click OK to delete the hole but keep the datum axis. 14. Enable Axis Display the axis remains. . Notice
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 16 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Copying and Pasting an Extrude
al
U se
nl y
In the lower figures, an extrude feature is copied and pasted. You must specify a new sketch and reference plane and enter Sketcher mode. The system places the copied sketch on the cursor, as shown in Figure 2, and you can drop it into location and edit dimensions appropriately. The copied extrude feature maintains feature type, options, and depth. You can also copy and paste rounds. When doing so, the round reference types, size, and options are maintained. You must select new corresponding references.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 16 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Feature_Operations\Copy_Paste Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Hole 1 and click Copy from the Operations group.
3. Select Paste from the Paste types drop-down menu in the Operations group. 4. Select the approximate hole location on the front surface.
Fo r
PT
7. Edit the offset from the top surface to 1.5 and edit the offset from the right surface to 3.
Module 16 | Page 8
In
te rn
from
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
3. Right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch. 4. Select the right surface as the Sketch Plane. 5. In the Sketch dialog box, edit the Orientation to Bottom and click Sketch. 6. The sketch attaches to your cursor. Select the approximate placement. 7. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar. 8. Edit the dimensions. from the
Fo r
10. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 11. Click Complete Feature the Extrude dashboard. from
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 16 | Page 9
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
al
U se
nl y
and rotate it about an axis, as shown in Figure 3. Or you may choose to move the feature in one direction and then move it further in another direction.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 11
al
U se
Break the dependence of one of the copied feature dimensions by selecting the dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Make Dim Indep. All other aspects of the copied feature remain dependent on the original. Break the dependence of the copied feature section by selecting the copied feature, right-clicking, and selecting Make Sec Indep. The copied feature depth is still dependent on the original.
nl y
There are two different ways you can edit the dependency of a dependently copied feature:
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Extrude 2. 3. Click Copy from the Operations group.
Special group.
Fo r
9. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent on dimensions of originals check box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box, and click OK.
10. In the dashboard, click Rotate . 11. Select datum axis AXIS and edit the offset angle to 45. 12. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from
Module 16 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
and select Paste
from
al
2012 PTC
U se
5. In the Paste Special dialog box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box and click OK.
from the Paste types drop-down menu 4. Select Paste Special in the Operations group.
nl y
13. With Moved Copy 2 still selected, click Copy Special group.
14. In the Paste Special dialog box, clear the Make copies dependent on dimensions of originals check box, select the Apply Move/Rotate transformations to copies check box, and click OK. 15. Select datum plane RIGHT and edit the offset to 1. 16. In the dashboard, select the Transformations tab and click New Move. 17. Edit the move type to Rotate, select datum axis AXIS, and edit the offset angle to 45. 18. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. Task 2: from
1. Select Extrude 2, right-click, and select Edit. 2. Edit the feature height from 1 to 2 and click in the background twice to de-select all features.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 13
al
Edit the dimensions and dependency of the moved and rotated features.
U se
nl y
3. Expand Moved Copy 1 and select Extrude 2 (2). 4. Right-click and select Edit. 5. Select the 1 width value, right-click, and select Make Dim Indep. 6. In the Confirmation dialog box, click Yes to make an independent dimension.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
9. Edit the feature width from 1 to 1.5 and click in the background twice to de-select all features.
nl y
You can mirror selected features or a group of features about a plane. The mirrored features can be independent of the original features or dependent upon them. In the example shown, there are three oval protrusions in a group, as shown in the left image of Figure 1. The group is selected and mirrored dependently about datum plane RIGHT, as shown in the right image of Figure 1. Next, the original group and the mirrored group are selected, and both are mirrored about datum plane FRONT independently, as shown in the right image of Figure 2. Because this second mirror was performed independently, the original geometry height can be modified and only the dependently mirrored geometry height updates.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 16 | Page 15
U se
nl y
Feature_Operations\Mirror_Features MIRROR_SEL_FEATURES.PRT Task 1: Mirror selected features and edit the extrude height.
1. Enable only the following Datum 2. Press CTRL and select Extrude 2, Moved Copy 1, and Moved Copy 2. 3. Click Mirror group. from the Editing
4. Select datum plane RIGHT. 5. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and notice the mirror is dependent. 6. Click Complete Feature the dashboard.
Fo r
10. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and clear the Dependent Copy check box. 11. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from
Module 16 | Page 16
PT
8. Click Mirror
7. With the mirror feature still selected, press CTRL and also select Extrude 2, Moved Copy 1, and Moved Copy 2. .
In
te rn
from
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Display types:
12. In the model tree, right-click Extrude 2 and select Edit. 13. Edit the height from 1 to 2. 14. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
To mirror all features, you simply select the part node from the model tree (the name of the model at the top of the tree) and then mirror all the features in the model at one time. This enables you to create one half of a model and then mirror it to complete the entire part. A single mirror feature is created, which is dependent on the original side of the model.
Fo r
The mirror feature mirrors all features that come before it in the model tree. Features that change on the original side of the model update on the mirror side. Features inserted before the mirror feature are mirrored to the opposite side. Features created after the mirror are not mirrored. When you mirror all features, this includes all datum planes. The resulting mirrored datum planes retain the same name as their originals, except that the mirrored datum planes have an "_1" suffix added to their names and tags. For example, if you mirror all features, which includes datum plane TOP, the corresponding mirrored datum plane name is TOP_1.
Module 16 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Feature_Operations\Mirror_All Task 1:
3. Expand the Mirror 1 feature. Notice it contains a hole and extrude feature.
Fo r
10. In the model tree, select Extrude 3. 11. Edit the width from 35 to 40. 12. Click in the background twice to de-select all features. Notice that all four hole and extrude features have updated.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
from
Module 16 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
and
from the 14. Select Round Round types drop-down menu and select the right vertical edge. 15. Edit the radius to 8 and click Complete Feature from the dashboard.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
te rn
Mirror geometry only Mirrors geometry without the structure of the original part. The model tree contains one mirrored feature in the resulting mirrored part.
Fo r
Mirror geometry with features Mirrors geometry with the original part feature structure. The geometry of the resulting mirrored part is not dependent on the geometry of the original model.
When creating a new mirrored part, you must specify the part name for the new part. If you mirror a part using the Mirror geometry only type, you must
2012 PTC Module 16 | Page 21
PT
You can create a mirrored copy of a part directly within Creo Parametric. There are two different types of mirrored parts that can be created:
In
al
Figure 2 Mirrored Part
U se
nl y
also specify whether the resulting mirrored part is dependent on the original or not. This option is only available for the Mirror geometry only mirror type. You can also preview the mirrored part before it is actually created. You can also mirror an entire assembly by clicking File > Save As > Save a Mirror Assembly.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
5. In the Mirror part dialog box, check select the Preview box.
2012 PTC
PT
4. In the Mirror part dialog box, accept the defaults for Mirror type and Dependency control, and type MIRROR_PART_LH as the New Name.
In
te rn
Module 16 | Page 23
al
U se
nl y
2. Notice that the part is asymmetric. You need to create a part which is equivalent to the left part.
6. Click OK in the Mirror part dialog box. Notice that the system determines the mirror plane, as you were not prompted for it. 7. Spin the new model, as shown. 8. Arrange the two Creo Parametric windows on your desktop to compare parts.
Fo r
Module 16 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
17
U se O te rn al
Module 17 | Page 1
Creating Patterns
Module Overview
Patterning features and components is yet another way to quickly duplicate features to increase efficiency. In this module, you learn how to pattern features linearly and angularly, and how to increment dimensions while patterning. You also learn how to Reference pattern features and components. Finally, you learn how to delete patterns and pattern members.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Direction Pattern in the First and Second Directions. Direction Pattern with multiple direction types. Axis Pattern in the First and Second Directions. Create Reference patterns of features and components. Delete patterns and pattern members.
In
nl y
The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or pattern leader. The pattern leader is always the first member in an expanded pattern feature in the model tree. In the graphics window, the pattern leader's instance dot border is always bolder than the other pattern members, as shown in Figure 1. In Figure 2, the width of the pattern leader has been modified between the images third from the left and fourth from the left. Consequently, all pattern members' widths have been updated as well.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
edge, or axis, the pattern extends along the reference. You can also toggle the direction in which the pattern extends by 180 degrees. In the figures, the first direction reference specified is the datum plane. Specify the number of pattern members in the first direction Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the model in the left-most image has four pattern members, while the model in the image second from the left has six pattern members. Specify the increment in the first direction The increment is the spacing between pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Specify the increment value In Figure 2, the extrude feature height was incremented by 0.5. Consequently, each pattern member's height increases 0.5 over the previous pattern member.
U se
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
nl y
Module 17 | Page 3
Pattern\Direction_First Task 1:
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Select Extrude 2 and select Pattern from the Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 3. In the dashboard, edit the pattern type to Direction. 4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Flip First Direction from the Pattern dashboard. 5. Edit the number of members to 4 and edit the spacing to 2. You can also drag the increment handle to edit the increment. 6. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard.
Fo r
8. Edit the number of patterned extrudes from 4 to 6. 9. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.
Module 17 | Page 4
PT
7. With the Pattern feature still selected, right-click and select Edit.
In
te rn
from
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 11. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Select the 1 height dimension and edit the increment to 0.5.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 17 | Page 5
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Direction Pattern, Two Directions, Two Additional Dimensions
al
U se
nl y
Specify the number of pattern members in the First and Second Directions Type the number of members in either the dashboard or the graphics window. The number of pattern members can be different for each direction. The number of pattern members includes the pattern leader. In the figures, the first direction has four pattern members, while the second direction has five pattern members. Specify the increment in the First and Second Directions The increment is the spacing between pattern members. You can edit the increment in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. Again, the increment can be different between the first and second directions. In the figures, the first direction increment is 2.5, while the second direction increment is 2.
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time to create a 'varying' pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions: Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The dimension selected can be different for each direction. Note also that you can select multiple dimensions for each direction if desired. Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In Figure 3, the extrude feature width was incremented by -0.2 in the first direction, and the extrude feature height was incremented by 0.5 in the second direction. Consequently, each pattern member's width decreases by 0.20 in the first direction and the height increases by 0.5 in the second direction over the previous pattern member.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 17 | Page 7
Pattern\Direction_Second Task 1:
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: . 2. Press CTRL, and select Extrude 2 and Round 1. 3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Rename the group to OVAL. 5. Select Group OVAL and select from the Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 6. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Direction.
9. In the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Reference collector. Select datum plane FRONT as the second direction reference. Click Flip Second Direction . Edit the second direction number of members to 5 and edit the second direction spacing to 2.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 8
PT
8. In the dashboard, edit the number of members to 4 and edit the spacing to 2.50.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from
13. In the Dimensions tab of the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Dimension collector. 14. Select the 1 extrude height dimension and edit the increment to 0.50.
Fo r
PT
In
2012 PTC
te rn
.
al
Module 17 | Page 9
12. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Select the 2 extrude width dimension and edit the increment to -0.20. Press CTRL and select the R0.1 radius dimension and edit the increment to 0.075.
U se
nl y
16. In the model tree, expand the pattern feature. 17. Select the pattern leader, right-click, and select Edit. 18. Edit the width from 1 to 0.75. 19. Click in the background twice to de-select all features.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or pattern leader.
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Specify the angular spacing Specified in degrees, you can edit the angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating axis patterns: Set Angular Extent This option automatically spaces the pattern members equally about the axis reference. You can also select values of 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or type in the desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extent value supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extent has been set to 360 degrees. Member orientation Determines how the pattern members are to be oriented about the axis reference. With the Follow axis rotation check box selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that the relationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 12
PT
Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. Specify the increment value In Figure 2, the extrude feature length was incremented by 0.3 in the right-most image. Consequently, each pattern member's length increases by 0.3 over the previous pattern member.
In
te rn
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first direction at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first direction:
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Select Extrude 2 and select Pattern from the Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 3. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Axis. 4. Select datum axis AXIS. 5. Edit the number of members to 6 and edit the angle increment to 45. 6. In the dashboard, click Set Angular Extent .
Fo r
8. Edit the Angular Extent value back to 360. 9. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard. from
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 17 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
10. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Clear the Follow axis rotation check box. 12. Click Complete Feature .
13. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of Extrude 2. 14. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Select the 2 length dimension and edit the increment to 0.3.
Fo r
16. Edit the definition of Pattern 1. 17. In the dashboard, click Flip Pattern Direction . 18. Click Complete Feature .
Module 17 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
The Pattern tool enables you to quickly duplicate a feature, group of features, or pattern of features. When you create a pattern, you create instances of the selected feature by varying some specified dimensions. The feature selected for patterning is called the pattern leader, while the patterned instances are called pattern members. Each pattern member is dependent on the original feature, or pattern leader.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Specify the angular spacing in the first direction Specified in degrees, you can edit the angular spacing in the dashboard, the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. Specify the radial spacing in the second direction This increment is the spacing between pattern members outward from the axis reference. Again, you can edit the increment in the dashboard, in the graphics window, or by dragging the drag handle. In the figures, the spacing increment is 2.5. There are two additional optional settings that you can use when creating axis patterns: Set Angular Extent This option automatically spaces the pattern members equally about the axis reference. You can also select values of 90, 180, 270, and 360 degrees from the drop-down list, or you can type the desired angular extent. The range is -360 to +360 degrees. The angular extent value supersedes the angular spacing. In the figures, the angular extent has been set to 360 degrees. Member orientation Determines how the pattern members are to be oriented about the axis reference. With the Follow axis rotation check box selected by default, pattern members are oriented such that the relationship between the pattern leader and axis is maintained for each pattern member. In Figure 2, the middle image is set to Follow axis rotation. With the check box for this option cleared, all pattern members have a constant orientation that is the same as the pattern leader. In Figure 2, the left-most image shows all members having a constant orientation.
Select the dimension to be incremented from the pattern leader. The pattern leader displays with all dimensions used to create the feature. The dimension selected can be different for each direction. Also note that you can select multiple dimensions for each direction, if desired. Specify the increment value Again, the increment value for each direction can be different. In Figure 2s right-most image, the left hole diameter was incremented by 0.075 in the first direction, and the right hole diameter was incremented by 0.25 in the second direction, along with the extrude height incremented by 1. Consequently, each pattern member's left hole diameter increases by 0.075 in the first direction and the right hole diameter increases by 0.25 in the second direction with the extrude height increasing 1 over the previous pattern member.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 16
PT
In
You can also increment additional dimensions in the first or second direction, or both, at the same time to create a "varying" pattern. The following items are required to increment additional dimensions in the first and second directions:
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
Pattern\Axis_Second Step 1:
3. Right-click and select Group. 4. Rename the group to OVAL. 5. Select Group OVAL and select from the Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. 6. In the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Axis.
10. Edit the number of members in the second direction to 3, and edit the spacing value to 2.5.
Fo r
PT
In
12. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of OVAL. 13. In the dashboard, select the Options tab. Clear the Follow axis rotation check box. 14. Click Complete Feature .
2012 PTC
te rn
from
Module 17 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
15. Edit the definition of Pattern 1 of OVAL. 16. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Follow axis rotation check box. 17. In the dashboard, select the Dimensions tab. Click in the Direction 1 Dimension collector. Zoom in on the pattern leader. Select the left 0.25 hole diameter dimension and edit the increment to 0.075. 18. In the Dimensions tab of the dashboard, click in the Direction 2 Dimension collector. Select the right 0.25 hole diameter dimension and edit the increment to 0.25. Press CTRL, select the 1 height dimension, and edit the increment to 1.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
te rn
Direction Patterning with Multiple Direction Types
The Direction pattern option enables you to pattern using different direction types for the first and second directions. By default, both the first and second directions are set to translate. However, you may specify either Translate, Rotate, or Coordinate System for the first and second directions independently. This capability enables you to capture translation and rotation within a single pattern. Alternatively, you can create a pattern of a pattern to accomplish similar results. In the figures, a translation is used as the first direction, and a rotation is used for the second direction.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
al
Figure 3 Completed Pattern
Module 17 | Page 19
U se
nl y
Pattern\Direction_Multiple Task 1:
Direction pattern a group, translating in the first direction, and rotating in the second direction.
Display types:
3. Select Direction as the pattern type. 4. Select Translate , if necessary, for the first direction.
Fo r
7. In the dashboard, click in the second direction reference collector. 8. Select datum axis A_1 as the second direction reference. 9. Select Rotate direction. for the second .
11. Edit the second direction number of members to 3 and edit the second direction spacing to 30 degrees.
Module 17 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
2. Select Group OVAL and select from the Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group.
nl y
Similar results could be created by first creating a direction pattern, and then creating an axis pattern of the first pattern.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 17 | Page 21
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Both The Reference pattern references both an existing feature pattern and a group pattern. In Figure 2s right image, the round is Reference patterned around both the feature pattern (axis pattern) and the group pattern (the pattern of the axis pattern). When creating a Reference pattern of a sketch-based feature (such as an extrude), you must either Reference pattern the sketch first, group the sketch and sketch-based feature together, or use an internal (unlinked) sketch. To simplify Reference pattern creation, an internal (unlinked) sketch is recommended. Reference patterns of other feature types, such as rounds or holes, are not an issue.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 17 | Page 23
al
U se
nl y
3. Right-click and select Group. 4. With the group still selected, from the select Pattern Pattern types drop-down menu in the Editing group. Notice the default pattern type is Reference pattern. 5. Click Complete Feature the dashboard. from
Task 2:
Fo r
1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. In the model tree, select AXIS_PATTERN and click Pattern .
3. From the Pattern dashboard, edit the pattern type to Direction. 4. Select datum plane FRONT and click Flip First Direction . 5. Edit the number of members to 3 and edit the spacing to 50. 6. Click Complete Feature .
Module 17 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. In the model tree, press CTRL and select OVAL_CUT and ROUND_2.
7. Select ROUND_1. . Notice the 8. Click Pattern default pattern type is Reference pattern and that the default Reference type is Feature. Also notice that the Reference pattern only occurs on the axis pattern.
Fo r
10. From the Pattern dashboard, edit the Reference type to Both. Notice that the round patterns on each member of the axis pattern, as well as each member of the Direction pattern of the axis pattern. 11. Click Complete Feature
PT
In
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 17 | Page 25
al
U se
9. From the Pattern dashboard, edit the Reference type to Group. Notice that the round only patterns once per direction pattern group.
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 26
te rn
Figure 3 Updating the Number of Bosses and Holes
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Pattern\Reference_Components Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, select each component to highlight it in the graphics window. 3. Select the last BOLT_8.PRT in the model tree. 4. Select Pattern from the Pattern types drop-down menu in the Modifiers group. 5. Click Complete Feature the Pattern dashboard. from
6. Select the upper BOLT_8.PRT from the graphics window. 7. Click Pattern . 8. Click Complete Feature
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
.
Module 17 | Page 27
al
U se
nl y
9. At the top of the model tree, click Settings Filters. and select Tree
10. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK. 11. Expand BASE.PRT, right-click Pattern 4 of EAR, and select Edit.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 28
PT
In
16. Select Regenerate from the Regenerate types drop-down menu in the Operations group. Notice that the number of Reference patterned bolts also increases to 8.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
12. Edit the number of pattern members from 6 LOCAL GROUPS to 8 LOCAL GROUPS.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Disabling Individual Pattern Members
Fo r
Delete the pattern and the original feature You can select the pattern, right-click, and select Delete to delete the pattern, in addition to the original feature used to create the pattern. Note also that any other patterns that reference this feature are deleted as well. In Figure 1, the extrude feature and pattern are to be deleted. The system indicates that the Reference pattern which consists of the cut and round is also going to be deleted. Delete the pattern You can select the pattern, right-click, and select Delete Pattern to delete the pattern, leaving the original feature intact, as shown in Figure 2. Note that the Reference pattern which consists of the cut and round is also updated automatically. Disable individual members of a pattern or Reference pattern When previewing a pattern or Reference pattern, each pattern instance is
2012 PTC Module 17 | Page 29
al
U se
nl y
represented by a black dot. If any of the pattern preview dots are selected, their display changes to white, which disables that particular member of the pattern. To restore the pattern member, click the white dot at any time while redefining the pattern. In Figure 3, the second and fourth pattern members have been disabled. Notice that the Reference pattern has updated automatically.
Fo r
Module 17 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
8. In the model tree, right-click REF_PATTERN and select Delete Pattern. 9. In the model tree, right-click OVAL_PATTERN and select Delete Pattern. The original instance is still intact.
2012 PTC
PT
In
6. Click the black dots for members 2 and 4 to disable those members.
te rn
from
Module 17 | Page 31
al
U se
3. Notice that all features are deleted in addition to all features of the REF_PATTERN Reference pattern.
nl y
2. In the model tree, right-click OVAL_PATTERN, select Delete, and click OK in the Delete dialog box.
Task 2:
1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. Edit the definition of ROUND_REF_PATTERN. 3. Click the top black dot for each patterned cluster to disable them. 4. Click Complete Feature .
9. Click the top black dot to disable that member. 10. Click Complete Feature
Fo r
12. Click the top, bottom, left, and right center black dots to disable those cluster members. 13. Click Complete Feature .
Module 17 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
6. Right-click ROUND_1, select Delete, and click OK in the Delete dialog box.
nl y
Module
18
U se O te rn al
Module 18 | Page 1
You can establish a system of units and a density value for the specific material type used in your models. You can then create various types of analyses, such as measuring distances, angles, and surface areas. You can also calculate mass properties and perform interference checks on assemblies. These analyses can be useful for extracting data from a model or determining whether the model meets the required design intent.
Objectives
After completing this module, you will be able to: View and edit model properties. Investigate model units. Analyze mass properties. Use the measure tools and measure summary tool. Create planar cross-sections. Measure global interferences.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Fo r
The Model Properties dialog box provides common locations for viewing and editing model properties in several categories. Each line item in the dialog box provides basic information at a glance. to display
Clicking Info produces a separate information window that provides more detailed information. To create or edit any of the properties, click the change link in the dialog box. The appropriate dialog box for that property then appears. You can access several of the model properties listed in this dialog box through other menus or dialogs. The following is a list of the properties contained in the Model Properties dialog box, which is accessed by clicking File > Prepare > Model Properties. Materials Material
Module 18 | Page 2 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 18 | Page 3
Units Accuracy Mass Properties Relations, Parameters, and Instances Relations Parameters Instance Features and Geometry Tolerance Names Tools Flexible Shrinkage Simplified Representation Pro/Program Interchange Model Interfaces Reference Control Detail Options
U se
nl y
Fo r
There are several unit systems available, including: Centimeter Gram Second (CGS) Foot Pound Second (FPS) Inch Pound (mass) Second (IPS) Inch Pound (force) Second (IPS) Meter Kilogram Second (MKS) Millimeter Kilogram Second (mmKs) Millimeter Newton (force) Second (mmNs) If none of these default unit systems are desirable, you can customize your own unit system using any combination of units. Any analyses performed on a model are reported in the current model units. You can edit the units used in a model in the Units Manager dialog box, which is accessed by clicking change in the Units row of the Materials section of the Model Properties dialog box. When you switch from one set of units
Module 18 | Page 4 2012 PTC
PT
A model's units are typically derived from a specific model template that was chosen when you first began creating a part model. Creo Parametric's default system of units is English, specifically in_lbm_sec.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Interpreting Model Dimensions
U se
nl y
to another, you must specify how to manage the dimensions. There are two different methods: Convert dimensions Enables the model to retain its original size after the system of units is modified. The dimension values update accordingly, based on your decision. In Figure 2, the diameter of the socket is 25.4 mm. The system of units is converted from Metric to English, and therefore the English diameter is now 1 in (the same size). Interpret dimensions Enables the model to change size based on the system of units specified. The dimension values remain the same. In Figure 3, the diameter of the socket is 1 in. The system of units is interpreted from English to Metric, and therefore the Metric diameter is now 1 mm (the same value). The same systems of units are also available for assemblies.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 18 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Fo r
7. In the Units Manager dialog box, select the Inch lbm Second system of units and click Set. In the Changing Model Units dialog box, select the Convert dimensions option, if necessary. Click OK > Close > Close.
Module 18 | Page 6
PT
6. Again, notice the current unit system in the Units Manager dialog box and view the Description.
In
te rn
3. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to open the Model Properties dialog box.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
2. Double-click the outer cylindrical model surface. Notice the main outer diameter is 25.4.
8. Click Refit , if necessary, and click in the background. 9. Double-click the outer cylindrical model surface. Notice the main outer diameter is now 1. The model is the same size. The diameter changed from 25.4 millimeters to 1 inch.
10. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. 11. In the Materials section, click change in the Units row.
PT
Fo r
15. Double-click the outer cylindrical model surface. Notice the main outer diameter is still 1. The model is now much smaller. The diameter changed from 1 inch to 1 millimeter.
2012 PTC
13. In the Changing Model Units dialog box, select the Interpret dimensions option and click OK > Close > Close.
In
te rn
12. In the Units Manager dialog box, select the millimeter Kilogram Sec system of units and click Set.
al
Module 18 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Fo r
You can view a model's mass properties within the Materials section of the Model Properties dialog box. You can also calculate the mass properties by selecting the Analysis tab from the ribbon and clicking Mass Properties
from the Model Report group. Before you can calculate accurate mass properties for a model, however, you must define its density. A mass properties calculation is dependent upon the density entered for a given model. If the density is updated for a model and its mass properties are recalculated, the results update. When the system performs a mass properties analysis, the following mass property information is calculated: Volume Surface Area Density Mass Center of Gravity The center of gravity (COG) displays on the model as a coordinate system with axes 1, 2, and 3, as shown in Figure 2.
2012 PTC
Module 18 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
You can also perform mass properties analyses on assemblies. However, you must first configure the density of each part model.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 18 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Properties\Mass-Properties Task 1:
3. In the Model Properties dialog box, click Expand in the Mass Properties row of the Materials section. 4. Notice that the density is specified as 3.613e+4. 5. In the Materials section, click change in the Mass Properties row.
Fo r
8. In the Materials section, click Info in the Mass Properties row. 9. Notice the values for volume, surface area, density, mass, and center of gravity in the Mass Properties Report.
10. Close the Mass Properties Report dialog box. 11. Click Close in the Model Properties dialog box.
Module 18 | Page 10
PT
7. Notice the updated density value in the Model Properties dialog box.
In
te rn
6. In the Mass Properties dialog box, edit the Density to .285, the density of steel, and click OK.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar, select VALVE.ASM, and click Open.
2. In the ribbon, select the Analysis tab and select Mass Properties from the Mass Properties types drop-down menu in the Model Report group. 3. Click Preview Analysis in the Mass Properties dialog box.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 11
4. Notice the values for volume, surface area, density, mass, and center of gravity.
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Start the desired measurement tool and then select references. Select references and then start the desired measurement tool. This workflow enables you to use advanced chain or surface selection. Regardless of workflow, the references remain selected, and you can toggle between the various measure tools to view the different measurement results. Press CTRL to select multiple references for a measure tool. The tool provides cumulative results based on the selected measurement type. Measurement results display in the graphics window within on-screen panels. You can drag these panels as well as collapse them. You can restore any collapsed panel by clicking its on-screen icon. You can also view measurement results by expanding the Results area of the Measure dialog box. You can copy and paste the contents of this Results table to other programs such as spreadsheet applications.
PT
In
You can make several types of measurements on models. Use either of the following workflows for measure tools:
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Within the Measure dialog box, you can edit various options by clicking Measure Options . The following options are available: Units by Model Units are the same as those of the model. Length Units Specify the desired length units from a drop-down list. Angular Units Specify the desired angular units from a drop-down list. Decimal Places Specify the number of decimal places displayed for measurements. Show Feature Tab Displays the Feature tab in the Measure dialog box, enabling you to specify regeneration order as well as create parameters for a given measurement. Save Type Enables you to specify the default option that is selected when saving the measurement. Options include: Analysis Enables you to save the measurement for future use. You can specify a unique name for the measurement analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analysis by from the Manage group in the Analysis tab. clicking Saved Analysis Feature Enables you to save the measurement as a feature in the model tree. Latest Enables you to save the measurement the same way as the previously saved measurement. Panel display You can toggle panels to either hide or display them in the graphics window. You can also toggle panels by collapsing them or expanding them.
2012 PTC
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Measurement Options
al
cumulative perimeter total for all loops of all surfaces or the cumulative external perimeter for only the outer loops of all surfaces. Distance Measures the distance between two selected references. You can optionally provide a projection reference or measure the maximum distance between references. You can also use a cylindrical surface reference as an axis. Angle Measures the angle between two selected references. You can specify a measurement range of +/-180 degrees or 0-360 degrees. You can also specify the desired angle type you wish to measure, including Main, Supplement, Conjugate, and Second Conjugate. Diameter Measures both the diameter and radius of a selected surface or edge reference. You can also select a point reference on a non-ruled surface to measure the radius at that selected point. Area Measures the area of a selected surface reference. Optionally, you can specify a projection reference. You can also select multiple surface references and measure a cumulative area measurement. Selecting the model measures the total model surface area. Volume Measures the volume of a model. You can also measure the volume on either side of a selected plane. Transform Generates a transform matrix between two coordinate system references, consisting of the X, Y, and Z distances between the coordinate system references.
U se
nl y
Module 18 | Page 13
4. Select the diagonal edge. 5. Press CTRL and select the two adjacent edges. 6. Click the first panel to expand it, and drag the panels as necessary.
Fo r
10. Select the top, right surface. 11. Notice the perimeter values. 12. Press CTRL and select the top, left surface. 13. Notice the five values in the Results section. 14. In the graphics window, expand the first panel and drag it as necessary. 15. Close the Measure dialog box.
Module 18 | Page 14
PT
8. Notice the individual values for all three lengths, as well as the sum total of all references.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
from the 3. Select Length Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group.
nl y
Task 2:
1. In the ribbon, select Distance from the Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group. 2. Select the front, right vertex. 3. Press CTRL and select the rear, right-most vertex.
6. In the Measure dialog box, right-click the second vertex reference and select Remove. 7. Press CTRL and select the rear edge.
Fo r
10. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use as Line check box. 11. Right-click the vertex reference in the dialog box and select Remove.
2012 PTC
PT
In
8. In the Measure dialog box, select the Measure maximum distance check box.
te rn
Module 18 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
4. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Projection collector and select datum plane FRONT.
12. Press CTRL and select the front cylindrical surface. 13. In the Measure dialog box, clear the Use as Axis check box. Clear the Use as Line check box. 14. Notice the result is the closest diagonal distance.
17. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use as Line check box.
Fo r
Task 3:
1. In the ribbon, select Angle from the Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group. 2. Select the front, left surface. 3. Press CTRL and select the right, front surface.
Module 18 | Page 16
PT
18. In the Measure dialog box, select the Measure maximum distance check box.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
16. In the Measure dialog box, select the Use as Axis check box.
nl y
4. In the Measure dialog box, select 0360 from the Range drop-down list, if necessary. Select Supplement from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.
9. In the Measure dialog box, select Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.
Fo r
10. In the Measure dialog box, select Second Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle. 11. Select Main from the Angle drop-down list. 12. Leave the dialog box open.
2012 PTC
PT
8. In the Measure dialog box, select +/-180 from the Range drop-down list. Select Supplement from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 17
al
6. In the Measure dialog box, select Second Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.
U se
nl y
5. In the Measure dialog box, select Conjugate from the Angle drop-down list and notice the angle.
Task 4:
2. Notice that the references are automatically removed due to the different measurement type. 3. Select the front, cylindrical surface.
5. Press CTRL and query-select the rear hole edge. 6. Notice the diameter and radius values. 7. Expand the panels and drag them as necessary. 8. Right-click the model and select Clear. 9. Leave the dialog box open. Task 5:
Fo r
6. Select the top, angled surface. 7. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Projection collector. 8. Select datum plane TOP. 9. Right-click the Projection collector and select Remove.
Module 18 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 6:
1. In the Measure dialog box, click . Volume 2. Select the model from the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 19
al
U se
4. Click the arrow in the graphics window to flip the volume direction.
nl y
3. In the Measure dialog box, click in the Plane collector and select datum plane RIGHT.
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 3 Summary Measurement using Surface References
al
U se
nl y
Analysis\Measure-Summary Task 1:
5. Press CTRL and select the front vertex. 6. Expand the panels and arrange them as necessary.
Fo r
9. Press CTRL and select the two edges. 10. Expand the panels and arrange them as necessary.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 21
al
U se
from the 3. Select Summary Measure types drop-down menu in the Measure group.
nl y
11. Leaving the edge references selected, click Length Measure dialog box. Click Distance Click Angle . .
in the
12. Notice that only the selected measure tools information is displayed each time. 13. Click Summary . 14. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear. 15. Press CTRL and select the two surfaces.
18. Right-click and select Measure > Angle. 19. Right-click and select Measure > Area.
Fo r
20. Notice that only the selected measure tools information is displayed each time. 21. Right-click and select Measure > Summary. 22. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear.
23. Select MEASURE.PRT from the model tree. 24. Close the Measure dialog box.
Module 18 | Page 22
PT
17. Leaving the edge references selected, right-click and select Measure > Length.
In
te rn
16. In the Measure dialog box, clear the Use as Plane check boxes for both references.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
te rn Fo r
2012 PTC
You can create new planar part cross-sections in a 3-D model. The following planar cross-section types are available: Planar Enables you to select a planar surface or datum plane to create a cross-section through. X Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the models default coordinate system X-axis. Y Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the models default coordinate system Y-axis. Z Direction Creates a planar cross-section with the normal pointing along the models default coordinate system Z-axis. These cross-section types are created using the Section dashboard. You can access the Section dashboard from either the Section types drop-down menu in the Model Display group of the View ribbon tab, or from the Sections tab of the view manager. New cross-sections are given the default names of XSEC0001, XSEC0002, and so on. You can always rename a cross-section either during or after creation, similar to any feature. You can also redefine cross-sections or
Module 18 | Page 23
PT
In
al
Figure 3 X Direction Cross-Section with Modified Hatching
U se
nl y
manage their display using either the Sections node in the model tree or the Sections tab in the view manager.
Cross-Section Options
The following are various cross-section creation options available in the Section dashboard: Distance from plane Enables you to type a distance to offset the cross-section from the specified reference. You can also dynamically drag the cross-section in the graphics window. Direction from plane Enables you to flip the direction from the specified reference that the cross-section is offset. Cap section Enables you to cap the surface of the cross-section. Fill surface color Enables you to fill the capped surface with a specified color. This option is only available if the cross-section is capped. Enable hatching Enables you to toggle the cross-sections hatch pattern on or off. 3D Dragger Similar to Assembly mode, you can enable the 3D Dragger and use it to translate or rotate the cross-section about the three axes. View 2-D section in separate window Enables you to display the 2-D cross-section in a separate window.
Fo r
Pattern Enables you to edit the hatch pattern used. You can select from a default library of ANSI or ISO hatch patterns, or choose from a user-defined library hatch pattern. Angle Enables you to specify the angle to orient the hatch pattern. Scale Enables you to size the pattern. You can type a value, or use the two options to either halve or double the existing hatch spacing. Color Enables you to modify the color that the hatch pattern displays in the graphics window.
Module 18 | Page 24
PT
In
If the hatch pattern is enabled for a given cross-section, you can edit the hatching either from the Sections node in the model tree or from the view manager. When editing the hatch pattern, the Edit Hatching dialog box displays with the following options:
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
View\Cross-Section_Part-Planar Task 1:
from the 3. Select X Direction Section types drop-down menu. 4. In the graphics window, drag the section offset to the right approximately 15. 5. Drag the section offset back to 0. 6. In the dashboard, click Hatch . Pattern 7. Click Complete Feature .
Fo r
9. Right-click and select Edit Hatching. Edit the Angle to 45 and press ENTER. . Click Halve Hatch Size Click Apply and close the Edit Hatching dialog box.
10. In the model tree, right-click XSEC0001 and select Deactivate. Right-click and select Show Section to toggle it off. 11. Click in the graphics window background to de-select all geometry.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 25
al
U se
nl y
12. Select Y Direction from the Section types drop-down menu. 13. In the graphics window, edit the section offset to 10. 14. Notice the hidden hole profile is now visible.
16. In the 2D Section Viewer dialog box, click Rotate Right necessary. 17. Click Complete Feature 18. Right-click and select Deactivate. 19. Select Z Direction from the Section types drop-down menu. 20. In the dashboard, click Cap to toggle it off. Section 21. Click Cap Section it on. if .
PT
Surface and select the darkest red color. . 24. Right-click and select Deactivate. Create and pattern a cross-section based on a selected plane.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Select Planar from the Section types drop-down menu. 2. Select the surface on the right. 3. Edit the offset to -12 and press ENTER. 4. In the dashboard, click Hatch Pattern . 5. Click Complete Feature .
Module 18 | Page 26
In
te rn
to toggle
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. With the section still selected, right-click and select Pattern. 7. Select the same surface on the right. 8. In the dashboard, click Flip First Direction Edit the quantity to 5. Edit the spacing to 12. 9. Click Complete Feature . .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
2. In the view manager, select the Sections tab. Click New and view the available options. Right-click on XSEC0001 and notice the available options. Click Close.
In
te rn
from
Module 18 | Page 27
al
U se
10. In the model tree, expand the Pattern feature. Select XSEC0004, press CTRL, and select the remaining four patterned sections. Right-click and select Show Section.
nl y
Fo r
Parts only Interference is checked between all parts, regardless of which sub-assembly, if any, to which they belong. Sub-assembly only Interference is checked between all sub-assemblies in the top level assembly without determining whether individual parts within the sub-assembly interfere. When components interfere, the geometry of one part is embedded in another part. The system displays the interference between these two components as a pair in the Global Interference dialog box. Selecting the interfering pair in the dialog box causes the components to highlight in the graphics window, as shown in the figures. There are two different computational methods available for computing interferences: Exact When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting the interfering components, the system also highlights the interfering volume shared between the two components. In addition, the volume of interference is calculated and displayed in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 1. Quick When selecting the interfering pair, in addition to highlighting the interfering components, the system highlights the approximate interfering
Module 18 | Page 28 2012 PTC
PT
You can calculate interferences between components in an assembly. There are two different setup options available when computing global interference:
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
volume with a plus symbol (+) in the graphics window, as shown in Figure 2. The volume of interference is not calculated.
Analysis Options
There are three options available when computing global interference on models: Quick Enables you to compute global interference without saving the analysis or creating a feature in the model tree. Saved Enables you to save the analysis for future use. You can specify a unique name for the global interference analysis so you can easily identify it at a later time. You can retrieve the saved analyses by selecting from the the Analysis tab from the ribbon and clicking Saved Analysis Manage group. Feature Enables you to save the global interference analysis as a feature in the model tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 29
al
U se
nl y
Analysis\Global-Interference Task 1:
3. In the Inspect Geometry group, select Global Interference from the Global Interference types drop-down menu. 4. Click Preview Analysis in the Global Interference dialog box. Notice the four interfering pairs. Select each pair to view the highlighting, and notice the volume of interference. Click Accept .
7. In the model tree, right-click BODY.PRT and select Activate. Expand BODY.PRT and expand the second Pattern (Hole). Edit the diameter of Hole id 299 from 3 to 4, and click . Regenerate
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 30
PT
6. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.
In
and select
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
8. In the model tree, right-click INTERFERENCE.ASM and select Activate. 9. Select the Analysis tab. 10. Click Global Interference from the Inspect Geometry group. 11. Click Preview Analysis . Notice that there is only one interference pair. Click Accept . 12. In the model tree, right-click BODY.PRT and select Activate. Edit the diameter of Hole id 37 from 49 to 51, and click . Regenerate
Fo r
16. Click Preview Analysis . Notice that there are now no interfering parts, as shown in the Message Log. Click Accept .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 18 | Page 31
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 18 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
19
U se O te rn al
Module 19 | Page 1
Most commercial product designs consist of numerous components. Creo Parametric enables you to create an assembly, into which you can assemble multiple components. Constraints locate the components within the assembly, both manually and automatically.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand assembly and constraint theory and create new assembly models. Understand assembly constraint status and analyze basic component orientation. Assemble components using the Default constraint and Automatic option. Create coincident constraints using geometry. Create coincident constraints using datum features. Create distance constraints. Create parallel, normal, and angle constraints. Use the accessory window to assemble components.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Like part models, all new assembly models share several characteristics in common. By creating your assembly models from standardized templates, you save time by avoiding the need to repeatedly define company standard information. This standard template enables all engineers to have a consistent starting point. After you create and name the new assembly, you can begin adding parts to it. Assemblies contain design intent in the same way that part models contain design intent. Assembly design intent is based upon which component is assembled first, and the constraints that you use during the assembly process. Design intent is important because it ensures that your assembly updates in a predictable manner when edited and regenerated. Sub-assemblies share all of the same characteristics as assemblies. In fact, a sub-assembly is nothing more than an assembly that is assembled into another assembly. Creo Parametric provides several types of constraints, such as Coincident, Distance, Parallel, Normal, and Angle. To easily utilize these constraints, select the Automatic option to enable Creo Parametric to automatically
Module 19 | Page 2 2012 PTC
Fo r
PT
There are multiple methods to assemble components using Creo Parametric. Assembling components with constraints is one of the primary methods used to create Creo Parametric assemblies.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
determine the constraint type based upon the orientation and position of the component and the references you select. Every assembled component contains a Placement node in the model tree that you can expand to view the constraints used in that component's placement. You must enable the Placement folder filter to view this node. Assembling with component interfaces is the second method available for assembling components. This method is especially useful when assembling common components because it can significantly reduce the number of selections that you make when constraining a component. By using component interfaces, you save the referenced interfaces on the common part. Then, when you place the common part, you only need to select the assembly references.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 19 | Page 3
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
Assemblies are composed of parts and other sub-assemblies that you combine. You can create new assembly models within Creo Parametric either by clicking File > New, or by clicking New . You can type the name of the assembly and select whether you want to use a default template. Unless you select the Empty template, the new assembly displays in the graphics window with the default datum features associated with the selected template.
Using Templates
New assemblies should be created using a template. Assembly templates are similar to part templates in that they enable you to create a new assembly with predefined general information. Your company has most likely created customized templates to use that contain your company's standards. Using a template to create a new assembly is beneficial because it ensures that
Module 19 | Page 4 2012 PTC
te rn
Figure 3 Layers Created from Assembly Template
al
U se
nl y
regardless of who created it, the assembly contains the same consistent set of information, including: Datums Most templates contain a set of default datum planes and default coordinate system, all named appropriately. Units Most companies have a company standard for units in their assemblies. Creating every assembly with the same set of units ensures that mistakes are not made. Parameters Every assembly can contain the same standard metadata information. Layers When every assembly contains the same layers, it is easier to manage both the layers and items on them. View Orientations Ensuring that every assembly contains the same standard view orientations aids the modeling process.
Parameters can drive dimension values through relations, or be driven by relations. Parameters can be used as a column in a family table. For example, the parameter Cost might have a different value for each instance. Parameter values can be reported in Drawings, or viewed with data management tools such as Pro/INTRALINK or Windchill solutions. User parameters can be added at the model level (part, assembly, or component) or to a feature or pattern. You can view an assemblys parameters and create new ones by clicking Parameters You can create parameters that accept the following types of values: Real Number Any numerical value. For example 25.5, 1.666667, 10.5E3, and PI. Integer Any whole number. For example 1, 5, and 257. String Any consecutive sequence of alphanumeric characters (letters or numbers). Yes/No Accepts either the YES or NO value.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Parameters are metadata information that can be included in an assembly template or created by a user in his or her own part or assembly. Parameters are important because they enable you to add additional information to part and assembly models. Parameters can have several uses:
O
Module 19 | Page 5
nl y
File\New_Assembly Task 1:
1. Without an open model, notice only the Home tab displays in the ribbon.
Display types:
Fo r
and select Tree Settings Filters. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK.
6. Explore the default datum features created in the graphics window and model tree.
Module 19 | Page 6
PT
In
3. In the New File Options dialog box, select the mmks_asm_design template. Click OK. .
te rn
2. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Select Assembly as the Type and Design as the Sub-type. Edit the Name to new_assembly. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. Notice that the ribbon has populated with tabs specific to the type of open file.
8. In the model tree, click Show the default layers. 9. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties to open the Model Properties dialog box. 10. Notice the units that are set. 11. Click Close. 12. Click Parameters
and edit the Name to ASSY_NUMBER. Click New Parameter Edit the parameter type to Integer. Click in the Value field and edit the number to 596289. Click OK.
Fo r
PT
In
2012 PTC
te rn
again
Click New Parameter and edit the Name to PURCHASED. Edit the Type to Yes No and notice the default Value of NO.
al
13. In the Parameters dialog box, click in the Description parameter Value field. Edit the value to NEW ASSEMBLY and press ENTER.
U se
O
Module 19 | Page 7
nl y
Task 2:
3. Again, notice the datum features. 4. Click File > Prepare > Model Properties. 5. Notice the units that are set. 6. Click Close.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
2. In the New File Options dialog box, select the inlbs_asm_design template and click OK.
nl y
1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. Select Assembly as the Type and Design as the Sub-type. Edit the Name to select_template. Clear the Use default template check box. Click OK.
In
Fo r
You can assemble components using constraints. Constraints determine how a part is located within an assembly. There are many different types of constraints that you can use to assemble components. Most constraints are applied between parts within an assembly. They specify the relative position of a pair of references. The system adds constraints one at a time. Use placement constraints in combinations to specify both placement and orientation. It is important to select your constraints based on the design intent of your assembly, so that when you edit a dimension on a part, the assembly reacts as predicted. When you create a constraint, its references highlight on the models and the Constraint Type displays. For most constraints, it is necessary that you select two references, a component reference on the component being placed, and an assembly reference from an item in the assembly. When the first reference has been selected, a green, dashed line connects the first selected reference to your cursor until you select the second reference, as shown in Figure 1. When multiple constraints are created, a box surrounding the active constraint highlights. For example, in Figure 2, the Oriented constraint is the active constraint. To activate a different constraint, simply select the
2012 PTC Module 19 | Page 9
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Modifying a Constraint
al
U se
nl y
displayed name or select it from the Placement tab in the dashboard. You can then right-click to perform a desired action. You can also double-click a constraint's tag in the graphics window to edit the constraint, as shown in Figure 3. Editing options include switching the constraint type, changing the constraint orientation, and viewing as well as deleting the constraint's placement references. in the dashboard to convert You can toggle Constraints To Connections existing connections to constraints within an assembly.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 No Constraints
nl y
The left-most image in Figure 2 shows the component Partially Constrained. The preview color of partially constrained components is purple. Fully Constrained Enough constraints have been applied to the component being assembled that it cannot move. Ideally, when you complete the component placement, the component should be fully constrained. The right-most image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained. The preview color of fully constrained components changes to orange. Constraints Invalid Two constraints conflict with how they are trying to place the component in the assembly. If this condition arises, you must edit or delete one or more constraints to eliminate the conflict.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 12
PT
If you complete the component placement when the status reads Partially Constrained, the Message Log alerts you that the system leaves the component packaged only. An open square symbol also displays in the model tree next to the packaged component. You can drag components that are packaged based on their partial constraints.
In
te rn
The Allow Assumptions option can become available when placing a component in an assembly. When this option is selected, the system makes additional constraint assumptions to help fully constrain the component. If you clear this check box, the system returns the status to Partially Constrained. If you properly further constrain a component that is fully constrained with Allow Assumptions enabled, the Allow Assumptions option disappears and appears as Fully Constrained, as there is no longer a need for the system to make assumptions. The middle image in Figure 2 is Fully Constrained as long as the Allow Assumptions option is enabled. If the Allow Assumptions check box is cleared, the component is no longer Fully Constrained, as it can rotate. Either an additional constraint would need to be added or the Allow Assumptions check box would need to be selected.
al
U se
nl y
Allowing Assumptions
2012 PTC
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Assembling a Sub-Assembly
al
U se
nl y
from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group. 3. In the Open dialog box, select component BODY.PRT and click Open. 4. Notice the component is purple. Notice also in the dashboard that the constraint STATUS says No Constraints. 5. In the dashboard, select Default from the Constraint Type drop-down list. 6. Notice that the constraint STATUS now reads Fully Constrained.
Fo r
8. Click Complete Component 9. Notice that the color is now the actual component color.
PT
In
Module 19 | Page 14
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
10. At the top of the model tree, click Settings Filters. and select Tree
11. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK. 12. View the model tree and notice the assembled component.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
.
Module 19 | Page 15
al
U se
2. In the Open dialog box, select component SUB.ASM and click Open.
1. Click Assemble
nl y
Task 2:
Orienting Components
You can reorient a component with respect to the assembly during placement.
3D Dragger Rotate and translate about the three axes. Move in 2-D plane. Free move. 3D Dragger portions gray out as degrees of freedom are reduced through constraints. Press CTRL+ALT and click, right-click, or middle-click.
PT
In
Fo r
Orienting Components
When assembling a component, you can reorient it with respect to the assembly. Reorienting the component closer to its assembly location aids in the components assembly by enabling you to more easily select references. When you select the Automatic option, the system is able to more easily determine the correct placement constraints to use. You can reorient the component according to the applied constraints. As constraints are applied, the degrees of freedom are reduced, further limiting the movement of the component.
te rn
Figure 3 Component Positioned on Top of Model
al
U se
nl y
Rotate components about the three axes Click and drag around the shaded arcs to rotate the component about that specific axis. Translate components along the three axes Click and drag along the shaded arrows to translate the component along that specific axis. Move components in a 2-D plane Click and drag in the translucent shaded quadrant to move the component within that 2-D plane. Free move the components Click and drag on the small central sphere at the origin of the axes. As you create constraints, portions of the 3D Dragger are grayed out, as the degrees of freedom are reduced. For example, if a constraint is applied that prohibits component movement along a certain axis, that 3D Dragger axis becomes grayed out since the component cannot move in that degree of freedom.
You can also use the following keyboard shortcuts to orient new components: Operation
al te rn PT C In
Pan
U se
O
+ + +
Spin
Component Drag Drags the component based on existing constraints, which is the . Use same as the Drag Components this functionality when you have created constraints and wish to their movement with remaining degrees of freedom. +
Fo r
2012 PTC
nl y
+ +
Module 19 | Page 17
Assembly\Component_Orient Task 1:
3. In the Open dialog box, select component SHAFT.PRT and click Open. 4. Notice the 3D Dragger which appears over the component. 5. Rotate the model 90 degrees by dragging the red arc.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.
8. Position the component by dragging the location sphere. 9. Press CTRL+ALT and right-click to pan the component. 10. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component. 11. Return the component back to the location shown.
Task 2:
1. Right-click the 3D Dragger and select the Drag along geometry check box to enable it. 2. Select an edge on the component as shown.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
3. Rotate and drag the component along the available 3D Dragger axes.
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
6. Right-click the 3D Dragger and clear the Drag along geometry check box.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
5. Rotate and drag the component along the available 3D Dragger axes.
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Selecting Alternate Planar Surfaces to be Coincident
al
U se
nl y
to rotate the surfaces so that their normals switch from facing each other to facing in the same direction, and vice-versa. When planar surfaces of components are assembled coincident to one another, it is the same as assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for editing. The components can be positioned in any location as long as the two specified surface normals either face each other or face the same direction.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 22
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Assembly\Coincident_Geometry Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of SHAFT.PRT. 3. In the dashboard, select Coincident as the Constraint Type. 4. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT surface coincident to the BODY.PRT hole cylindrical surface. 5. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
6. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT top surface coincident to the top BODY.PRT surface.
In
te rn
as the
Module 19 | Page 23
al
U se
nl y
8. In the Placement tab, right-click the second Coincident constraint and select Delete. Drag the SHAFT.PRT upwards. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the
5. Constrain the COVER.PRT inner diameter coincident to the inner BODY.PRT diameter.
Fo r
6. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the
7. Constrain the COVER.PRT hole coincident to the BODY.PRT hole. In this situation, the system may convert the Coincident constraint to an Oriented constraint.
Module 19 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
2. In the Open dialog box, select component COVER.PRT and click Open.
al
2012 PTC
1. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.
U se
Task 2:
nl y
9. Constrain the SHAFT.PRT bottom surface coincident to the inner BODY.PRT surface.
8. In the Placement tab, click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the
9. Constrain the COVER.PRT surface coincident to the BODY.PRT surface. 10. Review the constraints and click Complete Component .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 25
al
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
The Coincident constraint enables you to position two specified datum planes to lie in the same plane (coplanar), and either face each other or face in the same direction. Datum planes have positive and negative sides designated by color. If you rotate a model with datum planes displayed, you see that the colors are brown and gray. If the datum planes face each other, their positive (brown) sides face each other. If the datum planes face in the same direction, their positive sides face in the same direction. By default, the system aligns the positive sides in the same direction. You can use the Change Constraint option in the dashboard to rotate the datum planes so that Orientation their positive sides face each other. When the datum planes of components are assembled coincident to one another, it is the same as assigning an offset value of zero, except that an offset value is not created for editing. The components can be positioned in any location as long as the two specified datum plane normals either face each other or face the same direction.
Module 19 | Page 26 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Selecting Datum Axes to be Coincident
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 27
al
U se
nl y
Assembly\Coincident_Datums Task 1:
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. Edit the definition of ARM.PRT. 3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Review the existing Coincident constraints. Click New Constraint. Select Coincident Constraint Type. as the
Fo r
7. In the Placement tab, click Flip to toggle the orientation back. 8. Click Complete Component .
Module 19 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Task 2:
and .
2. Select BODY.PRT, right-click, and select Hide. 3. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group. 4. In the Open dialog box, select PLATE.PRT and click Open. 5. Reorient PLATE.PRT approximately as shown. 6. In the dashboard, click 3D Dragger to hide it. as the
10. Select the two datum axes. 11. Right-click and select New Constraint.
Fo r
PT
2012 PTC
In
te rn
as the as the
Module 19 | Page 29
al
U se
nl y
17. In the model tree, right-click BODY.PRT and select Unhide. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
In
te rn Fo r
Figure 3 Distance Constraint Flipped
al
U se
nl y
If components are assembled to one another with a Distance constraint offset value of zero, it is the same as assembling them with a Coincident constraint, except that a distance value is available for editing. You can double-click the Distance constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Coincident constraint, and vice versa. option in the You can also use the Change Constraint Orientation dashboard to flip the component orientation for the Distance constraint. For example, the component orientation was flipped between Figure 2 and Figure 3.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Assembly\Distance Task 1:
Fo r
8. Right-click and select New Constraint. 9. Select Distance Constraint Type. as the
10. Drag the sub-assembly upward if necessary. 11. Select the two surfaces.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 33
al
3. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.
U se
nl y
12. Reorient the model. 13. Drag the sub-assembly and edit its distance to 15.
14. In the dashboard, click Change . Constraint Orientation 15. Click Change Constraint to toggle it back. Orientation
Fo r
17. Drag the sub-assembly upward. 18. Right-click and select Clear. 19. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab and notice that the references have been removed. 20. Select the two new surfaces. The second surface is a hidden surface on the underside of the shaft.
Module 19 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
21. Reorient the model. 22. Drag the sub-assembly and edit its distance to 15.
Task 2:
Fo r
1. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 2. Enable Plane Display . 3. In the Placement tab, clear the Allow Assumptions check box. 4. Rotate the component approximately as shown.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 35
al
U se
nl y
5. In the Placement tab, click New Constraint. Select Distance Constraint Type. as the
6. Select the vertex and the datum plane. 7. Edit the distance value to 35. 8. Edit the distance value to -65. 9. Click Complete Component .
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 36
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Viewing an Angle Offset Constraint
2012 PTC
al
Module 19 | Page 37
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
option in the dashboard You can use the Change Constraint Orientation to rotate the angle offset 180 degrees to the other side of the assembly reference. You can also double-click the Angle Offset constraint tag in the graphics window and edit the constraint type to a Distance, Parallel, Coincident, or Normal constraint.
U se
The Angle Offset constraint enables you to specify a rotation angle between planar references. The component reorients to the Angle Offset value that you specify. Typically, the Angle Offset constraint is used after the component has already been partially constrained with a Coincident constraint
nl y
2012 PTC
Assembly\Parallel_Normal_Angle Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of SUB.ASM. 3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Constraint. Notice the constraint status is Fully Constrained. Clear the Allow Assumptions check box. 4. Drag the component as shown. 5. In the Placement tab, select as the Constraint Parallel Type.
6. Select the two surfaces shown. 7. Notice the component orientation, and click Flip.
Fo r
8. In the Placement tab, edit the . Constraint Type to Normal Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component 180, as shown.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 39
al
U se
nl y
Task 2:
1. In the Placement tab, edit the Constraint Type to Angle Offset . Edit the angle to 45. Click Flip.
2. Right-click in the graphics window and select Clear. 3. Press CTRL+ALT and middle-click to spin the component approximately, as shown. 4. Enable Plane Display 5. Select the two planes. 6. Edit the angle to 25 and click Complete Component . .
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 2 Creating an Angle Offset Constraint Based on Orientation
al
U se
nl y
are not coplanar; therefore, the system automatically creates an Angle Offset constraint. In between the creation of constraints, you can further reorient the component to refine its position. This can help the system more accurately determine the next constraint type and offset, or it may help you easily select the next set of references. Of course, the created constraints dictate how the component moves. When you select a reference pair, the system automatically creates a constraint. At this point, the system usually waits for you to select a second reference pair to create a second constraint. The system automatically keeps creating new constraints until the component is Fully Constrained.
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 42
PT
In
Assemble components using Automatic . The system typically generates a Coincident constraint from the specified references. You can then toggle, or create as necessary, the Offset, Angle Offset, Coincident, Centered, and so on, Constraint Types. The Centered constraint lines up spheres, cones, tori, or cylinders with no Flip option.
te rn
al
Best Practices
U se
New Constraint Useful when you need to create additional constraints above what the system minimally requires. Clear Clears the references specified for the currently active constraint.
When assembling components, there are various right-click menu options available to increase your speed and efficiency, including the following:
nl y
2012 PTC
Assembly\Automatic Task 1:
3. In the Open dialog box, select component BODY.PRT and click Open. 4. Right-click and select Default Constraint. 5. Middle-click to complete the component. 6. Click Assemble .
Fo r
10. Notice that the Constraint Type is set to Automatic 11. Select the surfaces. 12. Notice that the system creates a Coincident constraint. .
2012 PTC
PT
In
7. In the Open dialog box, select component SHAFT.PRT and click Open.
te rn
Module 19 | Page 43
al
U se
nl y
from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.
13. Drag the SHAFT.PRT up and out of the hole. 14. Select the two surfaces. 15. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the Constraint Type to Distance if necessary.
17. Right-click and select New Constraint. 18. Select the two surfaces.
19. In the Placement tab, edit the Constraint Type to Angle Offset if necessary.
Fo r
20. Edit the angle value to -35 or 35 as necessary to achieve the position shown. 21. Middle-click to complete the component.
Module 19 | Page 44
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
23. In the Open dialog box, select component COVER.PRT and click Open. 24. Reorient COVER.PRT approximately as shown.
Fo r
29. Select the two surfaces. 30. Notice that the system creates an Oriented constraint.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 45
al
U se
nl y
31. Right-click and select New Constraint. 32. Select the two surfaces. 33. Select the Placement tab. Edit the Constraint Type to if necessary. Coincident 34. Middle-click to complete the component.
36. In the Open dialog box, select component ARM.PRT and click Open. 37. Reorient ARM.PRT approximately.
38. Again, notice that the Constraint 39. Select the surfaces.
Fo r
41. Notice that the taper direction of the cones is not aligned.
42. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Edit the Constraint Type to Centered .
Module 19 | Page 46
PT
In
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
44. Right-click and select New Constraint. 45. Select the two planes. 46. Notice that the system creates an Angle Offset constraint.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 19 | Page 47
al
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
Component placement The accessory window can be particularly beneficial if you are assembling a very small component into a very large assembly. Data sharing Sheetmetal forms The accessory window contains its own In Graphics toolbar, enabling you to control the contents of the accessory window separately from that of the graphics window.
Module 19 | Page 48 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Docked Accessory Window Model Tree
al
U se
nl y
When the accessory window is toggled on, you can select whether or not to display the incoming model in the graphics window by clicking the Show icon. Of course, you can select references on In Assembly Window the incoming model in either the accessory window or the graphics window, depending on where it is displayed. The accessory window can be docked or undocked. If docked, it appears within the Creo Parametric graphics window, and always in front, preventing windows from getting lost behind other open windows. You can drag the window to a different location within the graphics window or resize it in the same way you can modify any other conventional window. When the accessory window is docked, the model tree pane splits and displays the incoming model's model tree at the lower portion. The accessory window model tree supports layer tree functionality. If the accessory window is undocked, the incoming model's model tree displays in that window. The undocked accessory window model tree also supports layer tree functionality. You can undock the accessory window by setting a configuration option.
Fo r
accessory_window_display Controls the display of the accessory window. Options include: docked Places the accessory window as a separate window within the graphics window. undocked Places the accessory window as a separate window in addition to the Creo Parametric window. comp_assemble_start Sets the initial assembly placement behavior when assembling a new component. Options include, but are not limited to: default Displays the incoming model in the main graphics window only. constrain_in_window Displays the incoming model in the accessory window only.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 19 | Page 49
Assembly\Accessory_Window Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu. 3. In the Open dialog box, double-click BOLT.PRT. 4. Notice the component is located in the main graphics window. 5. In the dashboard, click Show In Separate Window . 6. Notice that the BOLT.PRT is now in both the graphics window and the docked accessory window.
Fo r
8. In the accessory window, zoom in on BOLT.PRT. 9. Reorient BOLT.PRT and select the flat surface.
10. Select the flat PLATE.PRT surface to create the Normal constraint. 11. In the dashboard, edit the Constraint Type to Coincident .
Module 19 | Page 50
PT
In
7. Notice that the BOLT.PRT model tree displays at the bottom of the existing model tree pane.
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
12. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT. 13. Select the upper hole surface on SHAFT.PRT to create the Coincident constraint. 14. Click Complete Component .
16. In the Open dialog box, double-click BOLT.PRT. 17. Notice that the BOLT.PRT displays in both the graphics window and the docked accessory window. 18. In the dashboard, click Show In Assembly Window to toggle it off.
21. Select the flat PLATE.PRT surface to create the Normal constraint.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
19. Notice that BOLT.PRT now only displays in the accessory window.
te rn
Module 19 | Page 51
al
U se
nl y
23. Select the shaft on BOLT.PRT. 24. Select the lower hole surface on SHAFT.PRT to create the Coincident constraint.
25. In the dashboard, click Show In Assembly Window to toggle it on. 26. In the dashboard, click Show In Separate Window it off. to toggle .
Fo r
Module 19 | Page 52
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
20
U se O te rn al
Module 20 | Page 1
Many product designs include both static and dynamic components. Creo Parametric enables you to assemble dynamic components using several connection types. In this module, you learn how to assemble components using connections and how to simulate motion.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand connection theory. Drag connected components. Assemble components using Slider, Pin, and Cylinder connections. Analyze collision detection settings.
In
nl y
Fo r
Creating Connections
The procedure to create a Joint constraint is similar to the procedure to create constraints between fixed assembled components. Perform the following steps to create a Joint constraint: Assemble a component into the assembly. Click the Connections list in the dashboard. Select the connection type. Select the appropriate references. in the dashboard to convert
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
In
te rn
Figure 2 Viewing a Snapshot Figure 3 Viewing a Second Snapshot
Fo r
and then select a part model. You can select edges, Components points, axes, datum planes, or surfaces to initiate the dragging movement. The components move according to the applied connections. The selected entity is always positioned as close as possible to the cursor location, while the remaining components stay connected to each other. To quit dragging, you can either middle-click to return the components to their original position, or click to leave the components at their current position. The default option when dragging components is Point Drag, as shown in Figure 1. You can also select Body Drag.
Creating Snapshots
After moving connected components to a desired position, you can create snapshots of that particular location in the graphics window. Snapshots enable you to return the assembly components to a particular position. You can create multiple snapshots and quickly move the assembly to specific positions by activating each snapshot.
2012 PTC Module 20 | Page 3
PT
al
U se
nl y
Snapshot
Fo r
4. Click the corner of CRANK_4.PRT again and move the connected components until ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the right. Click again to stop the motion. 5. In the Drag dialog box, click Take Snapshot .
Module 20 | Page 4
PT
2. Click the corner of CRANK_4.PRT and move the connected components until ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the left. Click again to stop the motion.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. Move the cursor in a circular motion to view the motion created by the connections.
nl y
2. Click Drag Components from the Component group and select the lower-right corner of CRANK_4.PRT.
6. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot1 to activate it. Notice that ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the left. 7. In the Drag dialog box, double-click Snapshot2 to activate it. Notice that ROD_2_4.PRT is fully extended to the right. 8. Click Close in the Drag dialog box. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 20 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 20 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Rotation Reference
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
7. Select datum plane RIGHT on BLADE_2.PRT and datum plane RIGHT on HOUSING.PRT for the Rotation of the Slider connection.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
6. Select datum axis A_2 on BLADE_2.PRT and datum axis A_3 on HOUSING.PRT as the Axis alignment of the Slider connection.
U se
3. Select Assemble from the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group.
nl y
Module 20 | Page 7
12. Move the cursor to notice the range of motion created by the Slider connection. Click to place BLADE_2.PRT. 13. Click Close in the Drag dialog box.
Fo r
Module 20 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
from the Component group and select
al
2012 PTC
U se
O
.
nl y
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Translation Reference
Fo r
2012 PTC
al
Module 20 | Page 9
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. from 2. Select Assemble the Assemble types drop-down menu in the Component group. 3. In the Open dialog box, select ROD_2_2.PRT, and click Open. 4. Reorient the component approximately as shown.
Fo r
7. Select the back side surface of ROD_2_2.PRT and the front surface of BLADE_2_2.PRT for the Translation of the Pin connection. 8. Click Complete Component .
Module 20 | Page 10
PT
6. Select the small hole surface on ROD_2_2.PRT and the cylindrical surface on BLADE_2_2.PRT as the Axis alignment of the Pin connection.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
9. Click Drag Components from the Component group and select ROD_2_2.PRT. 10. Move the cursor to notice the range of motion created by the Pin connection. Also notice the motion of BLADE_2_2.PRT due to the Slider connection. Click to place ROD_2_2.PRT.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 20 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
te rn Fo r
Module 20 | Page 12
Cylinder connections require only one constraint rule that limits their degrees of freedom about a specific axis. The constraint rule is: Axis Alignment The axes or cylindrical surfaces you select as references determine the axis of free rotation and translation. Cylinder connections are often used in situations in which you do not want to overconstrain a component. In the hedge trimmer example, a Pin connection between the connecting rod and the blade prevents the connecting rod from sliding in and out of the journal. As a result, a Cylinder connection is suitable to constrain the other end of the connecting rod to the crankshaft.
PT
Cylinder connections are used to enable both rotation and translation about a specific axis. For example, aligning a pen cap over a pen is a Cylinder connection. While holding the pen cap aligned with the pen, you can rotate the pen cap and slide it along the axis of the pen.
In
al
Figure 1 Axis Alignment
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of ROD_2_3.PRT. 3. In the dashboard, select the Placement tab. Click New Set. Select the new Pin connection, and edit its type to Cylinder . 4. Select the large hole surface on ROD_2_3.PRT and the cylindrical journal surface on CRANK_3.PRT as the Axis alignment of the Cylinder connection. 5. Click Complete Component
In
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
.
Module 20 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Creo Parametric provides real-time collision detection, enabling you to check for interferences between parts as you drag a mechanism assembly through its range of motion. Collision detection, by default, is turned off when you drag components in a mechanism assembly. However, you can enable two different types of collision detection: Global Collision Detection Checks for any type of collision in the entire assembly. Partial Collision Detection You specify the components between which to check for interference. There is also an option to sound a warning when a collision occurs between components. The component areas that interfere with each other highlight, as shown in Figure 1. You can then resolve the interferences by modifying the models. In Figure 2, the housing was modified such that the connecting rod no longer interferes. To enable Stop When Colliding or Push Objects on Collision functionality, you must set the config.pro option enable_advance_collision to yes.
Module 20 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Interference Fixed
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Properties\Collision_Detect Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select HOUSING_5.PRT. 3. Click the Model Display drop-down menu and click Component Display Style > Transparent. 4. Orient to the 3D2 view orientation. 5. Zoom in on HOUSING_5.PRT.
11. Notice the highlighted interfering geometry. The HOUSING_5.PRT is too short. Click Close in the Drag dialog box.
Fo r
12. Select HOUSING_5.PRT, right-click, and select Activate. 13. In the graphics window, select Extrude 1. 14. Right-click and select Edit.
2012 PTC
PT
10. Click Drag Components and drag the components by selecting the hex-shaped geometry.
In
te rn
8. In the Collision Detection Settings dialog box, select Global Collision Detection and verify that the Sound Warning on Collision check box is selected. Click OK.
al
U se
Module 20 | Page 15
nl y
15. Edit the 51 dimension to 56 and . click Regenerate 16. In the model tree, right-click COLLISION_DETECT.ASM and select Activate.
17. Click Drag Components and drag the components by selecting the hex-shaped geometry again. The collision is no longer present because the interference has been fixed. Click Close. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 20 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
21
U se O te rn al
Module 21 | Page 1
Exploding Assemblies
Module Overview
Explode states enable you to capture assembly parts in various states of assembly and disassembly. You can easily reference these states when creating drawings and assembly or disassembly procedures. In this module, you learn how to create assembly explode states and create explode lines between exploded components. You also learn how to animate explode states.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create and manage explode states. Create explode lines between exploded components. Animate explode states.
In
nl y
You can use explode states to quickly reposition components in 3-D space and save these assembly or disassembly views by selecting the view managers Explode tab. You can select explode states when placing a drawing view or use them to create assembly or disassembly procedures. You can toggle an explode state on or off, and you can also create multiple explode states.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Exploded Assembly
U se
nl y
Toggle Explode Location Toggles the placement location of the selected component between its original location and its current location. You can select this option to reset a component's position. Movement Reference Specifies the reference to define the direction of movement for the selected component. This reference is required when rotating components, but is optional for translating components when you require a direction other than the three default directions. Available reference types include all datum features, planar surfaces, edges, and vertices. from the dashboard, which enables you You can also click View Plane to explode components parallel to the screen in the assembly's current orientation.
Exploding Components
You can also specify the Motion increment of the component you are exploding. The default Motion increment value is Smooth, which enables the components to explode smoothly and enables you to drop them at any relative position. You can also increment values of 1, 5, or 10 by selecting the desired value from the drop-down list, or you can type in your own increment value. The units used for the increment value are the same units used in the assembly. For example, if the assembly units are measured in millimeters, when you select an increment value of 10, the component explodes in 10 millimeter increments, snapping to each increment.
Fo r
PT
When you select a component for translation, the 3D Dragger displays at that location along with a coordinate system. You can cursor over any of the three 3D Dragger axis arrows and drag to explode the component in that direction. When you select a component for rotation, a drag arrow displays. You can use the drag arrow to rotate the component about the Movement Reference.
In
te rn
Move one component Move a single component in an assembly or sub-assembly by selecting it. Move many components Press CTRL and select multiple components to move them all at once. Move with Children In the Options tab of the dashboard, you can select the Move with Children check box. This option enables you to select a component to explode, and move its children with it.
al
U se
Once the Motion type and Movement Reference have been defined, you can select the components you wish to explode. There are three methods available:
nl y
Multiple occurrences of the same sub-assembly can have different explode states.
Fo r
Module 21 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
View\Explode_States Task 1:
4. Notice the note in the graphics window. 5. Click Edit Position from the Model Display group. 6. In the dashboard, verify that Translate Component selected. 7. Select SHAFT.PRT. is
Fo r
9. Select ARM.PRT.
10. Cursor over the green Y-axis arrow and drag upwards to explode the component.
2012 PTC
PT
8. Cursor over the red X-axis arrow and drag upwards to explode the component.
In
te rn
al
Module 21 | Page 5
U se
3. In the View Manager dialog box, select the Explode tab. Click New and press ENTER to accept the default name. Click Close.
nl y
from
11. In the dashboard, select the Options tab and select the Move with Children check box. 12. Select COVER.PRT, cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag upwards. Notice that the bolts explode with it. 13. Select the pattern leader BOLT.PRT, cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag upwards to explode all three bolt members. 14. In the graphics window, right-click and select Motion Reference. 15. Select the front, planar surface of BODY.PRT. 16. Select PLATE.PRT, cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag to the left. 17. In the Options tab, clear the Move with Children check box. 18. Select the References tab. Right-click the Movement Reference and select Remove. Click in the Components to Move collector. 19. Select one BOLT.PRT, press CTRL, and select the second BOLT.PRT member. 20. Cursor over the red X-axis arrow, and drag the bolts to the left.
Fo r
Module 21 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from
22. Click View Manager , right-click Exp0001, and select Save. 23. Click OK in the Save Display Elements dialog box. 24. Click Close from the view manager. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 21 | Page 7
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
You can create cosmetic explode lines to display the alignment of exploded components when the assembly is unexploded. Explode lines automatically update to reflect position changes made to the exploded components they reference. Creating new explode lines or editing existing explode lines modifies the explode state. You can save the modified explode state in the view manager Explode tab. You can create an explode line in an explode state by specifying a reference on two different components. You can select surfaces, edges, or curves as references on the components. The explode line is then created between the two selected references and displays in the model tree as an Offset Line. Explode lines are also known as Offset lines.
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Explode Lines in Exploded Assembly
al
U se
nl y
Edit the explode line length You can extend or shorten the ends of an explode line by dragging the handle at the desired end. Add Jogs Select the explode line location where you want to create the jog, right-click, and select Add Jog. You can then drag the jog to its desired location. You can delete the jog by right-clicking its handle and selecting Remove Jog.
You can remove explode lines by selecting the explode line and clicking Remove Explode Line from the Explode Lines tab in the dashboard. You can also right-click and select Remove Explode Line. Press CTRL to select multiple explode lines at once.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 21 | Page 9
View\Explode_Lines Task 1:
Fo r
8. Click Apply in the Cosmetic Offset Line dialog box to create the explode line.
9. Select the inner hole surface on COVER_2.PRT and the outer surface on the corresponding BOLT_2.PRT, and click Apply to create the explode line. 10. Create explode lines for the other two BOLT_2.PRT components.
Module 21 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. Select the inner hole surface on COVER_2.PRT and the outer surface on the SHAFT_2.PRT tip, and click Apply to create the explode line.
Fo r
17. Click Close in the Cosmetic Offset Line dialog box and click Complete Feature from the dashboard. from
19. In the View Manager dialog box, select the Explode tab. Right-click Exp0001, select Save, and click OK. Click Close.
PT
16. Query-select the back surface of PLATE_2.PRT in approximately the center and click Apply.
In
te rn
14. Create another explode line for the second plate bolt.
al
13. Select the upper bolt hole surface on PLATE_2.PRT and the corresponding outer surface on BOLT_2.PRT, and click Apply to create the explode line.
U se
nl y
12. Select the inner hole surface on BODY_2.PRT and the outer surface on SHAFT_2.PRT, and click Apply to create the explode line.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Animation Following the Explode Sequence
al
U se
nl y
Explode lines appear at the end of the animation when exploding, and display until the end of the animation while unexploding.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 21 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
View\Explode_Animate Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click File > Options. 3. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Entity Display category. In the Assembly display settings section, notice that the Show animation while exploding the assembly check box is selected. Type 10 as the value for Maximum seconds an animation takes between explode states. Click OK > No. 4. Click Exploded View from the Model Display group.
Fo r
Module 21 | Page 14
PT
6. Notice that the explode lines appear at the end of the sequence.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
again.
8. Notice that all components unexplode at once. 9. Notice that the explode lines display until the end of the sequence.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 21 | Page 15
11. In the Creo Parametric Options dialog box, select the Entity Display category. In the Assembly display settings section, select the Follow explode sequence check box. Click OK.
al
U se
nl y
again.
Fo r
Module 21 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
22
U se O te rn al
Module 22 | Page 1
Drawings are used for documenting the production design of parts and assembly models. They typically contain two-dimensional and three-dimensional model views, as well as dimensions, notes, and Bills of Materials. Drawings are frequently used in the manufacture of product designs. This module focuses on the creation of drawings and the layout of drawing views. There are two methods for creating drawings. In the first method, you manually place views onto a drawing. In the second method, you use a drawing template to automatically populate the drawing with predefined information. Typically, a combination of these methods is used, which involves manually placing views on drawings that were started using a drawing template.
After completing this module, you will be able to: Analyze drawing concepts and theory, as well as basic 2-D orientation skills. Create new drawings manually and apply formats. Use the drawing tree. Create new drawings using drawing templates. Manage drawing sheets. Add drawing models to a drawing. Create, orient, and modify drawing views including general, projection, cross-section, detailed, and auxiliary. Create assembly and exploded views.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Objectives
In
nl y
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 2
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
To view specific areas of a drawing, you can pan and zoom the drawing using a combination of keyboard and mouse functions, as shown in the following table. Orientation Pan Keyboard and Mouse Selection
Zoom + Cursor over the area of interest before zooming in. The zoom function uses the cursor position as its area of focus. You can also zoom by using the scroll
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 3
te rn
Figure 3 Zooming in on the Title Block
al
U se
nl y
wheel. To control the level of zoom, press a designated key while using the scroll wheel, as shown in the following table: Zoom Level Zoom Keyboard and Mouse Selection
In addition to using keyboard and mouse combinations, the following additional drawing 2-D orientation options are available: Refit Refits the entire drawing sheet in the graphics window. Change sheets You can change drawing sheets in a multi-sheet drawing. The sheet numbers display under the graphics window as individual tabs. To change sheets, you can select the tab which corresponds with the desired sheet. Often your company's title block displays the drawing sheet number in a multi-sheet drawing, as shown in Figure 3.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
In
Fo r
You can create new drawings within Creo Parametric either by clicking File from the Quick Access toolbar, selecting the > New, or by clicking New Drawing option, and then editing the drawing Name. You must also specify whether to use a default template. This topic focuses on drawing creation when a default template is not used. You must specify the Default Model to be used in the drawing. The Default Model is the model that is used in your drawing when you start placing views. You can add additional models to the drawing at a later time. If you have models open in Creo Parametric when a new drawing is created, the model that is in the active window at the time of drawing creation is automatically set as the Default Model. You must also specify the drawing Orientation, whether Portrait, Landscape, or Variable. If you select Portrait or Landscape, you can choose between numerous standard, predefined drawing sizes. If you select Variable, you must specify the desired drawing size width and height, in units of either inches or millimeters. A C-size drawing is shown in Figure 1.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 2 Drawing with Format
al
Module 22 | Page 5
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
You can decide whether to add a format at the time of drawing creation or at a later time. To add a format to a drawing after the drawing has been created, you can either click Sheet Setup from the Document group in the Layout tab, or you can double-click the drawing size that is displayed along the bottom of the graphics window. You can then select your desired format, or replace an existing format with a different format.
nl y
Drawing\Formats_Applying Task 1:
Fo r
PT
4. Notice the text below the sheet that displays the drawing scale, type, name, and drawing size.
6. In the Sheet Setup dialog box, edit the Format from A Size to C Size in the drop-down list. Click OK.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
from the Document group in the Layout tab.
2. In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse to specify the Default Model. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT and click Open. Select Empty for the template, if necessary Edit the Standard Size to A in the drop-down list. Click OK.
al
Module 22 | Page 7
U se
1. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar. In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type. Edit the Name to new_drawing. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.
nl y
7. Double-click the SIZE : C tag at the bottom of the graphics window. 8. In the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the C Size format to activate the field. Click Browse from the drop-down list. In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory. Select C_FORMAT_ GENERIC.FRM and click Open. Click OK. 9. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. 10. Notice that the text at the bottom has updated again. Also notice the new format which contains a border and title block. 11. Zoom in on the title block.
12. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
When you create a drawing, the first view added to a drawing is a general view. A general view is usually the first of a series of views to be created. When you create or edit a general view in a drawing, the Drawing View dialog box appears displaying the View Type category. You can edit the following attributes of a general view in the View Type category: View name The view name displays in the drawing tree and when you cursor over the view in the graphics window. It also displays in the layer tree when selecting the active layer object. View type If there is more than one general view on the drawing, you can edit the view type from general to a different view type. This option is only available when editing an existing general drawing view. View orientation Determines the orientation of the view in the drawing. You can set the view orientation using model view names that are created in the model itself. These are the same model views that are found in the model's saved view list and view manager. A general view can be placed in any orientation.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 9
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 General View Type
nl y
3. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box. 4. Click in the middle of the drawing to place the view. 5. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the View name to SHAFT_SIDE. 6. Notice the default view of the model. Also notice the model views available in the Drawing View dialog box. The available views were generated from the model.
7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Model view name FRONT, and click Apply.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 10
PT
Click Repaint . Select Model view name LEFT and click Apply. Select Model view name RIGHT and click OK.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from the Model 2. Click General Views group in the Layout tab.
Task 2:
1. Right-click in the drawing and select Insert General View. 2. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box. 3. Click in the upper-right of the drawing to place the view. 4. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the View name to SHAFT_DEFAULT. 5. Notice the model views available in the Drawing View dialog box.
6. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Model view name 3D, and click Apply.
Fo r
7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Model view name Default Orientation, and click OK.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 22 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 12
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Drawing Tree: Annotate Tab
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the Layout tab from the ribbon, if necessary. Notice that the active sheet is shown in the drawing tree. Also notice that the views are shown in the drawing tree.
The views in this drawing were renamed to be easily recognizable in the drawing tree. 3. Right-click FRONT and view the available options. 4. Select Auxiliary to locate this view.
5. Select the Table tab from the ribbon. Notice the drawing tree updates.
Fo r
6. Select Table 3 to locate it. Right-click Table 3 and view the available options.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 22 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
7. Select the Annotate tab from the ribbon. Notice the drawing tree updates. 8. Expand the FRONT node and the Annotations node in the drawing tree. Notice the various shown and erased dimensions. 9. Select the HOLE_DIA dimension to locate it. Right-click and view the available options for this shown dimension.
Fo r
12. Select the CYL axis to locate it. Right-click and view the available options for this axis.
Module 22 | Page 14
PT
11. Expand the RIGHT node and the Datums node in the drawing tree. Notice the various shown and erased axes.
In
te rn
10. Select the d21 dimension to locate it. Right-click and view the available options for this erased dimension.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Drawings contain at least one sheet. When additional sheets are created, you use the sheet tabs and sheet dialog boxes to manage multiple sheets.
Fo r
You can access the most common sheet functions from the sheet tabs area, located below the drawing status text. Using the sheet tabs, you can:
Preview a sheet by placing the cursor over the tab. Select a sheet tab to activate the desired sheet. Create and Delete sheets. Reorder the sheets by dragging a sheet tab. Rename a sheet. Right-click a sheet for additional options. Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Move or Copy from the Document group. The Move or Copy Sheet dialog box Sheets enables you to: Move the current sheet to the selected location. Insert a copy of the current sheet to the selected location.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 15
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Sheet Setup Dialog Box
U se
nl y
Within the Layout tab of the drawing ribbon, you can click Sheet Setup from the Document group. The Sheet Setup dialog box enables you to: Specify the drawing Format. Change sheet Size. Change sheet Orientation.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. Click New Sheet from the Document group. Press ENTER to leave the name blank. Double-click the Sheet 3 sheet tab, type NEW, and press ENTER. Drag the NEW sheet tab to reorder it as sheet 2 of 3. 8. Double-click the Sheet 1 sheet tab, type CYL, and press ENTER. 9. Right-click the Sheet 2 sheet tab and view the available options. Select Rename, type ANG and press ENTER.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 22 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
10. Select the NEW sheet tab to activate it. 11. From the Document group in the ribbon, click Move or Copy Sheets . Select ANG, if necessary. Select the Create a copy check box. Click OK and press ENTER to create Sheet 4.
12. Select the Sheet 4 sheet tab to activate it. Right-click and select Delete. Click Yes.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 18
PT
14. From the Document group in the ribbon, click Sheet Setup . Select the current format to activate the drop-down list. Select Browse from the drop-down list. Select a.frm, then click Open and OK. Click Remove All and Yes.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Different Models on Different Drawing Sheets
Fo r
The system adds information to the drawing from the active model. The active model is displayed at the bottom of the graphics window and in the model tree. You can switch between drawing models and set the active one icon from the model tree, by by clicking the Set Active Model/Rep from the Model Views group of the Layout tab in clicking Drawing Models the drawing ribbon, or by right-clicking in the drawing and selecting Drawing Models. You can also right-click a selected view of a drawing model that is not the active model and select Set/Add Drawing Model or double-click the active component name at the bottom of the graphics window.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
However, you must click the Drawing Models icon and use the subsequent menu manager to add new models. Figure 2 displays the menu manager. You must also delete drawing models from the drawing through the view manager. You can only delete a drawing model if there are no views using it, however, and each drawing must contain at least one drawing model.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 20
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. In the menu manager, click Add Model. 6. Select CYLINDER_BRACKET. PRT and click Open. At the bottom of the graphics window, notice that CYLINDER_BRACKET is now the active model.
PT
9. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. Sheet number 2 is added to the drawing. Notice the model name in the title block.
Fo r
10. Click General from the Model Views group in the Layout tab. 11. Click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box. 12. Click in the drawing to place the general view. 13. In the Drawing View dialog box, select FRONT as the Model view name and click OK.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 21
In
te rn
al
U se
from 4. Click Drawing Models the Model Views group of the Layout tab.
nl y
2. At the bottom of the graphics window, notice that SHAFT is the active model.
Task 2:
2. In the menu manager, click Add Model. 3. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT and click Open. At the bottom of the graphics window notice that ANGLE_GUIDE is now the active model and that ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT displays in the model tree. 4. Click New Sheet .
6. Click General
Task 3:
Fo r
1. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select SHAFT.PRT > Master Rep. 2. The SHAFT.PRT is now the active model. 3. Click General and click OK in the Select Combined State dialog box.
4. Click in the drawing to place the general view, and click OK. 5. De-select the drawing view. 6. Right-click in the drawing and select Drawing Models. 7. In the menu manager, click Set Model > CYLINDER_BRACKET > Done/Return. This completes the procedure.
Module 22 | Page 22 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
8. Click in the drawing to place the general view, and click OK.
al
U se
5. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. Sheet number 3 is added to the drawing. Notice the model name in the title block.
nl y
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Example General View
Fo r
You can either insert projection views by clicking Projection from the Model Views group in the Layout tab, or by selecting a drawing view, right-clicking, and selecting Insert Projection View. In either case, you must specify the parent view from which the projection view projects. When you create a projection view, it is assigned a default name based upon the direction of projection.
2012 PTC
al
U se
O
Module 22 | Page 23
nl y
The default projection type for projection views is Third Angle. If desired, the projection type can be changed to First Angle. You can also project 3-D general views.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 24
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Drawing_Views\Projection Task 1:
2. Select the shaft_side drawing view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View.
Fo r
3. Move the cursor up and click to place the new projection view.
2012 PTC
PT
In
Task 2:
te rn
5. Move the cursor to the right and click to place the new projection view.
al
Module 22 | Page 25
4. Select the front view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View.
U se
3. Select the front view, move the cursor up, and click to place the new projection view. Notice the orange rectangle that snaps to your cursor until you click to place the view.
nl y
from the 2. Click Projection Model Views group of the Layout tab.
4. Select the shaft_side drawing view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View. 5. Move the cursor to the left and click to place the second new projection view. 6. Select the shaft_side view, right-click, and select Insert Projection View.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
7. Move the cursor to the right and click to place the third new projection view.
In
te rn
Creating Cross-Section Views
You can add cross-sections to drawing views in the Sections category of the Drawing View dialog box. When you specify that you want to add a section to a drawing view, a list of available cross-sections displays in a drop-down list. This list of available cross-sections originates from the 3-D model itself. You can only select valid cross-sections for a given drawing view. A valid cross-section is one that is parallel to the screen when placed in the view. A cross-section displays in a drawing view with a set of Xhatching. You can edit the following attributes of the Xhatching lines: Spacing For spacing, you can select either Half or Double from the menu manger. Each time you select half or double, the spacing between Xhatching lines halves or doubles, respectively. You can also type a spacing value for the Xhatching lines. In the upper image of Figure 2, the spacing has been changed to a value of 0.15. In the lower image, the spacing has been changed to a value of 0.6. Angle For angle, you can select a Xhatching line angle in 30 or 45 degree increments between 0 and 150 degrees. You can also type an
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 27
Fo r
PT
al
Figure 3 Added Arrows to Perpendicular View
U se
nl y
angle value. In the lower image of Figure 2, the Xhatching line angle has been modified from 45 degrees to 135 degrees. In addition to creating a section view, you can optionally add section arrows to any view that is perpendicular to the section view. In Figure 3, the arrows were added to the drawing view. The direction in which the arrows point indicates the direction of material to maintain in the section view. You can toggle this material direction if desired.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Drawing_Views\Section Task 1:
5. Click Close from the View Manager. 6. Click Close drawing. to return to the
Fo r
10. In the section view, select the Xhatching, right-click, and select Properties. 11. In the menu manager, click Spacing > Half > Done.
2012 PTC
PT
8. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the Sections category and select the 2D cross-section option. Click Add Section and select A from the drop-down list. Click OK.
In
7. Select the lower, center, shaft_side view. Right-click and select Properties.
te rn
Module 22 | Page 29
al
U se
3. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and select the Sections tab.
nl y
13. Select the cross-section view, right-click, and select Add Arrows. 14. Select the top projection view to place the arrows. 15. Select the arrows, right-click, and select Flip Material Removal Side.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
16. Right-click and select Flip Material Removal Side to toggle the material removal direction back to the original direction.
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
You must define the following when creating a detailed view: Location Select a location on the drawing where the resulting detailed view is to be placed. Similar to other views, you can always move the drawing view at a later time. Spline Select a center point in an existing drawing view that you want to enlarge in the detailed view. You must then sketch a spline around the area of the view that you want enlarged in the resulting detailed view. You do not have to be concerned about sketching a perfect shape because the spline is automatically converted into a boundary shape. The default boundary shape is a Circle, although you can modify the boundary to an Ellipse, Horizontal/Vertical ellipse, an ASME 94 Circle, or keep it as a Spline. In Figure 3, the boundary shape is a Circle. You may also define the following optional items when creating a detailed view: View name Provide a different detailed View name. The View name of the detailed view displays in the detail note, as shown in Figure 3. The View name also displays under the detailed view, as shown in Figure 2.
2012 PTC Module 22 | Page 31
Fo r
PT
A detailed view is a small portion of a model shown enlarged in another view. A reference note and border is included on the parent view as part of the detailed view setup. The orientation of the detailed view is the same as its parent, but the detail view is typically assigned a much larger scale than the parent view.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Scale You can specify the scale of the resulting detailed view. Xhatching (if applicable) If you create a detailed view for a drawing view that contains a cross-section, you can optionally edit the Xhatching to specify a view other than the parent cross-section view by selecting Det Indep from the menu manager when editing the Xhatching properties. The default detailed view Xhatching is governed by the parent.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Drawing_Views\Detailed Task 1:
Fo r
6. Select a point in the top left of the drawing to place the detail view. 7. Click in the background to de-select the view.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 22 | Page 33
al
4. Click points to create a spline curve around the SHAFT.PRT end. Do NOT close the spline curve when sketching it. Instead, leave a gap.
U se
3. In the section view, select the center point for the detailed view.
nl y
from the 2. Click Detailed Model Views group in the Layout tab.
8. Select the detailed view note. 9. Double-click the 3.000 scale on the view, type 4, and press ENTER. 10. Click in an empty area of the graphics window to de-select the scale value.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
You may also edit the View name to a more meaningful name, as well as add projection arrows, as shown in the figure. The View name displays when projection arrows are created. You can also move projection arrows individually with respect to the auxiliary view. Projection arrows can be displayed as either single or double arrows.
2012 PTC
PT
An Auxiliary view is a special type of projection view. Instead of being projected orthogonal, the auxiliary view is projected perpendicular to a selected planar reference (a datum plane), or projected along the direction of an axis. The resulting auxiliary view can be moved only along its angle of projection. In Figure 1, the datum plane is selected as the projection reference.
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 An Auxiliary View
Module 22 | Page 35
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 2 Drawing Created using a Template
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
For example, you can create a template for a machined part versus a cast part. The machined part template could define the views that are typically placed for machined part drawings, set the view display of each view (for example, show hidden lines), place company standard machining notes, and automatically create snap lines for placing dimensions.
al
U se
You can use drawing templates to define the layout of views, set view display, define tables, place symbols and notes, show dimensions, and create snap lines. A drawing template can also be customized with your company formats and standards. This enables you to automatically create drawings in a fraction of the time it would take to sketch them.
nl y
Basic information Includes information that comprises a drawing but is not dependent on the drawing model, such as sheet size, notes, symbols, and formats. This information is copied from the template into the new drawing. 2. Representative view symbols Contains the options used to configure drawing views and the actions that are performed on that view. The instructions in the template are used to build a new drawing that references a model to place various views in specific orientations and view states. 3. Parametric note Notes that update to new drawing model parameters and dimension values. When a drawing is created from a template, the parametric notes update with the proper information from the models used in the drawing.
1.
Module 22 | Page 37
Drawing\Templates Task 1:
Fo r
5. In the New Drawing dialog box, notice that the Default Model is CYLINDER_BRACKET.PRT because it is still in session. You can browse and specify a different Default Model. Select Use template. Click Browse, select DRAWING_TEMPLATE.DRW, and click Open. Click OK.
6. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. 7. Zoom in on the title block. 8. Pan to the different drawing views, zooming in and out as desired. 9. Click Refit .
Module 22 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
4. Click New from the ribbon. In the New dialog box, select Drawing as the Type. Edit the Name to new_drawing. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.
al
U se
3. Click Close
O
2012 PTC
nl y
10. Notice the three template view names in the drawing tree.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 22 | Page 39
al
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
When a view is placed on a drawing, there are a variety of operations that you can perform to change the display of the view. In most cases, you can modify a view that has already been placed on a drawing. The following are different types of operations that you can perform on views in a drawing.
Moving Views
By default, views cannot be moved when they are placed on a drawing. They are locked to the drawing. You can unlock drawing views for movement in the drawing by selecting a view, right-clicking, and toggling the Lock View Movement option, or by clicking Lock View Movement from the Document group. The toggle for locking view movement is a system setting rather than an individual drawing view setting. If one view is unlocked, all views are unlocked. Once views are unlocked, a drawing view can be moved according to any parent/child relationships that exist between views. Since a general view has no parent views, it can be moved anywhere on the drawing. When a general
Module 22 | Page 40 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Modifying View Properties
al
U se
nl y
view is moved, any child views move accordingly. A child view, on the other hand, can only move according to the angle of projection from the parent view.
Deleting Views
You can delete views from a drawing. All items associated with the deleted drawing view, including child views, are also deleted. For example, if you delete a general view that has three child projection views, the child projection views must also be deleted. The system highlights child views that are to be deleted, as shown in Figure 1.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
The following are two types of drawing view properties that can be modified:
Module 22 | Page 41
Drawing_Views\Modifying Task 1:
Task 2:
PT
In
6. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the Display style to Hidden and click OK.
Fo r
3. In the bottom left of the graphics window, double-click the scale, edit it to 1.25, and press ENTER. 4. Click in the background to de-select the scale. 5. Press CTRL and select the two 2-D views. 6. Right-click and select Properties. 7. In the Drawing View dialog box, edit the Tangent edges display style to Phantom and click OK.
Module 22 | Page 42
te rn
and select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT
al
2012 PTC
4. With the general front view still selected, press CTRL and select the two projection views.
U se
3. With the front view still selected, click and drag down and to the left. Notice that the two projection view children move along with the general view parent.
nl y
2. Select the front general view, right-click, and clear Lock View Movement.
Task 3:
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it. 2. Select the top view and move it further up in the drawing.
5. Click Undo
Fo r
8. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the View Display category, edit the Display style to Shading, and click OK.
2012 PTC
PT
7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the Scale category, select the Custom scale option, edit the value to 2, and click Apply.
In
6. Select the 3-D general shaft_default view, right-click, and select Properties.
te rn
Module 22 | Page 43
al
U se
3. Select the lower, center shaft_side view, right-click, and select Delete. The three child projection views highlight in purple boxes.
nl y
Fo r
Similar to creating part drawings, you can also create assembly drawings that display assembly views. When creating a new drawing, simply set an assembly as the default model or add it as a drawing model to an existing drawing. With an assembly set as the active model, you can add views of the entire assembly without having to add each of its individual components. If your company requires that assembly drawings display individual components on different sheets, you must add each component as a drawing model. When placing any view, you are prompted to select a combined state. A combined state is a combination of various state representations created in the 3-D model using the All tab of the view manager. For example, you can create a combined state in the 3-D model that consists of a specific orientation, a specific explode state, and a specific style state. When the combined state is selected, the view displays with all three state representations enabled. For this topic, you should not specify a combined state.
Module 22 | Page 44
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Exploded Assembly View
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 22 | Page 45
al
U se
nl y
Drawing_Views\Exploded Task 1:
Create a new drawing from a template and add an assembly view. , select Drawing, and edit the name to explode_view.
1. Click New
2. Clear the Use default template check box and click OK. 3. In the New Drawing dialog box, click Browse, select VALVE.ASM, and click Open. Select Use template, click Browse, select DRAWING_TEMPLATE. DRW, and click Open. Click OK. 4. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER. 5. Disable all Datum Display types. 6. If necessary, double-click the sheet scale value, edit it to 1, and press ENTER.
Fo r
10. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Default Orientation as the Model view name, and click OK. Insert a drawing sheet and add an exploded assembly view. .
Task 2:
2. In the input window, type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER.
Module 22 | Page 46
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
3. Right-click and select Insert General View. 4. Select No Combined State and click OK. 5. Click near the middle of the drawing to place the view.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 22 | Page 47
8. In the Drawing View dialog box, select the View States category. Select the Explode components in view check box, and select Assembly explode state EXP0001 from the drop-down list. Click OK.
al
U se
7. Click Repaint
nl y
6. In the Drawing View dialog box, select 3D as the Model view name, and click Apply.
Fo r
Module 22 | Page 48
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
23
U se O te rn al
Module 23 | Page 1
Drawing views alone are not typically sufficient for conveying all the information needed to manufacture a given model. In this module, you learn how to display all of the details that manufacturing needs to create production parts. This information includes dimensions, axes, notes, and BOM Balloons.
Objectives
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Analyze annotation concepts and types. Create tables from file. Create BOM balloons. Show, erase, and delete annotations. Clean up and manipulate dimensions. Create driven dimensions. Insert notes. Analyze drawing associativity. Publish drawings.
2012 PTC
PT
In
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
dimension values for part numbers in a common drawing, and cam lift values per degree. BOM Shows components in an assembly and their quantities.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 23 | Page 3
U se
nl y
In
Fo r
You can insert tables from a file. Table files that were previously saved can be reused throughout your organization. You can save your own created tables as files, if desired. To insert a table from a file, click Table From File from the Table group drop-down menu, also located in the Table or select it from the Table group. You then browse to the desired location that contains saved tables, such as your working directory.
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Quick Tables Gallery
al
U se
nl y
Once you have selected your desired quick table, the Select Point dialog box displays, enabling you to specify the reference type to which the table snaps. Options include: Free Point Enables you to select a free point on the drawing. Enables you to specify absolute coordinates Enables you to specify relative coordinates to
Absolute Coordinates to locate the table. Relative Coordinates locate the table. Object or Entity or entity. Vertex
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 23 | Page 5
U se
nl y
3. Query the revision history table and select it. 4. Select Save As Table
5. In the Save Drawing Table dialog box, type rev_hist.tbl as the File name. Click Save. Task 2: Insert a Table from File. from
3. Move the cursor to locate the table near the upper-right corner of the sheet.
Fo r
4. Click to place the table. 5. Click in the background to de-select the table.
Module 23 | Page 6
PT
2. In the Open dialog box, notice that REV_HIST.TBL is available. Select BOM_TABLE.TBL. Click Open.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. Zoom in to view the table. This table was created with a Repeat Region and Report Parameters which enables it to update to the assembly. 7. Click Refit from the In Graphics toolbar.
2. Scroll and select the tooltable. 3. Move the cursor to locate the table near the right side of the sheet.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Module 23 | Page 7
U se
1. Click Table from the Table group and select Quick Tables .
nl y
Task 3:
Fo r
All By View You must select the view on which the balloons display. By Component You must select the desired assembly component on which the balloons display.
Module 23 | Page 8 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Editing BOM Balloon Properties
al
U se
nl y
By Component and View You must select an assembly component in a particular view on which the balloons display. By Record You must select a specific row in a BOM table.
Manipulating Balloons
You can manipulate placed BOM balloons in the drawing. The following options are available: Merge balloons You can nest balloons by clicking Merge Balloons . Detach balloons You can separate balloons by clicking Detach Balloons . . This Split balloons You can split balloons by clicking Split Balloons option enables you to create a copy of a balloon that represents multiple quantities and assign a portion of that quantity to the new copy. Redistribute Quantity You can redistribute balloon quantities by clicking
Select which region to apply settings, if multiple repeat regions are selected. Control the type of balloon. Options include: Simple Circle. Quantity Split Circle. Custom This option requires a custom balloon symbol (*.sym). Set the BOM balloon parameter to use from the repeat region. The default parameter is rpt.index. Set the Reference Balloon Text By default, REF is used.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
You can edit the settings for BOM balloons within the Table Properties dialog box. When a drawing has placed BOM balloons, the BOM Balloons tab activates. You can edit the following properties of BOM balloons:
al
U se
. This option enables you to move a quantity Redistribute Quantity from one balloon to another.
nl y
Module 23 | Page 9
Fo r
6. Select a balloon from the view. 7. Notice that the corresponding table row highlights.
Module 23 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. From the Balloons group, click Create Balloons and select Create Balloons All.
nl y
Task 2:
1. Query the BOM table and select it. 2. Right-click and select Properties. 3. In the Table Properties, notice that the BOM Balloons tab is now available. 4. Select the BOM Balloons tab. Select Quantity Split Circle from the Type drop-down list. Click OK.
Fo r
PT
In
4. Type 3 as the quantity of balloons to remove and press ENTER. 5. Select the edge of the bolt. 6. Select a location for the balloon.
2012 PTC
te rn
from the
Module 23 | Page 11
al
Task 3:
U se
nl y
Task 4:
1. Select the VALVE.ASM from the model tree. 2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Select the bolt pattern, right-click, and select Delete Pattern. 4. Click Close .
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
5. Notice the message window and read its contents. Click Close.
Showing Annotations
Dimensions Driving Dimension Annotation Elements All Driving Dimensions or Strong Driving Dimensions Driven Dimensions, Reference Dimensions, or Ordinate Dimensions Geometric Tolerances Notes Surface Finishes Symbols Datums Set Datum Planes, Set Datum Axes, or Set Datum Targets Axes The Show Model Annotations dialog box is context-sensitive. You can control which annotations display on the drawing and where they display based on how items are selected: Select a model from the model tree Indicates all the selected item types for the model on the drawing. The items may appear in multiple views.
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 13
Fo r
PT
When creating a 2-D drawing, you can select which information from the 3-D model to show in the drawing:
In
When you create a 3-D model, you simultaneously create various items useful for annotating the model in a drawing, such as dimensions and axes.
te rn
al
U se
nl y
When dimensions are shown, the system automatically arranges and spaces them apart. You can then adjust them further manually or by using the Cleanup Dimensions dialog box.
If at any point during drawing creation you decide that you no longer wish to display certain shown items, you can erase or delete them. The differences between these two options are as follows: Erase Temporarily removes the items from the display. The items are shown grayed out in the drawing tree. Erased items can be returned to the display by right-clicking and selecting Unerase. Delete Removes the items from the drawing. Any item originating in the model is retained in the model, and can be shown again. Any item created in the drawing, such as dimensions or notes, are deleted and must be recreated. To erase/delete items, select them in the drawing, and then right-click and select Erase or Delete. You can select items to erase or delete using the following methods: Select an individual item. Press CTRL and select multiple items. Apply a selection filter to quickly select desired items. Select items from the drawing tree.
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 14
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
All of the possible items that can be shown based on the selected tab and selected items display in the drawing in a preview color. You can then select or de-select items to show by using the dialog box or by selecting them from the drawing.
nl y
Select features from the model tree Indicates the selected item types for the selected features on the drawing. The items may appear in multiple views. Select a drawing view Indicates all the selected item types within a particular drawing view. Select features from a particular drawing view Indicates the selected item types for the selected features on the drawing, within the view in which the feature was selected. If an item is not appropriate to that view, it does not display. Select a component in a particular drawing view (Assembly Drawings only) Indicates the selected item types for the selected component on the drawing, within the view in which the component was selected. If an item is not appropriate to that view, it does not display.
Drawing_Details\Show_Erase_Delete Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select the Annotate tab from the ribbon. 3. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group. Select the Dimensions Tab . 4. Select HOLE 2 from the model tree. Notice the dimensions appear in different views.
5. Select HOLE 2 from the top view. Notice the dimensions now only appear in this view. and then 6. Click Select All click Apply in the dialog box.
Fo r
7. Select the front view. To select a view, click within the view boundary, but not on the model geometry.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 23 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
8. Click Select All . Click OK in the dialog box. Notice the dimensions from both views are now shown. Click the background to de-select all selected items.
9. Select the Sheet 2 tab to view sheet 2. 10. Select ANGLE_GUIDE.PRT from the model tree. 11. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group. Click Select All . Clear the d22 and d35 options in the dialog box. Click OK in the dialog box. Click the background to de-select all selected items. Task 2:
Fo r
1. Press CTRL and select the 65 and 32.5 dimensions in the front view. Right-click and select Erase. Click the background to de-select all selected items.
2. Specify Dimension as the selection filter. Drag to select all dimensions in the top view. Right-click and select Erase. Click the background to de-select all selected items.
Module 23 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
3. Expand the Front view Annotations node in the drawing tree. Select d5, right-click, and select Unerase. Select d25, right-click, and select Delete. Select d2, right-click, and select Delete.
Task 3:
Fo r
3. Select the Front view. Select axes A_4, A_5, and A_6 in the dialog box. Click Apply in the dialog box. 4. Select the top view and click Select All Click OK. .
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 23 | Page 17
5. Click Show Model Annotations . Notice the deleted dimensions may be shown again. Select d25 to show it again. Click OK in the dialog box. Click the background to de-select all selected items.
al
U se
nl y
Cleaning Up Dimensions
Creo Parametric can automatically arrange the display of selected dimensions based on controls that you set.
Functions include: Offset dimensions in evenly spaced increments. Create breaks in witness lines. Flip dimension arrows that do not fit between witness lines. Center dimensions between witness lines. Create snap lines.
In
Fo r
Cleaning Up Dimensions
You can use Creo Parametric's clean dimensions functionality to automatically perform the following tasks: Clean dimensions by view, or by selecting individual dimensions. You cannot clean angle or diameter dimensions. Offset dimensions from edges or view boundaries. Space dimensions in even increments. Create breaks in witness lines where they intersect other witness lines or draft entities. Automatically flip arrows on dimensions when they do not fit between witness lines. Center dimensions between witness lines. Figure 1 displays dimensions before the cleanup process has been performed, while Figure 2 displays the cleanup settings applied. Figure 3 displays the dimensions after the cleanup process has been performed.
Module 23 | Page 18 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Dimensions After Cleanup
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 23 | Page 19
al
U se
nl y
4. Accept all default options. 5. Click Apply > Close. 6. Notice the snap lines that were created, and that the dimensions have snapped to these lines. Task 2: Clean up dimensions on sheet 2.
4. In the Clean Dimensions dialog box, edit the Offset to 0.625. Edit the Increment to 0.5. Clear the Create Snap Lines check box. Click Apply > Close. 5. Notice that angle and diameter dimensions are not affected by the dimension cleanup process.
Fo r
PT
3. Click Cleanup Dimensions from the Annotations group in the Annotate tab.
In
2. Select the top view, press CTRL, and select the front view.
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Manipulating Dimensions
When dimensions are placed on a drawing, you typically need to modify them, for reasons such as clarity or to adhere to your company's drawing standards.
You can manipulate dimensions in the following ways: Move (handles) Align Dimensions Flip Arrows Flip Text Move Item to View Edit Attachment
te rn
Figure 2 - Moving Witness Line Endpoint
Fo r
You can manually manipulate a dimension or dimensions to display them in the desired location. The following operations can be manually performed on dimensions: Move dimensions Select a dimension and move it to a different location on the drawing view. When you cursor over various parts of the dimension, the cursor updates to display the type of movements you can make, as shown in Figure 1. The following move options are available: Move Dimension and Text Cursor over the dimension text and drag to move both the dimension and dimension text. You can snap dimension text to be centered about its arrows. Move Dimension Cursor over the dimension leader lines and drag to move the dimension. Move Text Press SHIFT and cursor over the dimension text to move only the dimension text. Again, the system snaps dimension text to be centered about its arrows. Move Witness Line Cursor over the witness line endpoints, and a handle dynamically displays, as shown in Figure 2. Drag the handle to move the witness line.
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 21
PT
Manipulating Dimensions
In
al
Figure 3 Flipping Arrows
U se
nl y
te rn
al
Align Dimensions When dragging dimensions, they automatically snap to align with other dimensions in the view. You can also select multiple dimensions including linear, radial, and angular, and align them to one another. The selected dimensions align to the first dimension selected. Once the dimensions are selected, you can either right-click and select from the Align Dimensions, or you can click Align Dimensions Annotations group in the Annotate tab. Flip Arrows You can flip arrows by right-clicking and selecting Flip Arrows, or you can right-click while dragging a dimension to toggle through the different arrow flipping options. There are four flip options available for radius dimensions, three flip options for diameter dimensions, and two flip options for linear dimensions. In Figure 3, you can view each of the available arrow flipping options for radius dimensions. Flip Text For radial dimensions, you can flip the side of the arrow about which the text displays by selecting the dimension, right-clicking, and selecting Flip Text. Move Item to View Move dimensions from one drawing view to another. You can select the item to move, then either right-click and select Move Item from the Edit group in the Annotate tab. to View, or click Move to View Edit Attachment Specify a new attachment position for certain dimensions, such as a radius dimension. The available new attachment positions highlight in all drawing views and enable you to select a new surface or edge. To edit the attachment, select the dimension, then
U se
right-click and select Edit Attachment, or click Attachment Edit group in the Annotate tab.
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 22
PT
In
nl y
from the
2012 PTC
Fo r
4. With the 51 dimension still selected, right-click and select Flip Arrows, as shown. 5. Right-click and select Flip Arrows to flip them back.
2012 PTC
PT
3. In the top view, select the 51 dimension. Cursor over the dimension text and drag to move both the dimension and text. Press SHIFT, cursor over the dimension text, and drag the dimension downward until it snaps to the center. Cursor over the dimension leader lines and drag to move the entire dimension left or right. Cursor over the lower-left witness line endpoint and drag the handle to the right to move the witness line until it no longer touches the model.
In
te rn
Module 23 | Page 23
al
U se
nl y
6. With the 51 dimension still selected, press CTRL and select the 33 dimension. 7. Right-click and select Align Dimensions. 8. Cursor over the witness lines and move the dimensions until they are properly centered between the other two dimensions.
9. In the top view, select the 12.65 diameter dimension. 10. Cursor over the dimension text and drag to move both the dimension and text. 11. Press SHIFT, cursor over the dimension text, and drag the dimension to the left of its leader. 12. Right-click and select Flip Arrows.
Fo r
17. In the front view, select the R22 dimension. 18. Right-click and select Flip Arrows.
19. Right-click and select Flip Arrows two more times. 20. Move the dimension and text upward until it snaps to the snap line. This completes the procedure.
Module 23 | Page 24
PT
In
14. In the front view, select the 12.65 diameter dimension. from the
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
te rn Fo r
Creating Driven Dimensions
2012 PTC
A driven dimension is created by the user. This type of dimension reports a value based upon the references selected when the dimension is created. The dimension value is driven by the geometry selected, and therefore it is not possible to modify the value of a driven dimension. A driven dimension does not pass back to the model; it appears only within the drawing. A created dimension displays in the drawing tree differently than that of a shown dimension. In Figure 1, the dimensions in the front view are created dimensions, while the dimensions in the top view are shown dimensions. You can create a Standard driven dimension by selecting Dimension - New from the Dimension types drop-down menu in the Annotate References tab, or by right-clicking and selecting Dimension - New References. The system creates a dimension based upon one or two selected references, similar to how you create dimensions in Sketcher. The dimension's witness lines automatically clip to their selected references.
PT
In
al
Figure 1 Created Dimensions versus Shown Dimensions
Module 23 | Page 25
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 26
PT
You can add additional text to a dimension. Text can be added as a prefix or a suffix to the dimension value. For example, if a radius dimension is typical of all radii on the part, you can add the suffix TYP to the dimension.
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
Drawing_Details\Dimensions_Driven Task 1:
3. Navigate to the top view in sheet 1. 4. Notice the 14 dimension that locates the holes from the center of the model. Manufacturing requires a dimension from the model edge. 5. Select the unwanted 14 dimension, right-click, and select Properties.
6. In the Dimension Properties dialog box, select the Display tab. In the Suffix field, type REF. Click OK.
You could also erase or delete the dimension rather than specifying it as a reference dimension.
Fo r
7. Select Dimension - New References from the Dimension types drop-down menu in the Annotations group.
8. Select the right edge of the block and select the hole edge.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 23 | Page 27
al
U se
nl y
9. Middle-click to place the 19 dimension. 10. Click Center from the menu manager. 11. Click Return from the menu manager.
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 28
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
12. In the drawing tree, expand the Annotations node of the top drawing view. Select dimension ad55, if necessary. Notice that both the dimension format and symbol are different.
nl y
Inserting Notes
You can insert notes on a drawing with or without leaders that can contain dimensions.
Note types include: No Leader With Leader ISO Leader On Item Offset Specify Leader Attach Type: On Entity On Surface Free Point Midpoint Intersect
te rn In
Inserting Notes
Fo r
No Leader Creates a free note. With Leader Creates a note with a leader. ISO Leader Creates a note with an ISO leader. On Item Creates a note directly attached to an edge, surface, or datum point. Offset Creates a note relative to a detail entity. If the detail entity is moved, the note moves with it. Notes can be created horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and you can specify the justification as Left, Center, or Right. When you specify that the note has a leader, the following leader attach types are available: On Entity Attaches the leader to selected geometry in a drawing view. On Surface Attaches the leader to a selected location on the surface of a drawing view. Free Point Attaches the leader to a location on the screen that you select. Midpoint Attaches the leader to the midpoint of a specified entity.
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 29
PT
You can insert notes on a drawing to convey additional information. For example, you can insert a note stating that all sharp edges must be broken, as shown in Figure 1.
al
Figure 2 Note with a Leader
U se
nl y
Intersect Attaches the leader to the intersection of two entities. You can also specify the appearance of the attach point of the leader. Options include arrow head, dot, filled dot, no arrow, slash, integral, box, filled box, double arrow, target, half arrow, and triangle. In Figure 2, the note was created with an arrow head leader.
Placing Notes
When you proceed to place a note in the drawing, the Select Point dialog box displays. This dialog box enables you to specify the reference type to which you snap the note. Options include:
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 30
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Free Point
3. Click Note from the Annotations group. 4. In the menu manager, click With Leader > Make Note > On Surface > Arrow Head. 5. Select the cylindrical cut on the 3-D view. 6. Click Done from the menu manager.
Fo r
8. In the input window, type CYLINDER SURFACE. 9. Press ENTER twice to complete the note.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 23 | Page 31
al
U se
nl y
10. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it. 11. In the menu manager, click No Leader > Make Note. 12. Click below the 3-D view to specify the note location. 13. In the input window, type BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES.
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
from the Update group of the Review tab to refresh the Update Sheets display of all views in the active drawing sheet to view a change made at the
2012 PTC Module 23 | Page 33
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Figure 1 BOM and Drawing View Associativity
nl y
model level. You can press CTRL and select multiple tabs across the bottom of the graphics window. If you then click Update Sheets in each of the selected drawing sheets refresh. , all of the views
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Drawing\Associativity Task 1:
Update the pattern member quantity in VALVE.ASM to view the drawing associativity.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. In the model tree, expand Pattern 1 of BOLT.PRT and notice that there are 4 pattern members. 4. In the model tree, right-click VALVE.ASM and select Open. 5. Click Settings and select Tree Filters.
6. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box and click OK. 7. In the model tree, expand COVER.PRT. Right-click Pattern (Hole) and select Edit. Zoom in and edit the number of pattern members from 4 to 3.
Fo r
10. Press CTRL and select Sheet 1, Sheet 2, and Sheet 3 from the sheet tabs area. 11. Click Update Sheets the Update group. from
12. Notice that the BOM quantity of BOLT.PRT has updated and that the view has changed as well.
2012 PTC
PT
Click Regenerate
In
te rn
.
Module 23 | Page 35
al
U se
nl y
Task 2:
Edit the dimension length to view the associativity in the drawing geometry and model.
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it. 2. In the front view, select the 76 dimension. 3. Double-click the 76 dimension and edit it to 102. Click OK. 4. Click Regenerate Active Model from the Update group. 5. Notice that the drawing view geometry has updated. 6. In the model tree, right-click ARM.PRT and select Open. 7. Right-click Protrusion id 21 and select Edit. 8. Edit the length from 102 to 84. 9. Click in the background twice to de-select all geometry.
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 36
PT
11. Notice that the dimension and drawing view geometry have updated to the new length value.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Publishing Drawings
You can create a hard copy deliverable of your drawing.
Send the drawing to a printer or plotter. Export the drawing to a different electronic format. You can print preview the drawing.
Fo r
To create a hard copy deliverable of your drawing, you can click File > Print > Print or File > Print > Quick Print. The Print option launches the Printer Configuration dialog box, enabling you to send the drawing to a printer or plotter. The Quick Print option opens the Microsoft Print Manager, enabling you to send the drawing to a networked Windows printer. You can also click File > Print > Print Settings / Preview to preview and modify settings before printing. When you enter Print Preview mode, the Navigator pane automatically closes, and when you close Print Preview, the Navigator pane automatically restores. Print Preview creates an accurate preview of the selected output type. It takes into account pen table mapping, line styles, line priorities, printer margins, and other settings. To preview the output, you can click Preview from the Print Preview tab in the ribbon. You can also modify the default settings for the specified publish option by clicking Settings
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
satisfied with the display of the drawing in Print Preview, you can click Print directly from the Print Preview tab.
Exporting Drawings
You can also export the drawing to one of many different formats by clicking File > Save As > Export. The following electronic file formats are available: DXF IGES Stheno PDF STEP CGM Medusa DWG TIFF
You can also click File > Save As > Quick Export (*.XXX) to quickly export a copy of the drawing in the same format used in the previous export. The XXX denotes the file format to be created.
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 38
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Settings
from the Configure group in the Export Setup tab of the ribbon.
Of course, any of these exported file formats can also be sent to a printer to generate a hard copy. You can also modify the export settings by clicking
nl y
3. Notice that the Navigator pane automatically collapsed. 4. Click Preview group. from the Finish from .
11. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box. 12. Select the PDF export option. 13. Click Settings
PT
Fo r
14. In the PDF Export Settings dialog box, select Current for the Sheets to be exported. Clear the Open file in Acrobat Reader check box. Click OK. 15. Click Export from the Finish group. 16. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK. 17. Click Close Export Setup .
18. Click File > Save As > Quick Export (*.PDF). 19. Click OK in the dialog box. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC
In
10. In the Save a Copy dialog box, accept the defaults and click OK.
te rn
.
al
Module 23 | Page 39
U se
nl y
Fo r
Module 23 | Page 40
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
24
U se O te rn al
Module 24 | Page 1
Using Layers
Module Overview
Layers organize model items, such as features, datum planes, assembly parts, and even other layers, enabling you to perform operations on the items collectively. Layers enable you to simplify geometry selection by temporarily hiding or displaying specific model features or assembly components in the graphics window. You can also use layers to perform actions, such as simultaneously suppressing all the items in a layer.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand layers. Create and manage layers. Create layer states. Utilize layers in part models and assembly models.
In
nl y
Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, components, and even other layers.
Managed in layer tree Uses include: Collectively perform operations Hide/Unhide Select Model management Layer types include: Default Automatic User-created
Fo r
Understanding Layers
A layer is a container object that enables you to organize features, assembly parts, and even other layers. You can create as many layers as you need and associate items with more than one layer.
Layer Uses
A layer enables you to collectively perform operations on items in a layer. Layers are most often used from a model management standpoint to control the amount of information displayed in the graphics window. This helps you to more easily perform tasks. The two most common operations performed on items on a layer include: Hiding and Unhiding Layers You can hide and unhide layers in parts and assemblies. This hides or unhides the items on the layer. In Figure 1,
Module 24 | Page 2 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
again toggles off the layer tree. You can also click Show from the top of the model tree and select Layer Tree. Figure 2 displays the layer tree.
There are three types of layers that you can create in a model: Default Layers can be included in part and assembly templates. If your company uses part and assembly templates containing default layers, Creo Parametric automatically associates different features of a model to specific default layers. When using default layers, all parts have the same initial set of default layers. This enables you to use cascading layer control at the assembly level since each models layers are identically named. Automatic When you hide items in the model tree, those hidden items are automatically added to the Hidden Items Layer. User-Created You can create your own layers in a model and add items to them manually.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Layer Types
te rn
al
You use the layer tree to add items to layers and perform operations on layers. You can access the layer tree by selecting the View tab and clicking Layers from the Visibility group. This toggles on the layer tree. Clicking the icon
U se
the datum axes layer has been hidden, preventing you from viewing any datum axes on the model. Hiding items on a layer seems similar to suppressing those same items. However, there are significant differences: When you suppress an item, it is removed from the regeneration cycle of the model, whereas hiding an item simply removes it from the graphics window. A hidden item is included in Creo Parametric calculations, such as mass properties analyses. A suppressed item is not included in calculations. Selecting Items on the Layer Layers enable you to easily select multiple items, rather than selecting them individually. Mass selection is a beneficial, timesaving approach to follow in certain circumstances, such as needing to select 82 out of 100 part axes. Once the items in a layer are selected, you can perform operations on them. Typical operations include deleting those items or suppressing/resuming them. However, you could also edit their display or add them to a simplified representation.
nl y
Module 24 | Page 3
In
Fo r
You can create layers manually by naming the layer and selecting geometry items or components to add from the model tree or the graphics window. This type of layer is useful for specific tasks. As a best practice, it is recommended that you name the layer to enable other designers to recognize the task. When you create a layer, the Layer Properties dialog box displays, as shown in Figure 1. The dialog box displays the following information: Name This is the name of the layer. Contents The Contents tab displays which items are included or excluded from the layer. Items that are included on the layer are displayed with a green plus (+) symbol in the Status column, while items that are excluded from the layer are displayed with a red minus () symbol in the Status column. When selected, items are included on the layer if the Include button is turned on, while items are excluded from the layer if the Exclude button is turned on. Rules The Rules tab displays any applicable rules that have been defined for the layer. Rules enable you to create layers based upon defined criteria. To create a layer based on a rule, simply create a layer, name it, and define the rule. You can either define the rule within the Layer Properties dialog box, or you can save a rule from the Search Tool. In
Module 24 | Page 4 2012 PTC
PT
te rn
Figure 3 Layer Created with Rule
al
U se
nl y
addition to its usefulness in specific tasks, this type of layer is excellent when creating templates. Layers that are created with rules display with a different icon than those layers that were created without rules. In Figure 2, the layer does not contain rules, while the layer in Figure 3 was created with a rule. The Layer Properties dialog box also displays when you view the layer properties of any existing layer by selecting the layer, right-clicking, and selecting Layer Properties. You may also decide to set a layer as the active layer. When a layer is set as the active layer, all subsequently created features are automatically placed on the active layer. Note that a layer containing rules cannot be set as the active layer.
te rn
If you save a model and forget to save the layer status, the message log alerts you with a warning message, as shown here: .
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
You can also reset the layer status to the last saved status by selecting the from the Status types drop-down View tab and selecting Reset Status menu in the Visibility group, or by right-clicking in the layer tree and selecting Reset Status.
In
al
by selecting the View tab and selecting Save Status from the Status types drop-down menu in the Visibility group. You can also right-click in the layer tree and select Save Status.
U se
Whenever you hide or unhide a layer, you are modifying the layer status for that model. This new layer status is not automatically saved, even when the model is saved. Thus, it is necessary to save the layer status if you wish to retain it for the next time the model is opened. You can save the layer status
nl y
Module 24 | Page 5
Fo r
Module 24 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
2012 PTC
nl y
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Enable Plane Tag Display 4. Select the Model tab. 5. In the model tree, expand Extrude 4. Press CTRL, select the five internal datum features, right-click, and select Hide. and Axis Tag Display
6. At the top of the model tree, click Show Tree. and select Layer
Fo r
9. Click Repaint
10. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer. Type OTHER_DATUMS as the Name. Select DTM1 and A_1 as items to add and click OK. Right-click the new layer and select Hide. Click Repaint .
2012 PTC
PT
7. Expand the Hidden Items layer. Notice that the five internal datum features you hid are now on this layer.
In
te rn
al
Module 24 | Page 7
U se
nl y
.
11. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer. Type TOP_HOLES as the Name. Select the four holes on top of the model and click OK. Right-click the new layer and select Hide. Click Repaint .
14. Click OK in the Suppress dialog box. 15. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Resume > Resume All. 16. Click Save 17. Notice the warning in the Message Log.
In
te rn
from the Status and Axis Tag Display .
Fo r
21. Notice that the warning did not display in the Message Log this time. 22. Disable Plane Tag Display
Module 24 | Page 8
PT
19. From the Visibility group, select Save Status types drop-down menu. and click OK.
al
2012 PTC
U se
12. In the layer tree, right-click the TOP_HOLES layer and select Select Items.
nl y
Fo r
You create Layer States in the view manager to record the hide/unhide status for all layers in a model. You can create an initial layer state upon opening a model, and then create different states to quickly toggle between the layer displays. Remember, the action of hiding a feature or component actually places the item on the Hidden Items layer. Therefore, you can use layer states with hidden items without accessing the layer tree. Layer states apply to any item that may be placed on a layer, such as: Features Components Drawing Views and Detail Items
2012 PTC
PT
Figure 2 Layer_State001
In
te rn
Figure 3 Layer_State003
al
U se
Figure 1 View Manager
Module 24 | Page 9
nl y
3. Select the Layers tab. 4. Click New and press ENTER to create Layer_State001.
9. Click OK.
Fo r
Task 2:
1. Select CONNECTING_ROD. PRT from the model tree. 2. Right-click and select Open. 3. Enable Plane Display 4. Click View Manager 5. Select the Layers tab. 6. Click New and press ENTER to create Layer_State001.
Module 24 | Page 10 2012 PTC
PT
In
6. Press CTRL and select PISTON.PRT and PISTON_PIN.PRT from the model tree.
te rn
. from the In Graphics toolbar.
5. Click New from the View Manager, and press ENTER to create Layer_State002.
al
U se
nl y
from
7. Click New from the view manager and press ENTER to create Layer_State002. 8. Select DTM3 from the model tree. 9. Right-click and select Hide. 10. Right-click Layer_State002 and select Save. 11. Click OK. 12. Click New from the view manager and press ENTER to create Layer_State003. 13. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 14. Click Layers Visibility group. from the
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 24 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Unlike parts, you can add components to layers in an assembly. If you add components to a layer and then hide the layer, the component geometry hides. In Figure 2, the nut and bolt components were added to the HARDWARE layer and hidden. Notice that the components are removed from the display in the graphics window.
Module 24 | Page 12
PT
Similar to parts, you can hide non-solid geometry of assembly features including assembly datum features and surfaces. For example, if you create an assembly level hole, add it to a layer, and then hide the layer, the hole geometry still displays, while the hole axis is hidden.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: 2. In the ribbon, select the View tab. 3. Enable Plane Tag Display 4. Select the Model tab. 5. Click Show from the model tree and select Layer Tree. 6. Expand the Hidden Items layer. Notice that there are three components in this layer that contain hidden items. and Axis Tag Display
Fo r
8. Expand the 01___PRT_DEF_ DTM_PLN layer. Press CTRL and select the in BOLT.PRT and in NUT.PRT layers, right-click, and select Hide.
9. Click Repaint
PT
10. In the layer tree, select the 01__ASM_DEF_DTM_PLN layer, right-click, and select Hide. 11. Click Repaint .
2012 PTC
In
te rn
al
Module 24 | Page 13
U se
nl y
.
12. Right-click in the layer tree and select New Layer. Type HARDWARE as the Name. Select the NUT.PRT and BOLT.PRT components and click OK. Right-click the new layer and select Hide.
Fo r
19. Select the View tab from the ribbon. 20. Select Save Status the Visibility group. from the Status types drop-down menu in
22. Notice that the warning does not display in the Message Log this time. 23. Disable Plane Tag Display This completes the procedure. and Axis Tag Display .
Module 24 | Page 14
PT
17. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK.
In
16. Click the Model Display group drop-down menu and select Component Display Style > Transparent.
te rn
15. In the layer tree, right-click the HARDWARE layer and select Select Items.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Click Repaint
Module
25
U se O te rn al
Module 25 | Page 1
In a model, the order in which features are created and the references that they are provided create hierarchical relationships. These are called parent/child relationships and they determine feature interaction. In this module, you learn about parent/child relationships and how to view information about your models.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand parent/child relationships. View part and assembly parent/child information. View model, feature, and component information.
In
nl y
The parent/child relationship is one of the most powerful aspects of Creo Parametric and parametric modeling in general. This relationship serves an important role in propagating changes across the model to maintain the design intent. After a parent feature in a part is modified, all children are dynamically updated to reflect the changes in the parent feature. If you suppress or delete a parent feature, Creo Parametric prompts you for an action pertaining to the related children. You can also minimize the cases of unnecessary or unintended parent/child relationships. It is therefore essential to reference the desired geometry when creating feature dimensions so Creo Parametric can correctly propagate design changes throughout the model. When working with parent/child relationships, it can be helpful to remember that parent features can exist without child features. However, child features cannot exist without their parents.
Fo r
PT
You can use various types of Creo Parametric features as building blocks in the progressive creation of solid parts. Certain features, by necessity, precede other more dependent features in the design process. Those dependent features rely on the previously defined features for dimensional and geometric references. This is known as a parent/child relationship.
In
te rn
al
Figure 2 Parent/Child Relationship Flowchart
U se
nl y
Edit Children of the feature or component update as edits are regenerated. Edit Definition Enables you to modify the parent of the feature or component. Suppress/Resume Enables you to remove a feature or component, and its children, from the graphics window and regeneration cycle. Delete Deletes all children of the selected feature or component by default. You can also suspend the children, and then redefine each in turn. Hide/Unhide Does not affect parent/child relationships.
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Consider the impact of parent/child relationships on each of the following sketching functions:
example, a projection view is a child to the general view from which it was projected. Finally, a drawing view is a child to the source model. Details Are generally children to their respective models. Examples of drawing details include dimensions, parametric notes, and BOM tables.
Fo r
Module 25 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
Parents Displays the Parents for the currently selected feature. Current Object Displays the currently selected feature for which you wish to view parent/child relationships. Children Displays the Children of the currently selected feature. The graph of parent/child relationships in the Reference Viewer is interactive with the model in the graphics window: You can cursor over the feature node to highlight it on the model. You can expand the feature nodes to view the list of references that creates the parent/child relationships. You can also select the reference to see it highlight in the model. You can also see which feature the reference is a parent to, as it highlights the Reference Type arrow to the proper child feature node in the graph. In Figure 2, datum axis A_7 creates a parent/child relationship between the Hole_2 and Hole_3 features.
2012 PTC
PT
In
You can view parent/child relationships of features in a part model by using the Reference viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewer by selecting
te rn
al
U se
Module 25 | Page 5
nl y
Fo r
Module 25 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Info\Part_Parent-Child Task 1:
View Parent and Child information for features using the Reference Viewer.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 3. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. 4. Click Reference Viewer the Investigate group. from
9. Click the down arrows on the Current Object to view its entities.
Fo r
10. In the Reference Viewer, select the arrow leading to the Hole 3 node, right-click, and select Display Full Path. 11. Notice that Hole 3 refers to datum axis A_7 in Hole 2. 12. Click Close in the Full Path Display dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
In
7. Click the down arrows on each Parent node to view its entities.
te rn
6. Cursor over each node in the Reference Viewer to highlight the respective feature on the model.
al
Module 25 | Page 7
5. Notice that the reference graph displays the current object, Hole 2, in the middle, that object's Parents on the left, and that object's Children on the right.
U se
nl y
13. In the Reference Viewer, right-click the Hole 3 node and select Set as current. Notice that the graph has now updated. Notice the Parents specified for the Hole 3 feature. Notice the Children specified for the Hole 3 feature.
Fo r
Module 25 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
from
U se
16. Notice that the 14 dimension is dimensioned to datum axis A_7 in Hole 2. This dimension established the parent/child relationship.
nl y
Fo r
You can view parent/child relationships of components or their features in an assembly using the Reference Viewer. You can launch the Reference Viewer by selecting the desired component and then either clicking Reference
Viewer from the Investigate group in the Tools tab or right-clicking and selecting Info > Reference Viewer.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Reference Viewer: Component Placement as Current Object
al
U se
nl y
Relation, and System reference types display. The Reference Type to display Components in a path does not display by default.
Fo r
Module 25 | Page 10
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
2012 PTC
Info\Assembly_Parent-Child Task 1:
View Parent and Child information for components using the Reference Viewer.
5. Click Model As Current Object in the Reference Viewer dialog box. 6. Click the down arrows on the Children assembly node to view the components.
Fo r
8. Cursor over each of the BOLT.PRT models to highlight them in the model.
10. Notice that the graph updates to now show PLATE.PRT as a component in the assembly, as well as its Parents and Children. 11. Cursor over each node to highlight the respective features and components on the model.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 25 | Page 11
al
4. If necessary, widen both the Reference Viewer dialog box and the Parents column.
U se
3. In the Reference Viewer dialog box, select the Components in path check box as an additional Reference Type.
2. In the model tree, right-click PLATE.PRT and select Info > Reference Viewer.
nl y
12. Click the down arrows on each Parent node to expand it and view its referenced entities. 13. Select each of these entities to highlight them on the model.
Fo r
15. In the Reference Viewer, right-click the Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT) node and select Set as current. Notice that the graph has now updated. Notice the Parents specified for the Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT) component. Cursor over Hole 2 in PLATE.PRT to highlight it. The BOLT.PRT is assembled into this hole. Hence, the component is a child to the hole. Click Close.
Module 25 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
14. In the Reference Viewer, select the arrow leading to the Comp id 47 (BOLT.PRT) node, right-click, and select Display Full Path. If necessary, edit the Displayed Full Path to Surface id 55. Notice that BOLT.PRT is assembled to a surface in Extrude 1. Click Close.
nl y
te rn
When information is displayed about the item you have selected, the system helps you identify that item by displaying the following:
Fo r
Name Either the model, component, or feature name of the item you have selected. Feature Number/Component Number Displays the feature number or component number in the model tree as it is found in the model tree. ID The internal identification number that the system has assigned to the item you select.
PT
You can access the icons to view model, feature, and component information either in the Investigate group of the Tools tab or by right-clicking the appropriate item in the model tree or graphics window.
In
al
Figure 3 Viewing Feature Information
U se
nl y
Blue Links Call out the name of something, such as a Feature Name or Model name. Clicking these blue links highlights the item in the model. An item that's name is a series of three dashes simply means that no name is given for that particular item. Dimensions Dimensions are listed by their internal identification number. Clicking the dimension link highlights the dimension in the model. Highlight Feature Feature Info component. Highlights the feature in the model.
When you view the feature information for a given feature in a model, the Web browser window displays the following information: Part Name, Feature Number, and Feature ID. Parents, if any. Children, if any. Feature Elements Displays the elements that comprise the feature. Layers Displays any layers that the feature is on, and the layer status. Feature Dimensions Displays all dimensions found in the feature.
Fo r
When you view the model information for a component in an assembly, you must select whether you want the information for the top-level assembly or a component in the assembly. The Web browser window displays the following information: Part Name Displays the name of the model. Component Information Displays a list of the assembled components and only displays when model information is displayed for the top-level assembly. Feature List Provides a list of features, similar to the model tree. When you view the component information for a component in an assembly, the Component Constraints dialog box displays the assembly constraints used to assemble the component. You can highlight each constraint pair on the model by selecting it in the dialog box. The Web browser window then displays the following: Component Name, Parent Assembly, Component Number in Parent assembly, Feature Number, and Feature ID. Parents List Any components in the assembly which are parents. Children List Any components in the assembly which are children.
Module 25 | Page 14 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
When you view the Bill of Materials information for an assembly, the Web browser window displays the components found in the assembly, and their quantities. You must specify whether the BOM is to be created for the top-level assembly or a sub-assembly.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 25 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. from the 3. Click Model Investigate group 4. Click Apply > Close in the Model Info dialog box. 5. View the information that displays in the Web browser. 6. Click Web Browser the Web browser. 7. Click Component Investigate group. to close
Fo r
9. Notice the component constraints used to assemble this component. Select the constraints in the dialog box and notice that the pair highlights in the model.
10. Click Apply > Close in the Component Constraints dialog box to display the component information for PLATE.PRT.
Module 25 | Page 16
PT
In
te rn
from the
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
from
12. Verify that Top Level is selected in the BOM dialog box and click OK. 13. Notice that there are two BOLT.PRT components in the assembly.
Task 2:
2. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. from the 3. Click Model Investigate group.
Fo r
8. Arrange the model and Web browser window so you can see both. 9. Scroll up in the Feature information window to the Parents section.
10. Click the link for Extrude 3. 11. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.
2012 PTC
PT
7. Click Model Tree to collapse the model tree and leave the Web browser open.
In
te rn
Module 25 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
12. In the Children section of the Feature information, click the Hole 3 link. 13. Click Repaint . next to
16. Click Hole 3 to highlight it. to expand 17. Click Model Tree the model tree window. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
Module 25 | Page 18
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
15. Notice that the Feature information for the chamfer now displays. Also notice that Hole 3 is a parent to the chamfer.
Module
26
U se O te rn al
Module 26 | Page 1
Now that you understand parent/child relationships, you can learn to properly capture and manage design intent in models. In this module, you learn the tools available for modifying and capturing your design intent within all aspects of the modeling process. You also gain additional knowledge about selecting references that capture your design intent.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Handle the children of deleted and suppressed items. Reorder and insert features. Redefine features and Sketches. Capture design intent in Sketches, features, parts, and assemblies.
In
nl y
Fo r
If you attempt to suppress or delete an item that has children, the system highlights these child items in red. In Figure 1, the piston component is being suppressed, and the system highlights the piston pin and piston ring in red because they are children of the piston. In Figure 2, the two rounds highlighted in red are children of the round that is being suppressed. The system also displays a Delete or Suppress dialog box. When you click Options in this dialog box, the system displays the Children Handling dialog box, as shown in Figure 1. The Children Handling dialog box displays each of the child items highlighted in red. You have three different options available for handling these children, and each child can be handled independently: Suppress/Delete When suppressing a parent, you can also suppress a child item, and when deleting a parent, you can also delete a child item. If this is the desired option for all child items, you can click OK in the original Suppress or Delete dialog box without having to consider the options available in the Children Handling dialog box. Suspend Suppresses or deletes the parent, thus suspending the child item's regeneration temporarily. Once the parent is suppressed or deleted, the suspended child item regenerates. This results in one of the following:
Module 26 | Page 2 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
Another method to temporarily thaw frozen components is to delete the placement constraint which has missing references and add a Fix constraint. The Fix constraint locks, or fixes, a component in its current orientation but retains it as fully constrained.
te rn
al
The child item regenerates successfully. However, if the child item is a feature, it may have different geometry; if the child item is a component, it may be in a different position. In Figure 2, the two round children were suspended. After the parent round was suppressed, these two child rounds successfully regenerated, although their geometry is different. The child item does not regenerate successfully. If this occurs, Creo Parametric indicates the failure. You can then acknowledge and accept the failure or undo the changes. If you acknowledge the failure, you can continue to work normally, but you should ultimately fix the failure. You can fix the failure by modifying, suppressing, or deleting the child item, or by modifying another feature or part. Freeze The Freeze option is available only for assembly components. Once the parent component is suppressed or deleted, the child component is frozen, or locked, in 3-D space. Frozen components display in the model tree with a special icon preceding their name. In the left image of Figure 3, the PISTON_PIN.PRT component is frozen. In addition, any child components of the frozen component display in the model tree with a slightly different icon that includes a small square. Frozen components must be redefined, and the missing assembly placement references must be replaced with valid references from components that still remain in the assembly. Once this is accomplished, the component is no longer frozen in the assembly. These unlocked components are commonly referred to as thawed components, as shown in Figure 3.
U se
nl y
Module 26 | Page 3
Edit\Delete-Suppress_Child Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Click Settings and select Tree Filters.
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Suppressed Objects check box and click OK. 4. Select PISTON.PRT, right-click, and select Delete. 5. Notice that because PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING.PRT are children of PISTON.PRT, they are also to be deleted. 6. Click OK in the Delete dialog box. 7. Click Undo .
9. Again, notice that because PISTON_PIN.PRT and PISTON_RING. PRT are children of PISTON.PRT, they are also to be suppressed.
Fo r
10. In the Suppress dialog box, click Options. Edit the Status of PISTON_PIN.PRT to Freeze, leaving PISTON_RING.PRT to be suppressed. Click OK. 11. Notice the suppressed components and the freeze symbol on PISTON_PIN.PRT.
Module 26 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
12. Edit the definition of PISTON_PIN.PRT. 13. If necessary, select the Coincident constraint to activate it. Select the inner hole surface on CONNECTING_ROD.PRT into which you need to insert the pin. The pin was formerly inserted into the piston.
Task 2:
5. Click Undo
PT
Fo r
6. Select SIDE_ROUND, right-click, and select Suppress. 7. Again, notice that the child rounds also are to be suppressed. 8. In the Suppress dialog box, click Options. Edit the Status of both Round ids to Suspend. Click OK.
2012 PTC
In
te rn
al
U se
15. Notice that the PISTON_PIN. PRT the component is no longer frozen in the assembly.
O
Module 26 | Page 5
nl y
9. Notice the geometry changes made to the model because SIDE_ROUND is no longer present.
Fo r
Module 26 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Reordering Features
You can reorder features in the model tree by dragging them to a new location.
Original model Through All hole 2. Protrusion added Hole no longer meets design intent 3. Hole reordered Hole again meets design intent 1.
Reordering Features
The order of features is the sequence in which features display in the model tree. You can drag a feature within the model tree to place it such that it immediately succeeds its parent, even though you may have added several features to it after the parent was created. Since you must regenerate a parent before you regenerate its children, you cannot reorder a parent to succeed its children; nor can you reorder a child to precede its parents. Feature order can affect the geometry of a model. When a feature is created, it can only add or remove material from the model as the model exists at that point in time. For example, in Figure 1, the hole feature's depth is Through All, which drills the hole through the unseen side of the block. If you add an additional protrusion to the block, you need to reorder the hole to succeed this new protrusion if you want to retain its Through All design intent. In that case, the Through All depth would include the new protrusion and drill the hole through the entire block.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
When regenerating a model, Creo Parametric regenerates features one at a time, following the order in which they display in the model tree. As you create new features, they are added to the bottom of the list in the model tree.
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Hole Reordered
Module 26 | Page 7
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Locate Hole 1 in the model tree.
Fo r
5. Click Extrude from the Shapes group and select Sketch 2. Edit the depth to 6. Click Complete Feature from the Extrude dashboard.
Module 26 | Page 8
PT
In
4. Edit the definition of Hole 1. Select the Shape tab from the Hole dashboard. Notice the hole depth is Through All. Click Complete Feature .
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
6. Select Hole 1. 7. Notice that the hole does not appear to have a depth of Through All, but recall that it did at the time of creation. A feature can only add or remove material from the model as the model exists at the point in time in which the feature is created. 8. In the model tree, click and drag Hole 1 to reorder it to succeed Extrude 2. 9. Select Hole 1. 10. As previously observed, the hole still removes material Through All from the model; however, since the extrude feature now precedes the hole feature, the Through All depth has the desired effect. 11. Click Shell from the Engineering group.
12. Select the front face to remove it. 14. Click Complete Feature the Shell dashboard.
In
Fo r
15. Notice the boss around the hole feature. 16. In the model tree, click and drag Shell 1 to reorder it to precede Hole 1. 17. Reorient the model and notice that the shell feature now hollows out the entire model.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
from
al
Module 26 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Inserting Features
You can insert new features or components in the model tree where desired.
Original model One protrusion Shell has square edge 2. Insert mode activated Protrusion mirrored and rounds created before shell 3. Insert mode cancelled Hole on left goes through mirrored protrusion Shell hollows out mirrored protrusion and rounds 1.
PT
In
Fo r
Inserting Features
The model tree insertion indicator, shown in the model tree as Insert Indicator , indicates where features are inserted upon creation. By default, its position always succeeds all items listed in the model tree. You may drag it higher or lower in the model tree to insert features between other features in the tree. When you move the insert indicator, you enter Insert Mode and the model is rolled backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its new position, and all features update in the graphics window. If a feature precedes the indicator, then it is displayed in the graphics window and processed during regeneration. If a feature succeeds the indicator, it is temporarily suppressed. Thus, it is not regenerated or displayed in the graphics window. In addition to dragging the Insert Indicator up into the model tree, you can specify an insert location in the tree. To do this, select a feature, right-click, and select Insert Here. The insert indicator is then placed directly below the selected item.
Module 26 | Page 10 2012 PTC
te rn
al
U se
nl y
You can exit Insert Mode and return the insert indicator to its default location at the bottom of the model tree by cursoring over it, right-clicking, and selecting Cancel. You are then prompted to resume the features you suppressed when you activated Insert mode. When you select to resume them, Creo Parametric places them after the inserted features. For example, the model in the figures is a cast metal cover. However, a design change is needed to make another protrusion with a rounded notch in the middle. Hence, we need to mirror the existing protrusion and round the edges of the resulting notch. Additionally, these rounded edges should also be located on the inside of the part to enable easier extraction from the cast. As shown in the part's model tree, you can delete and recreate the shell and hole features after creating the necessary protrusion and rounds. Alternatively, you can use Insert mode to add the protrusion and round features before the Shell feature. Notice that this includes the round feature in the shell, which accomplishes the task of having round edges on the inside of the part. Insert Mode operates the same way when you are in an assembly. You may select a component, right-click, and select Insert Here to insert components between other components in the model tree. If you display features in the model tree, you can also drag the Insert Indicator. Again, when you move the Insert Indicator, you enter Insert Mode and the assembly is rolled backward or forward in its regeneration in response to its new position, and all components update in the graphics window.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 26 | Page 11
al
U se
nl y
4. Notice the features that are suppressed and therefore not currently regenerated. 5. Select Extrude 2 and click from the Editing Mirror group. Select datum plane RIGHT. Click Complete Feature from the Mirror dashboard.
Fo r
7.
Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group, press CTRL, and select both edges of the notch bottom. Right-click and select Full round. Click Complete Feature from the Round dashboard.
Module 26 | Page 12
PT
In
te rn
and
al
2012 PTC
U se
3. In the model tree, click the Insert Indicator and drag it so that it precedes Shell 1.
nl y
2. Select each of the five solid features in the model tree to highlight them in the graphics window.
8. Select Round from the Round types drop-down menu in the Engineering group, press CTRL, and select a vertical edge on the front and back of the notch. Edit the radius to 1. Click Complete Feature from the Round dashboard. 9. In the model tree, select the Insert Indicator , right-click, and select Cancel. 10. Click Yes in the Confirmation dialog box.
13. Also notice that the shell now hollows out both the mirrored protrusion and the newly inserted rounds.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
12. Notice the hole on the left that goes through the mirrored protrusion.
In
te rn
and
Module 26 | Page 13
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
to modify references internal to the sketch. For most solid features, you can use the dashboard to edit references; for example, selecting a different sketch for an extrude, or selecting different edges for a round.
Fo r
The model regenerates back to the feature being redefined. The model tree reflects that this has happened by removing all features that succeed the feature being redefined. In addition, the feature being redefined displays with a yellow icon preceding its name in the model tree, as shown here: Most features being redefined display in their orange dynamic preview color. In this state, the feature's drag handles display, enabling you to edit their respective values. In addition, the on-screen flip arrows display. The feature's UI is presented. Depending upon the feature being redefined, this could be either a dialog box or the dashboard. The UI or dialog boxes enable you to make changes to the feature. Once modifications have been made, most features can be previewed solid, if desired. This option regenerates the feature to determine whether the changes you have made are valid. Once you have completed the feature, it regenerates. After this occurs, the child features also regenerate to reflect the modifications made to their parent.
2012 PTC Module 26 | Page 15
PT
When you redefine, or edit the definition of, a feature or sketch, the following occurs:
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of RING_CUT. 3. Select the Placement tab from the Revolve dashboard, and notice that the Sketch is Internal. Click Edit. 4. Edit the 1.5 dimension to -1.5. 5. Click OK from the Sketch dashboard. 6. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 7. Click Remove Material toggle it off. to
8. Drag the handle from 360 to 75. 9. Click Complete Feature the Revolve dashboard.
Fo r
PT
12. Edit the definition of SKIRT_CUT. 13. Select the Placement tab from the Extrude dashboard, and notice that the Sketch is external to the extrude feature. Select an alternate external sketch, Sketch 2, from the model tree. from
14. Click Complete Feature the Extrude dashboard. 15. Notice the new skirt shape. 16. Click Undo .
Module 26 | Page 16
In
te rn
from and
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
17. Edit the definition of Sketch 1. 18. Click Sketch Setup Setup group. from the
19. In the graphics window, right-click and select Placement. 20. Orient to the Standard Orientation and notice the sketch in the model.
22. Click Sketch in the Sketch dialog box. 23. Click OK from the Sketch dashboard.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 26 | Page 17
al
U se
21. Select datum plane RIGHT from the model tree as the new sketching plane.
nl y
Fo r
Design intent is captured in Sketcher by selecting references and by sketching, constraining, and dimensioning entities. It is important to capture design intent in sketches since several other features originate from sketches. Consequently, you must carefully consider how to define a sketch and then capture it. You can always modify the sketch's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future changes.
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Open Sketch Design Intent Examples
U se
nl y
Closed-section sketches are the more robust of the two options and should therefore be used whenever possible. However, your desired design intent should ultimately dictate which type of sketch section is created. The yellow extrude features shown in Figure 2 are created from closed-section sketches, whereas the yellow extrude features created in Figure 3 are created from open-section sketches. The geometry created using an open-section sketch causes the resulting geometry to follow the 3-D contour of a surface. The endpoints of the open-section sketch must be constrained to the surface edge. The geometry created using the closed-section sketches ignores the 3-D contour of the surface and simply extends the geometry upward. There are two specific rules regarding open-section versus closed-section sketches in regards to feature requirements: Rib features require an open-section sketch. You must create the first extrude or revolve feature using a closed-section sketch.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
Closed-section sketch The sketched geometry forms a closed loop. Open-section sketch The sketch geometry does not form a closed loop.
In
te rn
parents for your sketch. If the references you select update, so does the sketch. Consider whether you want your sketcher references to be default datums or another feature. In Figure 1, the sketch feature references the angled surface of existing geometry, so if that angled surface updates, the sketch also updates. Additionally, the sketch references the existing hole. Therefore, if the hole location updates, the sketch's location updates as well. Dimensioning scheme When dimensioning circles and arcs, should the dimension be a radius or diameter? Should the sketch be dimensioned with an X-Y scheme or a radius-angle scheme? Deciding whether the sketch must pivot can help you determine which scheme to use. Consider which dimensions you might want to modify at a later time if the design changes. Constraints You must decide which constraints to use, and to which reference you wish to constrain because you are again creating parents when selecting constraint references. How should the sketch entities react to each other? Should they be parallel, perpendicular, or tangent? Should the sketch be symmetrical? If so, you need a centerline. Do you want arc and circle centers to remain aligned? In Figure 1, the sketch's construction line between each arc center is constrained to be parallel to the angled surface. Therefore, if the angle of the existing surface changes, so too must the angle of the sketch. Similarly, if the existing hole diameter is modified, this sketch's upper arc diameter also changes because it is constrained to be of equal radius. Sketched geometry type When sketching arcs, for example, you should use the arc type which helps you obtain your desired design intent. Remember to use construction geometry or sketched datum points to your advantage.
al
U se
nl y
Module 26 | Page 19
Fo r
Design intent is captured in features by specifying the correct feature and its options. As a result, you must carefully consider which feature options to specify to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify the feature's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.
PT
In
te rn
Figure 2 Embedded Datum Features
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Round/Chamfer type Determine which type of chamfer best captures your design intent. Is it better to use a 45 x D or a D x D? Again, considering how the design may change in the future helps you decide. Should the round be created by selecting the edge or by selecting the two surfaces in your model? If you believe that the design may change so that the edge disappears, use the two surfaces. Hole type Determine which dimensioning scheme works best in your design. Which would be best to the tip or to the shoulder of the hole? Internal versus external sketches In Figure 1, notice that feature Extrude 2 was created using an external sketch, but feature Extrude 3 was created using an internal sketch. Which sketch you ultimately use for feature creation depends upon these factors: You must use an internal sketch to create Geometry Points in the sketch. Internal sketches reduce clutter in the model tree. As shown in Figure 1, there are two additional model tree entries for Sketches 1 and 2 due to the fact that these were external sketches. Had Extrude 1 and Extrude 2 been created with internal sketches, neither of these entities would exist in the model tree. External sketches are helpful when you want to test multiple design alternatives for a feature. You can select alternate external sketches to test these design alternatives. Embedded datum features Embedded datum features are useful when you want to edit features as if they are one feature. This also simplifies the tree and reduces the display clutter. In Figure 2, Extrude 4 was created using five embedded datum features. However, embedded datum features are not recommended if you want to reuse the datums for other features.
al
U se
nl y
Module 26 | Page 21
PT
In
Fo r
Design intent is captured in parts by properly planning your model design and specifying which features to use and in which order. Often the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many different types or combinations of features. As a result, you must carefully consider which features to use to properly capture your design intent. You can always modify the part's design intent, but it is easiest to do when you have planned for future modifications.
te rn
Figure 3 Feature Order Example 2
al
U se
nl y
Here are some guidelines to follow when planning your part model design: Begin with the feature that determines the overall size and shape of the model. This is your base feature. The left image of Figure 1 displays the first four extrude features of a muffler model. The first feature is an extruded rectangle, which is the base feature of this model. Create major geometry features that add or remove material from your model. In the left image of Figure 1, the extruded cut along the front face of the muffler is an example of this type of major geometry feature. Create minor geometry features that add or remove material. These include smaller features such as protrusions, cuts, bosses, ribs, or holes. In Figure 1, the smaller extruded cuts are an example of this type of feature in the left image, and the holes in the right image are another example. Finally, add finishing features such as rounds and chamfers. In the right image of Figure 1, the rounds and shell are both finishing features.
The feature order also has an impact later on if the design is modified. In the bottom figures, the resulting geometry is identical, but was created differently. In Figure 2, the first feature extrudes the entire length, with subsequent features adding or removing material. In Figure 3, three extrudes were stacked in a series, with the overall length being created as the sum of the three features. If the length must be modified later, it is easier to modify the length of the design in Figure 2.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
You need the profile to change along the extrude length later in the design In this case, a blend feature may be the best option. You could initially create the blend straight back, and edit the individual blend sections at a later time. The path of extrusion may change In this case, a sweep may be the best option. You could initially create a straight sweep trajectory, and modify it at a later time. You need the feature to rotate In this case, a revolve may be the best option.
In
te rn
al
Often the same geometry result can be achieved by creating many different types or combinations of features. It is your responsibility to decide how to best create the geometry so that when the design is later modified, it updates in a predictable manner. For example, an extrude is common, but consider what occurs if any of the following situations arise:
U se
O
Module 26 | Page 23
nl y
PT
Fo r
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
Assembly type There are three different types of assemblies that you can create in Creo Parametric. Create the assembly type that best fits your needs: Static Assemblies are created using constraints. If you decide to create this type of assembly, determine whether some components require angular or linear offsets. If so, remember to create the proper constraint types. Dynamic Assemblies are created using connections. Determine whether your assembly needs to contain components that can be dynamically moved. If so, a dynamic assembly with pin, slider, and cylinder connections may be your best option. Mixture Assemblies are created with both static and dynamic components. Assembly/Sub-assembly Structure There are usually multiple ways to assemble components and still achieve the same assembly result. In Figure 1, notice that in one assembly example, component D is assembled into the sub-assembly SUB, while in the other example, it is assembled directly to the top-level. The end result may appear the same, but could cause the assemblies to behave differently should another component's placement be modified. Choice of base model The base model is the first component assembled into the assembly. It is important to consider which component you set as the base model because if all other models reference this component it becomes difficult to remove the base model. Assembly references used Remember that the assembly references you select for placing components create parent/child relationships between these components. Be sure to select references that are more robust if possible, such as selecting surfaces over edges. Fit or interference issues Determine what occurs when you assemble all your components into the assembly and you find you have interference or fit issues. Remember that you can always activate components to edit them within the context of the assembly. Once the top-level assembly is activated and regenerated, the other components update. Be careful when creating features in components in an assembly because you may inadvertently select a reference from a different component. If this occurs, it creates a parent/child relationship both between the two components and between the component and the assembly.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Module 26 | Page 25
Fo r
Module 26 | Page 26
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Module
27
U se O te rn al
Module 27 | Page 1
When using features as the foundation of design models, you create several references and parent/child relationships between them. Regeneration failures occur when Creo Parametric cannot successfully resolve a parent/child relationship, geometric situation, or a missing reference in a part or assembly model. Because the failure can occur for different reasons, you need to be able to diagnose the problem to correct it. In this module, you learn the various reasons for model failure and learn to utilize the tools and diagnostics available to resolve them.
Fo r
After completing this module, you will be able to: Understand and identify failures. Analyze geometry, open-section, and missing part references failures. Analyze missing component failures, missing component reference failures, and invalid assembly constraint failures. Understand resolve mode tools. Recover models. Access and use Creo Parametric's help system.
2012 PTC
PT
In
Objectives
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
Failure Indications
When a failure occurs, the system alerts you using several methods.
Module 27 | Page 2 2012 PTC
te rn
Figure 3 Regeneration Manager
al
U se
nl y
The Regeneration Manager icon in the status bar appears red: The Regeneration Caption appears. Before you can continue working, you must acknowledge the failure by clicking OK to accept the failure or Cancel to undo the changes. Note that there are situations in both part and assembly modes where the Cancel option is not available. The system highlights the failed features or components in the model tree. The failed items are shown in bold red text and any children of the failed item are shown in standard red text. In Figure 2, the Chamfer feature is the failing item, and the Round is a child of the failed Chamfer. If possible, the system also highlights failed geometry on the model in red, with child geometry highlighted in blue.
You can activate the Regeneration Manager in several ways: By selecting Regeneration Manager from the Regenerate types drop-down menu in the Operations group. By clicking the icon from the status bar. The icon includes three small circles which are filled in green, yellow, or red depending on the models current status: icon appears with the left circle When the Regeneration Manager filled in green, the model has been successfully regenerated. In this case, the Regeneration Manager dialog box does not open.
Fo r
When the Regeneration Manager icon appears with the middle circle filled in yellow, the model has been modified and some features or components need to be regenerated.
When the Regeneration Manager icon appears with the right circle filled in red, the model has failed regeneration.
PT
In
te rn
You can then select any of the listed items and right-click to obtain feature information or reference information for that item. This information can be useful in determining the cause of the failure, so you can intelligently resolve the failure.
al
U se
However, the Regeneration Manager is particularly useful during a failure to identify failed features or components. Once activated in a failure situation, the Regeneration Manager lists the failed items and any children of the failed items.
The Regeneration Manager can be used any time changes are made to a model to selectively regenerate certain features or components.
nl y
Once the failed items are located and selected, you can click Filter Tree from the Options drop-down menu to display only the failed items in the model tree.
Fo r
Module 27 | Page 4
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
When a feature fails due to invalid or impossible geometry, the failing feature and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the feature geometry could not be constructed displays in the feature information. Some examples of invalid or impossible geometry include:
Fo r
Round radii too small or too large If a round radius becomes too large for the geometry that is being rounded, then it fails. In Figure 1, the round in the left image previews properly because it is small enough to fit on the geometry. In the right image, the round becomes too large for the size of the geometry and cannot be created. Hence, the round preview is no longer available. Sweep radii If a circular section of radius T is swept along a curved trajectory of radius R, the radius R must be greater than or equal to radius T or else the resulting geometry overlaps, resulting in invalid geometry. In Figure 2, the circular section is swept along the curved trajectory, resulting in the cane-shaped geometry. In the middle image, the red cross-section lines in the FRONT view show that the geometry does not overlap. Hence, it is valid and RT. In the right image, however, the cross-section radius T has increased, as shown by the red cross-section lines. As a result, the cross-section lines overlap, and thus the geometry overlaps. As a result, the rule of RT is not valid, and the geometry cannot be created.
2012 PTC Module 27 | Page 5
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Blend Start Points Mismatch
U se
nl y
Blend start points mismatch If the start points between blend sections are mismatched by an angle that is too large, the resulting geometry twists upon itself, which cannot occur. In Figure 3, the blend section start points are mismatched by 90 degrees and the resulting geometry twists. If the start points are mismatched by 180 degrees, the feature fails. Extrude Through Until If a feature is extruded to a depth of Through Until, the feature must actually pass through the selected reference. If it does not, the feature fails because the geometry cannot be created.
Fo r
Module 27 | Page 6
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Resolve_Failures\Part_Invalid-Geometry Task 1:
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Orient to the named view 3D.
5. Click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. 6. Notice the failed chamfer and its children are indicated on the model and in the model tree. 7. Click Cancel in the caption to undo the changes. Task 2:
Fo r
3. Edit the R2 dimension to 1, and click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. Editing the trajectory radius to 1 violates the RT rule.
2012 PTC
PT
The smallest trajectory radius (R) is 2. The sweep diameter is currently 3, therefore T=1.5, and RT.
In
te rn
al
Module 27 | Page 7
U se
nl y
4. Click OK in the caption to accept the changes. 5. Click Regeneration Manager from the status bar. 6. Notice the failed sweep feature and its children, then click Cancel.
7. Select Sweep 1 from the model tree, then right-click and select Edit Definition. 8. Right-click and select Sketch. 9. Orient to the Standard Orientation. 10. Edit the diameter from 3 to 2. 11. Click OK . .
12. Click Complete Feature 13. Orient to the named view FRONT. 14. Notice the model has regenerated successfully.
Task 3:
1. Press CTRL+D.
Fo r
2. In the model tree, right-click Sweep 1 and select Edit. 3. Edit the diameter from 2 to 3 and click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. 4. Click OK to accept the result. 5. Select TRAJ_2 from the model tree, right-click, and select Edit.
6. Edit the radius to 2 and click twice in the background. 7. Notice the model has regenerated successfully. This completes the procedure.
Module 27 | Page 8
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
Most sketches for solid features should be closed sketches. However, when the design intent for a sketch requires an open section, the resulting feature must be bounded by other solid geometry. In Figure 2, the highlighted feature was extruded from an open-section sketch. However, if the depth is extended further than the bounding solid geometry, the feature fails because it is no longer bounded entirely by solid geometry, as shown in Figure 3. When a feature fails due to an open section, the failing feature and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the part could not be intersected with the feature displays in the feature information.
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
Figure 3 Open Section Sketch Failure
Module 27 | Page 9
U se
nl y
Resolve_Failures\Part_Open-Section Task 1:
4. Click twice in the background to de-select all geometry. 5. Notice the failed feature and its children are highlighted.
In
Fo r
9. Notice the system could not intersect the part with the feature, and the feature is unattached.
10. In the Web browser, scroll down to Section Data and notice that the feature was created with an open section.
Module 27 | Page 10
PT
8. Select the failing LEFT_TOOTH feature, right-click, and select Feature Info.
te rn
.
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. Scroll back up to the Children section for RIGHT_TOOTH and click Feature Info . 12. Scroll down to Section Data and notice that this feature does not indicate an open section. 13. Click Web Browser to minimize the Web browser.
In
Fo r
20. Click OK
23. Notice the model regenerates successfully. Alternatively, you could have resolved this failure by increasing the height of the main cylinder to prevent the open section from falling off the cylinders edge. This completes the procedure.
2012 PTC Module 27 | Page 11
PT
from the 19. Select Concentric Arc types drop-down menu, select the existing arc, and sketch an arc to close the section.
te rn
.
17. Right-click in the graphics window and select Edit Internal Sketch.
al
16. Notice that the open section is not visible in the feature preview. The system cannot create the open section protrusion beyond the existing solid material.
U se
15. Right-click LEFT_TOOTH from the model tree and select Edit Definition.
nl y
PT
In
Fo r
te rn
Figure 3 Editing a Sketch
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
You can also replace dimensions within Sketcher. When you select a dimension to replace, you must create the new dimension. The new dimension maintains the original dimension's sketcher dimension number (sd#), enabling any relations using the sketcher dimension to remain valid.
te rn
One way to help mitigate missing reference failures when editing sketches is to use the Replace function. The Replace function transfers references from an old entity to the new entity you have created. You can click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Replace while in Sketcher to access the Replace function. You then select the original entity that contains the references, and select the new entity to which you want to transfer the references.
al
U se
O
Module 27 | Page 13
nl y
Missing references for rounds or chamfers Occurs if you delete or redefine a feature and remove the edge that a round or chamfer uses. In Figure 2, the edges where the boss intersects the remainder of the part are rounded. If the boss is deleted, the edges are therefore deleted, and the rounds fail. Missing references can also occur if you insert a feature before the round or chamfer that causes the edge to be removed. For example, if you cut material off of an extrude feature, consequently cutting the edge off that a round references, the round fails. Editing a sketch Can result in changed or removed edges and surfaces in a model. If those changed or removed edges and surfaces are parents to other features, failures can occur. In Figure 3, the sketched entity is being deleted because you want to modify the sketch. However, Creo Parametric informs you that this entity is referenced by other entities. If you decide to continue and delete this entity, the child features fail due to the removal of this reference.
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Edit the definition of BASE_PROTRUSION. 3. In the graphics window, right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch. 4. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: . 5. Select the right-side angled line, right-click, and select Delete. 6. Review the warning message and click Yes.
PT
8. Click OK
from the Arc types drop-down menu and sketch an arc in its place. .
Fo r
10. Notice that SIDE_ROUND and its children fail. 11. Click OK in the caption to accept the result.
12. In the model tree, right-click SIDE_ROUND and select Info > Feature. 13. Notice that SIDE_ROUND is failing because feature references are missing. 14. Click Web Browser the Web browser.
Module 27 | Page 14
In
te rn
. to close
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
15. Edit the definition of SIDE_ROUND. 16. In the dashboard, select the Sets tab, select Set 2, and click in the Driving surface collector. 17. Spin the model and select the surface shown to satisfy the missing reference. 18. Click Complete Feature . 19. Notice the model regenerates successfully. Task 2:
Transfer references using the Replace function to avoid a missing references failure.
1. Edit the definition of BASE_PROTRUSION. 2. In the graphics window, right-click and select Edit Internal Sketch. 3. Click Sketch View In Graphics toolbar.
5. Select the left-side angled line. Click the Operations group drop-down menu and select Replace. Select the newly mirrored arc. Click Yes in the Replace Entity dialog box. . . 7. Click Complete Feature
Fo r
6. Click OK
2012 PTC
PT
Using the Replace functionality, you have transferred references to the arc entity, thus avoiding a failure.
In
te rn
from the
Module 27 | Page 15
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
If an assembly fails regeneration due to a missing component, the failing component and its children highlight in the model tree. A message indicating that the component model is missing displays in the feature information for that component. Reasons for missing components in assemblies include: The component was renamed in the operating system Creo Parametric is not aware if the component was renamed on the operating system. Consequently, the assembly containing this renamed component fails because the assembly searches for the component using its original name. The component was renamed in Creo Parametric without the assembly in session Again, if the assembly containing the component is not in session at the time that one of its components is renamed, the assembly continues to search for the original name. Thus, the assembly fails. The component was moved to a different folder If a component is moved from its original location, Creo Parametric continues to search for the component in its original location. Because the component has been moved, the assembly fails. In Figure 1, component HANDLE.PRT has been moved out of the Assy_Missing-Comp folder and placed into the Handle_Folder. Because the assembly requires this component (as shown in the model tree in Figure 2), it fails when opened.
Module 27 | Page 16 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
3. Also notice the Message Log indicates that the system cannot retrieve model HANDLE. 4. Click Close Displayed. Click OK.
In
5. Click Working Directory from the Navigator. Double-click Handle_Folder. Notice that this sub-folder contains HANDLE.PRT, which is the cause of the failure.
7. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to open it. 8. The assembly fails for the same reason.
Fo r
9. From the status bar, click . Regeneration Manager Notice that the HANDLE component within the JAW_SUB assembly has failed.
2012 PTC
PT
te rn
again.
Module 27 | Page 17
al
U se
nl y
10. In the Regeneration Manager, right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Feature Info. Notice the handle is failing because the model is missing. to Click Web Browser close the Web browser. 11. Click Cancel from the Regeneration Manager. 12. Click Find from the status bar. Select Component as the Look for option. Select the Status tab, and select Failed as the Value. Click Find Now and then click Close. 13. Notice that HANDLE.PRT is located in the model tree, and then select JAW_SUB.ASM to highlight it.
Fo r
15. Press CTRL+G to regenerate the model. Notice it regenerates successfully. 16. Click Save and click OK. and click File > Manage Session > Erase Not
Module 27 | Page 18
PT
14. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Retrieve Missing Component. Double-click Handle_Folder, if necessary. Select HANDLE.PRT, and click Open.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
19. Double-click Handle_Folder. 20. Right-click HANDLE.PRT and select Cut. 21. Click Working Directory from the Navigator, and click in the Web browser to clear the selection of any files.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 27 | Page 19
al
U se
23. Double-click MISSING-COMP_FAIL.ASM to verify that the failure has been resolved.
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. Select Hole 2. A leadscrew in the assembly mates to the flat base surface of this hole.
4. In the dashboard, click Drill Hole Profile . Select the Shape tab. Notice that the flat base surface of the hole has been replaced by a drill point.
6. Click Close
PT
In
Fo r
7. Click Working Directory from the Navigator. Double-click MISSING-REFS. ASM to open it. 8. Notice that the assembly fails to regenerate, but still displays all components.
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 27 | Page 21
al
U se
nl y
to close 13. Click Web Browser the Web browser, and click Cancel from the Regeneration Manager. 14. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM in the model tree. 15. Notice that the failed LEADSCREW.PRT and its failing child component are highlighted.
Fo r
16. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT and select Activate. 17. Select Hole 2. 18. Right-click and select Edit Definition. 19. In the dashboard, click Rectangle Hole Profile remove the drill point. to
Module 27 | Page 22
PT
Remember, you can click to start the Search Find tool to search for failing components and features.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
21. In the model tree, right-click MISSING-REFS.ASM and select Activate. 22. Click Regenerate . 23. Notice that the model regenerates successfully. This completes the procedure.
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 27 | Page 23
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Features Modified to Satisfy Constraints
al
U se
nl y
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
Module 27 | Page 25
al
U se
nl y
Change constraints You can constrain the component differently so that all constraints are satisfied, or you can disable constraints. Disabling constraints maintains the original references, but sets the constraint inactive for regeneration purposes. In Figure 2, the Coincident constraints for the rods were disabled. Notice that the components are still misaligned with respect to the holes. The disabled constraints can always be re-enabled at a later time. You can also disable constraints to test different assembly scenarios. Modify features to satisfy constraints You can modify either the features in the failing component or in the other components. In Figure 3, the holes in the other two components were moved outward so all constraints are again satisfied. Suppress or freeze the failing component You can then either modify the part or delete it from the assembly at a later time.
Our goal is to modify the rod spacing by modifying the hole spacing from 10 to 8 for the three block-shaped components. 1. Disable all Datum Display types. 2. In the model tree, right-click JAW_FIXED.PRT and select Activate. Select the hole on the right. Right-click and select Edit.
5. Click Regenerate
6. Failures occur. Click OK. 7. Notice that the two ROD.PRT components and their child assembly fails.
Fo r
8. Right-click the first ROD.PRT in the model tree and select Info > Feature. 9. Notice that ROD.PRT failed to regenerate due to component placement.
PT
Module 27 | Page 26
In
te rn
to close
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
11. Right-click the first ROD.PRT and select Edit Definition. 12. In the dashboard, notice that the constraint STATUS is Constraints Invalid. Select the Placement tab. Placement has failed due to conflicting Coincident constraints. Select the third Coincident constraint and clear the Constraint Enabled check box for testing purposes. 13. Click Complete Component 14. The first ROD.PRT now regenerates successfully. .
15. Right-click the second ROD.PRT and select Edit Definition. 16. Notice the dashboard constraint status. Select the Placement tab. Select the third Coincident constraint and clear the Constraint Enabled check box.
Fo r
17. Click Complete Component 18. The second ROD.PRT now regenerates successfully.
PT
In
2012 PTC
te rn
.
Module 27 | Page 27
al
U se
nl y
19. The JAW_SUB.ASM fails because its hole spacing still needs to be modified. 20. Expand JAW_SUB.ASM. 21. Right-click JAW_SLIDE.PRT and select Activate. 22. Select the lower right hole, right-click, and select Edit. 23. Edit the offset value from 10 to 8. 24. Click Windows and select INVALID-CONST.ASM. 25. Click Regenerate . 26. Collapse JAW_SUB.ASM. 27. Notice the model now regenerates successfully. 28. Zoom in and notice the rod misalignment. Recall that the Coincident constraints were disabled at this end.
Fo r
31. Click Windows and select INVALID-CONST.ASM. . 33. The hole spacing has been resolved for all three block components. The Coincident constraints for this end could now be re-enabled to essentially detect misalignment in the future.
Module 27 | Page 28
PT
30. Double-click the bottom right hole and edit its offset from 10 to 8.
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
nl y
Resolve Menu
Undo Changes Undo all the changes that caused the failure. Current Model/Backup Model For both investigating and fixing the problem, you can opt to work on the current (failed) model or the backup model. The backup model shows all features in their pre-regenerated state, and can be used to modify or restore dimensions of the features that are not displayed in the current (failed) model. You can toggle back and forth between the current and backup model. Investigate Enables you to investigate the cause of the model failure. You can list the changes made to items, show every object referenced by the failed feature, report geometrical misalignments found during the last regeneration, and roll the model back to a specified feature. Quick Fix Enables you to fix the failing feature by performing standard operations including Redefine, Reroute, Suppress, Clip Suppress, and Delete. Reroute enables you to reroute the failing feature's references to prevent failures in subsequent features. Clip Suppress suppresses not only the failing feature, but all subsequent features as well. Depending upon the operation selected, the Undo Changes option may become unavailable. Fix Model Enables you to fix other features in the model to resolve the failing feature. Using fix model enables you to create, delete, suppress, or redefine other features. It also enables you to modify the dimensions of the other non-failing features in the model, as well as restore all modified dimensions to their previous values. Again, depending upon the operation selected, the Undo Changes option becomes unavailable.
Fo r
Yes / No When you have fixed the regeneration failure using Resolve mode, you can click Yes to exit Resolve mode and return to normal operation. You can also click No to remain in Resolve mode if desired.
Module 27 | Page 30
PT
You must click Regenerate in the menu manager after a change is made to the model. While in Resolve mode, the regenerate icon is disabled since the resolve menu contains Regenerate in the menu manager.
In
te rn
al
U se
The Resolve menu is another tool available for resolving or preventing the regeneration problem that has occurred, and contains these main options:
nl y
2012 PTC
Recovering Models
You can recover models in the event of a system crash.
Dialog appears automatically upon restart: Retrieve Opens previous model Continue Starts a new Creo Parametric session
Upon restarting Creo Parametric, you are prompted to either Retrieve the previous model or Continue onto a new Creo Parametric session.
Fo r
Selecting the Retrieve option is very useful for avoiding lost work on your models.
2012 PTC
PT
In the event of a system crash, Creo Parametric captures a snapshot of the models in session, as well as any applied configuration settings.
In
Recovering Models
te rn
al
Module 27 | Page 31
U se
nl y
Fo r
The Help Center provides access to Creo Parametric's help system. Within the Help Center you can find information on specific modeling topics, as well as tutorials, books, and quick links. You can access the Help Center by clicking Creo Parametric Help from the top of the interface. The Help Center is subdivided into various Functional Areas to help narrow your search regarding a given question. Once the Functional Area has been selected, you can further navigate within specific Books. The Functional Areas and Books, respectively, pertaining to the Introduction to Creo Parametric course are: Functional Area Fundamentals Part Modeling
Module 27 | Page 32
PT
In
te rn
Figure 3 Online Resource Center Book Fundamentals Part Modeling, Sketcher
2012 PTC
al
U se
nl y
Once the desired Functional Area and Book have been selected, you further narrow your search for information by browsing in sub-books. You may also use the Search tab to type specific keywords and return a list of topics that satisfy those keywords. You can also use the Index tab to either browse for index terms or type in a keyword to find.
Command Search
When you cursor over any of the lists results, the system locates and highlights the command in the ribbon. If you select any of the lists results, the command starts.
Click File > Help > Online Resources to launch the Creo Parametric Help dialog box and display links to various information found online on PTC's Web site, as shown in Figure 3. Links to online resources include: New Users Provides some useful videos and tutorials for new users to Creo. Existing Users Provides additional videos and tutorials for more advanced users. Support & Training Provides links for contacting technical support and finding information about additional training available.
Fo r
Additional Resources
The following additional options are available from the File > Help menu:
Search Online Knowledge Base Enables you to search PTCs online knowledge base. Log Support Case Enables you to log a support case to PTC Technical Support for any issues. What's New? Provides information about what is new in the latest release of Creo Parametric.
PT
In
te rn
Online Resources
al
U se
Creo Parametric Help icon. This activates the Command Search field, which enables you to type commands. As you begin typing a command, a list appears and dynamically filters results as you type.
nl y
next to the
Configured Option Modules Displays which Creo Parametric optional license extensions are being used. Machine Information Provides information about the machine on which Creo Parametric is running. Installation Directories and Command Information Provides information about Creo Parametric software installation directories. Configuration Information Provides information about which config.pro files are read. You can also view information regarding the specific version of Creo Parametric you are running by clicking File > Help > About Creo Parametric. In the dialog box that displays, you can view the Creo Parametric date code and your companys Service Contract Number (SCN). If you need to log a call with PTC Technical Support, you need the SCN.
Fo r
Module 27 | Page 34
PT
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Use the Help Center. , select Part, type help as the Name, and click OK.
1. Click New
Fo r
6. In the Help Center Search field, type line tangent and click Search.
7. Notice that the system switches to the Search tab automatically and displays a list of results based on the search criteria entered.
8. In the list of results, click To Create a Line Segment Tangent to Two Entities and read the associated information. 9. Close the Creo Parametric Help dialog box.
2012 PTC
PT
Click next to Part Modeling to expand it. Select Part Modeling to expand it. Select Engineering Features to expand it. Select Rib to expand it. Select Profile Rib to expand it. Click About the Profile Rib Feature.
In
te rn
Module 27 | Page 35
al
U se
4. In the Creo Parametric Help next to Creo dialog box, click Parametric to expand it.
nl y
Task 2:
2. In the Command Search field, type she and notice that the commands dynamically filter down.
1. Click File > Help > Online Resources. 2. If prompted, type your PTC username and password. 3. Notice the New Users, Existing Users and Support & Training tabs on the left.
4. Click the Support & Training tab. Click Creo support center. Scroll down the page, and click Contact via Phone along the left side. Scroll to the end of the document, and locate the support number for your location in the PDF file. 5. Close the Creo Parametric Help dialog box.
Fo r
Task 4:
1. Click File > Help > System Information. Notice the information available under the License Information, Configured Option Modules, and Machine Information. Click Close. This completes the procedure.
Module 27 | Page 36 2012 PTC
PT
In
te rn
al
U se
Task 3:
nl y
3. Cursor over Shell, and notice its location in the Engineering group.
Module
28
U se O te rn al
Module 28 | Page 1
Project II
Module Overview
Using Creo Parametric and the remainder of the skills learned in this course, complete the following project design tasks.
Objectives
Fo r
2012 PTC
PT
After completing this module, you will be able to: Create the FLANGE.PRT model. Complete the ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT, IMPELLER_HOUSING.PRT, and FRAME.PRT models. Create the PISTON_ASSY.ASM, BLOWER.ASM, ENGINE.ASM., and ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM assemblies. Create the ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW drawing. Analyze and resolve interferences.
In
nl y
Upon returning from Creo Parametric training, you are assigned to create the AC-40 Air Circulator.
Fo r
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned in the course, instructions for each project step are minimal. Detailed picks and clicks are not provided. This enables you to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed though the project.
Be sure to save all project models within the Intro-2_working sub-folder of the Projects lab files folder structure. The Projects folder also contains a sub-folder named Intro-2_completed. Here you can find a completed version of each model in the project. These completed models can be used as reference, if required.
Module 28 | Page 2
PT
Minimal Instructions
In
te rn
ACME Incorporated develops and markets several consumer, industrial, and defense goods. The Light Industrial Division of ACME creates a number of products, including industrial fans, heating, air conditioning, and pumps. You are employed by the Light Industrial Division of ACME Inc., which has recently started to use Creo Parametric for its product designs.
al
Project Scenario
U se
O
2012 PTC
nl y
Piston Assembly
These figures illustrate the final piston assembly you create from the previously-created components in this project.
Figure 1 PISTON_PIN.PRT
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Figure 4 PISTON_ASSY.ASM
2012 PTC
al
Module 28 | Page 3
U se
Figure 2 PISTON.PRT
nl y
Figure 1 CRANKSHAFT.PRT
Fo r
Module 28 | Page 4
PT
Figure 3 ENGINE-BLOWER_MODELS.DRW
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
nl y
Blower Assembly
These figures illustrate the components and final blower assembly you complete in this project.
Figure 1 FLANGE.PRT
PT
In
te rn
Figure 4 BLOWER.ASM
Fo r
2012 PTC
al
Module 28 | Page 5
U se
Figure 2 IMPELLER.PRT
nl y
Figure 1 FRAME.PRT
Fo r
Module 28 | Page 6
PT
Figure 3 ENGINE_BLOWER.ASM
In
te rn
al
2012 PTC
U se
Figure 2 ENGINE.ASM
nl y
Figure 1 BOLT.PRT
PT
In
te rn
Figure 4 Viewing Interference
Fo r
2012 PTC
al
Module 28 | Page 7
U se
nl y
Copyright
Introduction to Creo Parametric 2.0
Copyright 2012 Parametric Technology Corporation and/or Its Subsidiary Companies. All Rights Reserved.
User and training guides and related documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation and its subsidiary companies (collectively "PTC") are subject to the copyright laws of the United States and other countries and are provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use of such documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed software user the right to make copies in printed form of this documentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC. Training materials may not be copied without the express written consent of PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, or reduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes. Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document. The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries. It may not be copied or distributed in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner not provided for in the software licenses agreement except with written prior approval from PTC.
Date
05/14/2012
Fo r
PT
In
te rn
Description
This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) (OCT95) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) (JUN95), and are provided to the US Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT88) or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19(c)(1)-(2) (JUN87), as applicable. 01012012
al
Important Copyright, Trademark, Patent, and Licensing Information: See the About Box, or copyright notice, of your PTC software.
U se
UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION. PTC regards software piracy as the crime it is, and we view offenders accordingly. We do not tolerate the piracy of PTC software products, and we pursue (both civilly and criminally) those who do so using all legal means available, including public and private surveillance resources. As part of these efforts, PTC uses data monitoring and scouring technologies to obtain and transmit data on users of illegal copies of our software. This data collection is not performed on users of legally licensed software from PTC and its authorized distributors. If you are using an illegal copy of our software and do not consent to the collection and transmission of such data (including to the United States), cease using the illegal version, and contact PTC to obtain a legally licensed copy.
nl y